JP5427064B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Game machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP5427064B2
JP5427064B2 JP2010041102A JP2010041102A JP5427064B2 JP 5427064 B2 JP5427064 B2 JP 5427064B2 JP 2010041102 A JP2010041102 A JP 2010041102A JP 2010041102 A JP2010041102 A JP 2010041102A JP 5427064 B2 JP5427064 B2 JP 5427064B2
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
movable body
movable
light emitting
wiring
disposed
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
JP2010041102A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP2011172869A (en
Inventor
浩二 岩佐
勇輔 田中
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Newgin Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Newgin Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Newgin Co Ltd filed Critical Newgin Co Ltd
Priority to JP2010041102A priority Critical patent/JP5427064B2/en
Publication of JP2011172869A publication Critical patent/JP2011172869A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP5427064B2 publication Critical patent/JP5427064B2/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Description

この発明は、可動体の動作により演出を行なう可動演出装置を備えた遊技機に関するものである。   The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a movable effect device that produces an effect by the operation of a movable body.

代表的な遊技機であるパチンコ機は、機内にセットされる遊技盤の盤面に画成した遊技領域の略中央位置に枠状の装飾部材が配設されて、遊技盤の裏側に配設された液晶式やドラム式等の図柄表示装置の表示部を装飾部材の窓口の後側に臨ませ、この図柄表示装置で図柄組み合わせゲームやリーチ演出等の遊技演出を行なうよう構成されている。また、パチンコ機では、所要の動作を行なう可動体を備えた可動演出装置を配設し、該可動体を図柄表示装置で行なわれる遊技演出に合わせて動作させることにより、視覚的な演出効果を向上させて遊技の興趣を高めている(例えば、特許文献1参照)。
特許文献1に開示の可動演出装置は、装飾部材の窓口外側に配設した移動機構に、図柄表示装置における表示部の前側に臨むように窓口内方に延在する可動体が片持ち状態で連結され、移動機構の駆動によって可動体が表示部の前側を上下動するよう構成される。
A pachinko machine, which is a typical gaming machine, has a frame-shaped decorative member arranged at the center of a gaming area defined on the board surface of the gaming board set in the machine, and is arranged on the back side of the gaming board. Further, the display unit of the liquid crystal type or drum type symbol display device faces the back side of the decorative member window, and the symbol display device is configured to perform game effects such as symbol combination games and reach effects. In addition, a pachinko machine is provided with a movable effect device having a movable body that performs a required operation, and by operating the movable body in accordance with a game effect performed by a symbol display device, a visual effect can be obtained. It is improved and the interest of the game is enhanced (for example, see Patent Document 1).
In the movable effect device disclosed in Patent Document 1, the movable body extending inward of the window is cantilevered so as to face the front side of the display unit in the symbol display device on the moving mechanism disposed outside the window of the decorative member. The movable body is connected and moved up and down on the front side of the display unit by driving the moving mechanism.

特開2009−82456号公報JP 2009-82456 A

特許文献1に開示の可動演出装置では、前述の如く可動体が図柄表示装置における表示部の前側を上下動するだけであって、可動体の動きが乏しく、視覚的な演出効果が充分に高められているとは言えない。そこで、例えば、可動体に別の可動体を設け、該別の可動体を駆動手段で動作させることが考えられる。しかるに、移動機構に対して片持ち支持されている可動体に別の可動体やその駆動手段を設置する構成では、移動機構と可動体との連結部に加わる負荷が大きくなって変形してしまい、可動体の円滑な動作が妨げられるおそれがある。殊に、視覚的な演出効果を高めてインパクトのある演出を行なうために可動体を大型化する場合には前記問題が顕著となり、可動体の大型化を阻害する要因となる。
すなわち本発明は、従来の技術に係る遊技機に内在する前記問題に鑑み、これらを好適に解決するべく提案されたものであって、第1の可動体に第2の可動体を設けて演出効果を向上すると共に、第2の可動体を設けても第1の可動体と支持部との連結部に加わる負荷を最小限に抑えることができる可動演出装置を備えた遊技機を提供することを目的とする。
In the movable effect device disclosed in Patent Document 1, as described above, the movable body simply moves up and down the front side of the display unit in the symbol display device, and the movement of the movable body is poor and the visual effect is sufficiently enhanced. It cannot be said that it is done. Therefore, for example, it is conceivable that another movable body is provided in the movable body and the other movable body is operated by a driving unit. However, in the configuration in which another movable body or its driving means is installed on the movable body that is cantilevered with respect to the moving mechanism, the load applied to the connecting portion between the moving mechanism and the movable body is increased and deformed. The smooth operation of the movable body may be hindered. In particular, when the movable body is increased in size in order to enhance the visual effect and produce an impact, the above problem becomes remarkable, which becomes a factor that hinders the increase in the size of the movable body.
That is, the present invention has been proposed in order to suitably solve these problems inherent in the gaming machine according to the related art, and the first movable body is provided with the second movable body. To provide a gaming machine provided with a movable effect device capable of improving the effect and minimizing the load applied to the connecting portion between the first movable body and the support portion even if the second movable body is provided. With the goal.

前記課題を克服し、所期の目的を達成するため、本願の請求項1に係る発明は、
可動体の動作により演出を行なう可動演出装置(105)を遊技盤(17)に備えた遊技機において、
前記可動演出装置(105)は、
前記遊技盤(17)の盤面に沿って直線的に移動自在で遊技盤(17)の前側から視認不能な支持部(122)と、
前記支持部(122)に片持ち支持された第1の可動体(123)と、
前記支持部(122)を移動させる第1の駆動部(121)と、
前記第1の可動体(123)に変位可能に配設された第2の可動体(139a,139b)と、
前記支持部(122)に配設された第2の駆動部(140)と、
前記第2の可動体(139a,139b)と第2の駆動部(140)とを連繋し、第2の駆動部(140)の駆動によって第2の可動体(139a,139b)を動作させる連繋機構(141)とから構成され、
前記遊技盤(17)の前側から視認不能な支持部(122)に、可動演出装置(105)に配設された複数の電気部品(143,154)の夫々に一端が接続される複数の配線(156,157)の他端が接続される中継基板(158)が配設されると共に、該中継基板(158)に、前記複数の配線(156,157)が集約して電気的に接続する中継用コネクタ受部(159)が設けられ、
前記中継用コネクタ受部(159)に一端が接続する中継用配線(160)の他端が、遊技盤(17)に配設された基板(161)に接続され、
前記可動演出装置(105)が配設される遊技盤(17)の設置部には、第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する前記支持部(122)の移動を許容する空間部(131)が移動方向に沿って設けられ、
前記中継用コネクタ受部(159)に一端が接続する前記中継用配線(160)は、前記支持部(122)から前記空間部(131)内に引き出されて収容された後に、他端が空間部(131)の側方に配設した前記基板(161)に接続され、
前記支持部(122)の移動に伴い中継用配線(160)が空間部(131)内で移動するよう構成されたことを特徴とする。
In order to overcome the above-mentioned problems and achieve the intended purpose, the invention according to claim 1 of the present application provides:
In a gaming machine equipped with a movable effect device (105) in a game board (17) that produces an effect by the action of a movable body,
The movable effect device (105)
A support portion (122) that is linearly movable along the board surface of the game board (17) and is invisible from the front side of the game board (17) ,
A first movable body (123) that is cantilevered by the support portion (122);
A first drive unit (121) for moving the support unit (122);
A second movable body (139a, 139b) disposed displaceably on the first movable body (123);
A second drive unit (140) disposed on the support unit (122);
The second movable body (139a, 139b) and the second drive unit (140) are connected to each other, and the second movable body (139a, 139b) is operated by driving the second drive unit (140). Mechanism (141) and
A plurality of wirings (156, 157) having one ends connected to each of a plurality of electrical components (143, 154) disposed in the movable effect device (105) to a support portion (122) that is invisible from the front side of the game board (17). ) Is connected to the other end of the relay board (158), and the relay board (158) is connected to the relay board (158) through which the plurality of wires (156, 157) are aggregated and electrically connected. 159)
The other end of the relay wiring (160) connected at one end to the relay connector receiving portion (159) is connected to the board (161) disposed on the game board (17),
In the installation part of the game board (17) on which the movable effect device (105) is disposed, a space part that allows the support part (122) to move between the first position and the second position ( 131) is provided along the direction of movement,
The relay wiring (160) having one end connected to the relay connector receiving portion (159) is pulled out from the support portion (122) into the space portion (131) and stored, and then the other end is a space. Connected to the substrate (161) disposed on the side of the portion (131),
The relay wiring (160) is configured to move in the space (131) as the support (122) moves .

請求項1の発明によれば、第1の可動体に、該第1の可動体とは独立して動作可能な第2の可動体を設けてあるので、全体として複数の動作を行なうことができ、動作による演出効果を向上し得る。また、第2の可動体を動作させる第2の駆動部を支持部に設けたので、第1の可動体と支持部との連結部に加わる負荷を小さくすることができ、第1の可動体の円滑な動作を達成し得る。
また、支持部から引き出された中継用配線が引き出される空間部は、該支持部の往復移動を許容するために設けられたものであるから、中継用配線を引き回すための専用の空間を確保する必要はなく、構成を簡略化し得る。
According to the first aspect of the present invention, since the second movable body that can operate independently of the first movable body is provided in the first movable body, a plurality of operations can be performed as a whole. It is possible to improve the production effect by the operation. Further, since the second drive unit for operating the second movable body is provided in the support portion, the load applied to the connecting portion between the first movable body and the support portion can be reduced, and the first movable body can be reduced. Smooth operation can be achieved.
Further, since the space portion from which the relay wiring drawn out from the support portion is drawn is provided to allow the support portion to reciprocate, a dedicated space for routing the relay wiring is ensured. There is no need, and the configuration can be simplified.

請求項2に係る発明では、前記連繋機構(141)は、第1の可動体(123)に沿って延在するよう配設され、一端部が第2の可動体(139a)に連繋されると共に他端部が第2の駆動部(140)に連繋される連繋部材(145,146,147)を備え、第2の駆動部(140)の駆動によって連繋部材(145,146,147)を第1の可動体(123)に沿って直線的に移動することで第2の可動体(139a)を動作させるよう構成したことを要旨とする。
請求項2の発明によれば、連繋機構の構成を簡略化して第1の可動体と支持部との連結部に加わる負荷をより低減し得る。
In the invention according to claim 2, the linkage mechanism (141) is disposed so as to extend along the first movable body (123), and one end thereof is linked to the second movable body (139a). In addition, a connecting member (145, 146, 147) whose other end is connected to the second driving unit (140) is provided, and the connecting member (145, 146, 147) is driven by the second driving unit (140) to the first movable body (123). The gist of the present invention is that the second movable body (139a) is operated by moving linearly along the line.
According to the second aspect of the present invention, the load applied to the connecting portion between the first movable body and the support portion can be further reduced by simplifying the structure of the linkage mechanism.

請求項3に係る発明では、前記第1の可動体(123)に前記第2の可動体(139a,139b)が2つ配設されると共に、前記連繋部材(145,146,147)は2つの第2の可動体(139a,139b)に夫々連繋されて、該連繋部材(145,146,147)の移動によって2つの第2の可動体(139a,139b)が同期して動作するよう構成したことを要旨とする。
請求項3の発明によれば、2つの第2の可動体を1つの連繋部材で動作するよう構成したので、可動体による演出効果をより向上しつつ第1の可動体と支持部との連結部に加わる負荷が増えるのを抑制し得る。
In the invention according to claim 3, two second movable bodies (139a, 139b) are arranged on the first movable body (123), and the connecting members (145, 146, 147) are two second The gist is that the second movable bodies (139a, 139b) are configured to be linked to the movable bodies (139a, 139b) and operate in synchronization with movement of the connecting members (145, 146, 147).
According to the invention of claim 3, since the two second movable bodies are configured to operate with one connecting member, the first movable body and the support portion are connected while further improving the effect of the movable body. It can suppress that the load added to a part increases.

請求項4に係る発明では、一方の第2の可動体(139a)は、前記連繋機構(141)に直接連繋されると共に、他方の第2の可動体(139b)は、連繋機構(141)に連繋する第2の連繋機構(150,151)に連繋されて一方の第2の可動体(139a)と同期して動作するよう構成され、前記第1の可動体(123)には、前記連繋機構(141)に直接連繋される一方の第2の可動体(139a)の位置を検出可能な原位置センサ(155)が配設されることを要旨とする。
請求項4の発明によれば、原位置センサで、連繋機構に直接連繋される一方の第2の可動体の位置を検出するよう構成したので、第2の可動体の位置を精度よく検出し得る。
In the invention according to claim 4, one second movable body (139a) is directly linked to the linkage mechanism (141), and the other second movable body (139b) is linked to the linkage mechanism (141). Connected to the second connecting mechanism (150, 151) connected to the first movable body (139a) and synchronized with one second movable body (139a). The first movable body (123) includes the connecting mechanism. The gist is that an original position sensor (155) capable of detecting the position of one second movable body (139a) directly connected to (141) is disposed.
According to the invention of claim 4, since the position of the second movable body that is directly linked to the linkage mechanism is detected by the original position sensor, the position of the second movable body is detected with high accuracy. obtain.

本発明に係る遊技機によれば、第1の可動体に第2の可動体を設けて演出効果を向上し得ると共に、第2の可動部を設けても第1の可動体と支持部との連結部に加わる負荷を最小限に抑えることができる。   According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the second movable body can be provided on the first movable body to improve the effect of the presentation, and even if the second movable section is provided, the first movable body and the support section are provided. The load applied to the connecting portion can be minimized.

本発明の好適な実施例に係るパチンコ機を示す正面図である。1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. 実施例に係る遊技盤を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the game board which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る遊技盤を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the game board which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る遊技盤を示す左側面図である。It is a left view which shows the game board which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る板部材を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the board member which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る装飾部材を後側から視た状態で示す概略斜視図である。It is a schematic perspective view which shows the decoration member which concerns on an Example in the state seen from the rear side. 実施例に係る装飾部材の背面図である。It is a rear view of the decorative member which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る装飾部材における窓側部用発光装置の配設部位を示す要部背面図である。It is a principal part rear view which shows the arrangement | positioning site | part of the light emission apparatus for window side parts in the decorative member which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る遊技盤における窓側部用発光装置の配設部位を、裏ユニットを破断して示す要部背面図である。It is a principal part rear view which fractures | ruptures a back unit and shows the arrangement | positioning site | part of the window side part light-emitting device in the game board which concerns on an Example. 図2のA−A線断面図である。It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. 実施例に係る窓側部用発光装置を分解して装飾部材と共に示す後側から視た要部分解斜視図である。It is the principal part disassembled perspective view seen from the rear side which decomposed | disassembled the light-emitting device for window side parts which concerns on an Example, and shows with a decoration member. 実施例に係る窓側部用発光装置を分解して装飾部材と共に示す後側から視た要部分解斜視図である。It is the principal part disassembled perspective view seen from the rear side which decomposed | disassembled the light-emitting device for window side parts which concerns on an Example, and shows with a decoration member. 実施例に係る裏ユニットの入賞口用発光装置の配設部位を、装飾部材のステージとの関係で示す前側から視た要部斜視図である。It is the principal part perspective view which looked from the front side which shows the arrangement | positioning site | part of the light emission device for winning holes of the back unit which concerns on an Example in relation to the stage of a decoration member. 実施例に係る装飾部材の要部正面図である。It is a principal part front view of the decoration member which concerns on an Example. 図14のB−B線断面図である。It is the BB sectional drawing of FIG. 図14のC−C線断面図である。It is CC sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 実施例に係る装飾部材における球通路のリブとパチンコ球との関係を示す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the rib of the ball path in the decoration member which concerns on an Example, and a pachinko ball. 実施例に係る各種演出装置や発光装置を配設した裏ユニットを示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the back unit which arrange | positioned the various production apparatuses and light-emitting device which concern on an Example. 実施例に係る裏ユニットを後側から視た概略斜視図である。It is the schematic perspective view which looked at the back unit which concerns on an Example from the rear side. 図18のD−D線断面図である。It is the DD sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 図20における基板設置部を示す拡大図である。It is an enlarged view which shows the board | substrate installation part in FIG. 実施例に係る裏ユニットの基板設置部と裏中継基板との関係を示す後側から視た要部概略斜視図である。It is the principal part schematic perspective view seen from the back side which shows the relationship between the board | substrate installation part and back relay board | substrate of the back unit which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る裏ユニットから発光基板や磁気センサ等を分解して前側から視た概略斜視図である。It is the schematic perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the light emission board | substrate, the magnetic sensor, etc. from the back unit which concerns on an Example, and was seen from the front side. 実施例に係る裏ユニットから可動演出装置や発光装置を分解して前側から視た概略斜視図である。It is the schematic perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable production | presentation apparatus and the light-emitting device from the back unit which concerns on an Example, and was seen from the front side. 実施例に係る裏ユニットにおける入賞口用発光装置の配設部位を示す要部正面図である。It is a principal part front view which shows the arrangement | positioning site | part of the light-emitting device for winning holes in the back unit which concerns on an Example. 図2のE−E線断面図であって下側部分を示す。It is the EE sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 2, and shows a lower part. 実施例に係る裏ユニットから入賞口用発光装置やカバー部材を分解して前側から視た概略斜視図である。It is the schematic perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the light-emitting device for a winning opening and the cover member from the back unit which concerns on an Example, and was seen from the front side. 図2のF−F線断面図であって下側部分を示す。FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 2 and shows a lower portion. 実施例に係る裏ユニットから表示器および表示設置部を分解して前側から視た概略斜視図である。It is the schematic perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the indicator and the display installation part from the back unit which concerns on an Example, and was seen from the front side. 実施例に係る裏ユニットにおける表示器の配設部位を示す要部縦断側面図である。It is a principal part vertical side view which shows the arrangement | positioning site | part of the indicator in the back unit which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る表示器の正面図である。It is a front view of the indicator which concerns on an Example. 図20における上側部分の拡大図である。It is an enlarged view of the upper part in FIG. 実施例に係る遊技盤を左可動演出装置が作動位置まで移動した状態で示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the game board which concerns on an Example in the state which the left movable production | presentation apparatus moved to the operating position. 図2のG−G線断面図である。It is the GG sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 図33のH−H線断面図である。It is the HH sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 図2のE−E線断面図であって上側部分を示す。It is the EE sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 2, and shows an upper part. 図2のI−I線断面図である。It is the II sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 図2のJ−J線断面図であって左側部磁気センサの配設部位を示す。It is the JJ sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 2, and the arrangement | positioning site | part of the left side magnetic sensor is shown. 図2のK−K線断面図である。It is the KK sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 実施例に係る裏ユニットの左側部分を拡大して示す正面図である。It is a front view which expands and shows the left side part of the back unit which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る左可動演出装置を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the left movable production | presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る左可動演出装置を前側から視た概略斜視図である。It is the schematic perspective view which looked at the left movable production | presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example from the front side. 実施例に係る左可動演出装置を前側から視た状態で示す分解斜視図である。It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the left movable production | presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example in the state seen from the front side. 図41のL−L線においてセンサ設置部のみを断面で示す底面図である。It is a bottom view which shows only a sensor installation part in a cross section in the LL line | wire of FIG. 図41のM−M線断面図である。It is the MM sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 実施例に係る左可動演出装置の内部構造を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the left movable production | presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る左可動演出装置における副可動体の作動前および作動後の状態を内部構造が分かる状態で示す説明正面図である。It is explanatory front view which shows the state before the operation | movement of the sub movable body in the left movable production | presentation apparatus based on an Example, and the state after an operation | movement in the state which can understand an internal structure. 実施例に係る左可動演出装置における副可動体の作動前および作動後の状態を内部構造が分かる状態で示す説明背面図である。It is explanatory back view which shows the state before the operation | movement of the sub movable body in the left movable production | presentation apparatus based on an Example, and the state after an operation | movement in the state which can understand an internal structure. 実施例に係る右可動演出装置を示す正面図であって、可動部材が第1位置にある状態を示す。It is a front view which shows the right movable production | presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example, Comprising: The state which has a movable member in a 1st position is shown. 実施例に係る右可動演出装置を示す正面図であって、可動部材が第2位置にある状態を示す。It is a front view which shows the right movable production | presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example, Comprising: The state which has a movable member in a 2nd position is shown. 実施例に係る右可動演出装置を正面側から視た状態で示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view shown in the state which looked at the right movable production device concerning an example from the front side. 実施例に係る右可動演出装置を裏ユニットに取り付けた状態で示す拡大図であって、可動部材が第2位置にある状態を示す。It is an enlarged view shown in the state where the right movable production device concerning an example was attached to the back unit, and shows the state where a movable member exists in the 2nd position. 実施例に係る右可動演出装置を正面側から視た状態で示す分解斜視図である。It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the right movable production | presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example in the state seen from the front side. 実施例に係る右可動演出装置を背面側から視た状態で示す分解斜視図である。It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the right movable production | presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example in the state seen from the back side. 実施例に係る可動部材(揺動可動体および装飾可動体)と駆動機構との関係を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the movable member (oscillation movable body and decoration movable body) which concerns on an Example, and a drive mechanism. (a)は、実施例に係る揺動可動体における上端部近傍を示す拡大図であり、(b)は揺動可動体と装飾可動体との関係の要部を背面側から視た状態で示す分解図である。(a) is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the upper end portion of the swing movable body according to the embodiment, (b) is a state in which the main part of the relationship between the swing movable body and the decorative movable body is viewed from the back side. FIG. 実施例に係る右可動演出装置における駆動機構を示す分解斜視図である。It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the drive mechanism in the right movable production | presentation apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る可動部材(揺動可動体および装飾可動体)と駆動機構との関係の要部を示す背面図であって、揺動可動体が第1位置にある状態で示す。It is a rear view which shows the principal part of the relationship between the movable member (oscillation movable body and decoration movable body) which concerns on an Example, and a drive mechanism, Comprising: The oscillation movable body is shown in the state which exists in a 1st position. 実施例に係る可動部材(揺動可動体および装飾可動体)と駆動機構との関係の要部を示す背面図であって、揺動可動体が第2位置にある状態で示す。It is a rear view which shows the principal part of the relationship between the movable member (oscillation movable body and decoration movable body) which concerns on an Example, and a drive mechanism, Comprising: The oscillation movable body is shown in the state which exists in a 2nd position.

次に、本発明に係る遊技機につき、好適な実施例を挙げて、添付図面を参照しながら以下詳細に説明する。なお、実施例では、遊技球としてパチンコ球を用いて遊技を行なうパチンコ機を例に挙げて説明する。また、以下の説明において、「前」、「後」、「左」、「右」とは、特に断りのない限り、図1に示すようにパチンコ機を前側(遊技者側)から見た状態で指称する。   Next, the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings by way of preferred embodiments. In the embodiment, a pachinko machine that plays a game using a pachinko ball as a game ball will be described as an example. Further, in the following description, “front”, “rear”, “left”, and “right” are states when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front side (player side) as shown in FIG. 1 unless otherwise specified. It points at.

(パチンコ機について)
実施例に係るパチンコ機10は、図1に示すように、矩形枠状に形成されて遊技店の図示しない設置枠台に固定される固定枠としての外枠11の開口前面側に、後述する遊技盤17(図2参照)が着脱可能に保持された本体枠としての中枠12が開閉および着脱可能に組付けられて、該遊技盤17の裏側に対して、各種図柄を変動表示可能な図柄表示装置13が着脱し得るよう配設されている。また、前記中枠12の前面側には、前記遊技盤17を透視保護するガラス板を備えた装飾枠としての前枠14が開閉可能に組付けられると共に、該前枠14の下方にパチンコ球Wを貯留する下球受け皿15が開閉可能に組付けられる。なお、実施例では、前記前枠14の下部位置に、パチンコ球Wを貯留する上球受け皿16が一体的に組付けられており、前枠14の開閉に合わせて上球受け皿16も一体的に開閉するよう構成される。また、前記中枠12の裏側には、遊技に供されたパチンコ球Wを遊技店側に設けた球回収設備に排出する球回収部(図示せず)が設けられている。実施例では、前記図柄表示装置13としては、各種図柄を表示可能な液晶パネルを収容ケースに収容した液晶表示装置が採用されるが、これに限られるものではなく、ドラム式の図柄表示装置やドットマトリックス式の図柄表示装置等の各種図柄を表示可能な従来公知の各種の図柄表示装置を採用し得る。
(About pachinko machines)
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 according to the embodiment will be described later on the front side of the opening of the outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that is formed in a rectangular frame shape and fixed to an installation frame base (not shown) of the amusement store. A middle frame 12 as a body frame on which a game board 17 (see FIG. 2) is detachably held is assembled so as to be openable and detachable, and various symbols can be variably displayed on the back side of the game board 17. The symbol display device 13 is arranged to be detachable. In addition, a front frame 14 as a decorative frame having a glass plate for seeing through the game board 17 is installed on the front side of the middle frame 12 so as to be openable and closable, and a pachinko ball is provided below the front frame 14. A lower ball tray 15 for storing W is assembled so as to be openable and closable. In the embodiment, an upper ball tray 16 for storing the pachinko balls W is integrally assembled at a lower position of the front frame 14, and the upper ball tray 16 is also integrated with the opening and closing of the front frame 14. Configured to open and close. Further, on the back side of the middle frame 12, a ball collection unit (not shown) is provided for discharging the pachinko balls W provided for the game to a ball collection facility provided on the game store side. In the embodiment, as the symbol display device 13, a liquid crystal display device in which a liquid crystal panel capable of displaying various symbols is housed in a housing case is adopted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a drum-type symbol display device, Various conventionally known symbol display devices capable of displaying various symbols such as a dot matrix type symbol display device can be adopted.

前記パチンコ機10の裏側には、図示しないが、パチンコ機10の電源制御を行なう電源装置、球払出し装置を駆動制御する払出し制御装置、打球発射装置を駆動制御する発射制御装置、外部端末に接続されるインターフェース基板等が配設されている。なお、これらの各装置は、前記遊技盤17の裏側に配設される主制御装置(図示せず)に配線接続され、該主制御装置からの制御信号に基づいて所定の制御を実行するようになっている。   On the back side of the pachinko machine 10, although not shown, a power supply device that controls the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, a payout control device that drives and controls the ball payout device, a launch control device that drives and controls the hitting ball launcher, and an external terminal An interface board or the like is disposed. Each of these devices is wired to a main control device (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 17 so as to execute predetermined control based on a control signal from the main control device. It has become.

(遊技盤について)
前記中枠12に配設される前記遊技盤17は、図2〜図4に示すように、前面(盤面)にパチンコ球Wが流下可能な遊技領域18aが画成された平板状の板部材18と、該板部材18の裏面に組付けられて前記図柄表示装置13が着脱可能に配設されると共に、何れも後述する可動演出装置105,106や発光装置85,107,108や発光基板109,110,111等が配設される合成樹脂材で形成された裏ユニット19とから構成され、該裏ユニット19に形成された前後に開口する開口部19aおよび後述する装飾部材28の窓口28aを介して図柄表示装置13の表示部を前面側から視認し得るよう構成されている。なお、当該遊技盤17において装飾部材28の窓口28aが、図柄表示装置13の表示部を前側から視認可能となる可視部として機能する。
(About game board)
As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the game board 17 disposed in the middle frame 12 is a flat plate member in which a game area 18 a in which a pachinko ball W can flow down is defined on the front surface (board surface). 18 and the rear surface of the plate member 18 so that the symbol display device 13 is detachably disposed. In addition, the movable rendering devices 105 and 106, the light emitting devices 85, 107, and 108, which will be described later, and the light emitting substrate 109, 110, 111, etc., and a back unit 19 formed of a synthetic resin material. An opening 19a that is formed in the back unit 19 and that opens to the front and back, and a window 28a of a decorative member 28 described later. It is comprised so that the display part of the symbol display apparatus 13 can be visually recognized through the front side. In the game board 17, the window 28a of the decorative member 28 functions as a visible portion that allows the display portion of the symbol display device 13 to be visually recognized from the front side.

(板部材について)
前記板部材18は、図2に示すように、所定板厚の積層合板の表面にセルを貼付けた化粧板であって、該板部材18の表面に、略円形状に湾曲形成したレール20が配設されて、該レール20によりパチンコ球Wが流下可能な前記遊技領域18aが画成され、前記打球発射装置から発射されたパチンコ球Wが遊技領域18a内に打ち出されるようになっている。また板部材18には、ルーター加工等の孔開け加工により前後に貫通する複数(実施例では3つ)の貫通口21a,21b,21cが前記遊技領域18a内に開設されて(図5参照)、各貫通口21a,21b,21cに対して各種部品が前側から取り付けられる。なお、前記貫通口21a,21b,21cの形成数は、板部材18に対して取り付けられる各種部品の個数や配設位置等により必要に応じて適宜変更されるものである。また、前記板部材18には、前記遊技領域18a内に多数の遊技釘(図示せず)が植設されており、遊技領域18aを流下するパチンコ球Wが遊技釘に接触することで流下方向を不規則に変化するようになっている。
(About plate members)
As shown in FIG. 2, the plate member 18 is a decorative plate in which cells are attached to the surface of a laminated plywood having a predetermined plate thickness, and a rail 20 that is curved and formed in a substantially circular shape is formed on the surface of the plate member 18. The game area 18a in which the pachinko ball W can flow down is defined by the rail 20, and the pachinko ball W launched from the hitting ball launcher is launched into the game area 18a. The plate member 18 has a plurality of (three in the embodiment) through holes 21a, 21b, and 21c opened in the game area 18a through the hole processing such as router processing (see FIG. 5). Various parts are attached to the through holes 21a, 21b, and 21c from the front side. The number of the through holes 21a, 21b, 21c is appropriately changed according to the number of various parts to be attached to the plate member 18, the arrangement position, and the like. The board member 18 has a large number of game nails (not shown) implanted in the game area 18a, and the pachinko balls W flowing down the game area 18a come into contact with the game nails to flow down. It is supposed to change irregularly.

ここで、実施例では、図5に示すように、前記板部材18には、前記貫通口として、前記レール20で囲まれた遊技領域18aの略中央から右側部(図5では左側部)に至る大部分が開口する第1の貫通口(開口部)21aと、該第1の貫通口21aの下方位置において遊技領域18aの左右幅方向の略中央に開設された第2の貫通口21bと、遊技領域18aの左下方(第2の貫通口21bの左側方位置、図5では右側方)に開設された第3の貫通口21cとの夫々が開設されている。そして、板部材18に開設された大型の第1の貫通口21aに、前後に開口する窓口28aが形成された装飾部材28(後述)が取り付けられている。また、前記板部材18に開設された第2の貫通口21bには、遊技領域18aを流下するパチンコ球Wが入賞可能な始動入賞装置24や特別入賞装置26が取り付けられている。更に、前記板部材18に開設された第3の貫通口21cには、遊技領域18aに開口する複数の左普通入賞口(入賞口)27bを備えた合成樹脂製の入賞口用飾り部材(飾り部材)27が取り付けられている。   Here, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the plate member 18 has, as the through hole, from the approximate center of the game area 18 a surrounded by the rail 20 to the right side (left side in FIG. 5). A first through-opening (opening) 21a that is open to the most part, and a second through-opening 21b that is opened at the approximate center in the left-right width direction of the game area 18a at a position below the first through-opening 21a. The third through-hole 21c opened at the lower left of the game area 18a (left side of the second through-hole 21b, right side in FIG. 5) is opened. And the decoration member 28 (after-mentioned) in which the window 28a opened to the front and back was formed is attached to the large 1st through-hole 21a opened in the board member 18. As shown in FIG. Further, a start winning device 24 and a special winning device 26 that can win a pachinko ball W flowing down the game area 18a are attached to the second through hole 21b opened in the plate member 18. Further, the third through-hole 21c opened in the plate member 18 is a synthetic resin prize opening decoration member (decoration) provided with a plurality of left normal winning openings (winning openings) 27b opened in the game area 18a. Member) 27 is attached.

前記板部材18には、前記第1の貫通口21aの左側部に、前後に貫通する貫通孔22が、該第1の貫通口21aに連通状態で形成されており、該貫通孔22には、後述する装飾部材28の球通過ゲート36が設けられるゲート用飾り部材37の後部が収容されるようになっている(図5または図10参照)。また板部材18の裏面には、前記貫通孔22の左端部に連通して後方に開口する所定深さの溝部23が、板部材18の左端部に向けて所定長さで形成され、該溝部23は、後述する配線38,43の引き回し空間として利用される。なお、貫通孔22は、前記裏ユニット19における後述する左画壁部56cの内側(窓口側)に位置すると共に、溝部23は、該左画壁部56cを挟んで内側から外側まで延在し、該溝部23を介して前記配線38,43を裏ユニット19の外側に引き出し得るよう構成される(図9参照)。   The plate member 18 is formed with a through-hole 22 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side of the first through-hole 21a so as to communicate with the first through-hole 21a. The rear part of the gate decoration member 37 provided with a ball passage gate 36 of the decoration member 28 described later is accommodated (see FIG. 5 or FIG. 10). Further, a groove portion 23 having a predetermined depth that communicates with the left end portion of the through hole 22 and opens rearward is formed on the rear surface of the plate member 18 with a predetermined length toward the left end portion of the plate member 18. 23 is used as a routing space for wirings 38 and 43, which will be described later. The through hole 22 is located inside (a counter side) of a left image wall portion 56c (described later) in the back unit 19, and the groove portion 23 extends from the inside to the outside with the left image wall portion 56c interposed therebetween. The wirings 38 and 43 can be drawn to the outside of the back unit 19 through the groove 23 (see FIG. 9).

(入賞装置について)
前記始動入賞装置24には、遊技領域18aに臨んで該遊技領域18aを流下するパチンコ球Wが入賞可能な上下の始動入賞口24a,24bが設けられる。そして、始動入賞装置24の始動入賞口24a,24bへのパチンコ球Wの入賞を契機として、所定数のパチンコ球Wが賞球として前記上下の球受け皿15,16に払い出されると共に、後述する表示器90の特別表示部91において図柄変動が開始されるようになっている。なお、下側の始動入賞口24bを挟む左右位置には、相互に近接および離間するよう揺動可能な一対の羽根部材25,25が設けられ(図2参照)、図示しないソレノイド等の駆動手段により羽根部材25,25を揺動することで、下側の始動入賞口24bが開閉される。
(About winning devices)
The start winning device 24 is provided with upper and lower start winning ports 24a and 24b facing the game area 18a and capable of winning a pachinko ball W flowing down the game area 18a. A predetermined number of pachinko balls W are paid out to the upper and lower ball receiving trays 15 and 16 as prize balls when the pachinko balls W are awarded to the start winning ports 24a and 24b of the start winning device 24, and are displayed later. The symbol change is started in the special display part 91 of the container 90. A pair of blade members 25 and 25 that can swing so as to be close to and away from each other are provided at the left and right positions sandwiching the lower start winning opening 24b (see FIG. 2), and driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). By swinging the blade members 25, 25, the lower start winning opening 24b is opened and closed.

前記特別入賞装置26は、遊技領域18aに臨む横長の特別入賞口26aが開閉扉26bで常には閉鎖されており、前記始動入賞口24a,24bへのパチンコ球Wの入賞を契機とした前記表示器90の特別表示部91での図柄変動の結果、該特別表示部91に所定の図柄組み合わせで図柄が停止表示されることで所謂「大当り」が発生し、これにより開閉扉26bが開放するよう作動制御されて、特別入賞口26aへの入賞により多数の賞球を獲得し得るようになっている。なお、前記図柄表示装置13では、前記始動入賞装置24の始動入賞口24a,24bへのパチンコ球Wの入賞を契機とした前記特別表示部91での図柄変動の開始から、該図柄変動の結果としての当りと外れの確定までの間において、特別表示部91で行われる図柄変動ゲームに係わる図柄変動演出が行なわれて、遊技者に期待感や優越感等を与え得るよう構成される。   In the special winning device 26, the horizontally long special winning opening 26a facing the game area 18a is always closed by an opening / closing door 26b, and the display is triggered by the winning of the pachinko ball W to the start winning opening 24a, 24b. As a result of the symbol variation in the special display portion 91 of the container 90, the symbol is stopped and displayed on the special display portion 91 with a predetermined symbol combination, so that a so-called "big hit" occurs, and the door 26b is thereby opened. The operation is controlled so that a large number of winning balls can be obtained by winning the special winning opening 26a. In the symbol display device 13, the symbol variation results from the start of the symbol variation in the special display unit 91 triggered by the winning of the pachinko ball W to the starting prize opening 24 a, 24 b of the starting prize winning device 24. The symbol change effect related to the symbol change game performed in the special display unit 91 is performed between the hit and the final determination, so that the player can have a sense of expectation and superiority.

(入賞口用飾り部材について)
前記板部材18に配設される前記入賞口用飾り部材27は、前記第3の貫通口21cを前側から覆い得る寸法および形状に形成された非光透過性の装飾板体27aと、該装飾板体27aに設けられた複数(実施例では3つ)の左普通入賞口(入賞口)27bと、装飾板体27aに前後に貫通するよう形成された開口部に嵌め込まれて可視部として機能する光透過性の光透過部材27cとから構成される。そして、図26に示す如く、光透過部材27cの後端部を第3の貫通口21cに対して前側から挿入して板部材18の表面に装飾板体27aを当接させ、該装飾板体27aを板部材18にネジ止めすることで、当該入賞口用飾り部材27が板部材18に位置決め固定される。入賞口用飾り部材27を板部材18に取り付けた状態で、前記光透過部材27cおよび各左普通入賞口27bは第3の貫通口21cに臨むと共に、左普通入賞口27bは前記遊技領域18aに開口する。また装飾板体27aには、各左普通入賞口27bに対して第3の貫通口21c内を板部材18の裏面まで延出する樋部27dが設けられ、遊技領域18aから左普通入賞口27bに入賞したパチンコ球Wは、板部材18の裏側に取り付けられた裏ユニット19の後述する左排出用球通路76に樋部27dを介して通入するよう構成される。なお、入賞口用飾り部材27を板部材18に取り付けた状態で光透過部材27cの後端は、図26に示す如く、板部材18の裏面より前側に位置するよう設定され、第3の貫通口21c内には、光透過部材27cの後方に後述する入賞口用発光装置85を収容可能な空間が確保されるようになっている。
(About the decorations for prize opening)
The prize opening decoration member 27 disposed on the plate member 18 includes a non-light-transmitting decorative plate body 27a formed in a size and shape capable of covering the third through hole 21c from the front side, and the decoration. A plurality of (three in the embodiment) left ordinary winning opening (winning opening) 27b provided in the plate body 27a and an opening formed so as to penetrate forward and backward through the decorative plate body 27a function as a visible portion. And a light-transmitting light transmitting member 27c. Then, as shown in FIG. 26, the rear end portion of the light transmitting member 27c is inserted from the front side with respect to the third through hole 21c, and the decorative plate body 27a is brought into contact with the surface of the plate member 18, thereby the decorative plate body. By screwing 27 a to the plate member 18, the winning prize decoration member 27 is positioned and fixed to the plate member 18. With the prize opening decoration member 27 attached to the plate member 18, the light transmitting member 27c and each left ordinary prize opening 27b face the third through hole 21c, and the left ordinary prize opening 27b faces the game area 18a. Open. In addition, the decorative plate body 27a is provided with a collar portion 27d extending in the third through hole 21c to the back surface of the plate member 18 with respect to each left normal winning opening 27b. The pachinko ball W that has won a prize is configured to pass through a collar portion 27d into a left discharge ball passage 76 (to be described later) of the back unit 19 attached to the back side of the plate member 18. It should be noted that the rear end of the light transmitting member 27c is set so as to be located in front of the back surface of the plate member 18 in a state in which the prize opening decoration member 27 is attached to the plate member 18, and the third penetration is made. In the mouth 21c, a space capable of accommodating a light-emitting device 85 for a prize opening described later is secured behind the light transmitting member 27c.

(装飾部材について)
前記板部材18の前記第1の貫通口21aには、前後に開口する枠状の装飾部材28が前側から嵌め込まれるようにして着脱自在に配設される。そして、前記裏ユニット19の開口部19aから臨む前記図柄表示装置13の表示部は、装飾部材28における前後に開口する窓口28aを介して板部材18(遊技盤17)の前側に露出して、該図柄表示装置13の表示部で展開される図柄変動演出を前側から視認し得るようになっている。
(About decorative members)
A frame-shaped decorative member 28 that opens in the front-rear direction is detachably disposed in the first through hole 21a of the plate member 18 so as to be fitted from the front side. And the display part of the said symbol display apparatus 13 which faces from the opening part 19a of the said back unit 19 is exposed to the front side of the board member 18 (game board 17) through the window 28a opened to the front and back in the decoration member 28, The symbol variation effect developed on the display unit of the symbol display device 13 can be viewed from the front side.

前記装飾部材28は、図6,図7または図36等に示す如く、前記第1の貫通口21aの内周面に沿って延在する内周壁28bと、該内周壁28bの前端部に設けられて外側方へ突出する固定片28cとを備える。そして、内周壁28bを第1の貫通口21aに対して前側から挿入して板部材18の表面に固定片28cを当接させ、該固定片28cを板部材18にネジ止めすることで、当該装飾部材28が板部材18に位置決め固定される。また装飾部材28には、左側部の上下の略中央位置から装飾部材28の上縁および右側縁をなす枠部分に亘って、固定片28c(板部材18の表面)より前方へ突出する庇状部28dが連続して形成されており、前記遊技領域18aに打ち出されて庇状部28dに接触したパチンコ球Wを側方に誘導して装飾部材28の窓口28aを横切って流下しないようになっている。   The decorative member 28 is provided at an inner peripheral wall 28b extending along the inner peripheral surface of the first through hole 21a and a front end portion of the inner peripheral wall 28b, as shown in FIG. And a fixing piece 28c protruding outward. Then, the inner peripheral wall 28b is inserted from the front side with respect to the first through hole 21a, the fixed piece 28c is brought into contact with the surface of the plate member 18, and the fixed piece 28c is screwed to the plate member 18, The decorative member 28 is positioned and fixed to the plate member 18. The decorative member 28 has a hook-like shape that protrudes forward from the fixed piece 28c (the surface of the plate member 18) from a substantially central position on the upper and lower sides of the left side to a frame portion that forms the upper edge and the right edge of the decorative member 28. A portion 28d is formed continuously, so that the pachinko ball W that is launched into the game area 18a and contacts the bowl-shaped portion 28d is guided sideways so as not to flow down across the window 28a of the decorative member 28. ing.

前記装飾部材28には、図2または図13等に示す如く、窓口28aの下側に、ステージ部29が配設されると共に、窓口28aの左側に、遊技領域18aに球導入口30aが開口して該遊技領域18aを流下するパチンコ球Wを取り込んでステージ部29に案内する球導入部30が設けられ、該球導入部30からステージ部29に通出されたパチンコ球Wは、ステージ部29の転動面29a上を左右に転動した後に、前記各入賞口24a,24b,26a,27bおよび後述する右普通入賞口34が臨む遊技領域18aに排出される。   As shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 13 and the like, the decoration member 28 is provided with a stage portion 29 below the window 28a, and a ball introduction port 30a is opened in the game area 18a on the left side of the window 28a. Then, a ball introduction part 30 that takes in the pachinko ball W flowing down the game area 18a and guides it to the stage part 29 is provided, and the pachinko ball W passed from the ball introduction part 30 to the stage part 29 is After rolling on the 29 rolling surfaces 29a to the left and right, the winning holes 24a, 24b, 26a, 27b and the right normal winning hole 34 to be described later are discharged to the game area 18a.

(装飾部材の光透過部について)
前記装飾部材28には、光透過性の合成樹脂材等から形成されて、後述する発光装置39,107,108や発光基板110のLEDから照射される光によって窓口28a内や前側を照明可能としたり、後述する表示器90の表示を前側から視認可能とするための複数の光透過部31,32,33が設けられる。実施例では、窓口28aの上部、左側部および右下隅部に、上部光透過部31、左側部光透過部32および隅部光透過部33が設けられている(図6,図7参照)。これら光透過部31,32,33については、対応する発光装置39,107,108や発光基板110または表示器90と関連することから、該発光装置39,107,108や発光基板110または表示器90の説明に関連して後述するものとする。なお、装飾部材28における隅部光透過部33の下側には、前記始動入賞装置24の右側方に臨む位置に、右普通入賞口34が遊技領域18aに開口するように設けられ、該右普通入賞口34に入賞したパチンコ球Wは、裏ユニット19に設けられた後述する右排出用球通路77を介して機外(球回収部)に排出されるよう構成される。
(About the light transmission part of the decorative member)
The decorative member 28 is formed of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material or the like, and can illuminate the inside of the window 28a or the front side with light emitted from light emitting devices 39, 107, 108 and LEDs of the light emitting substrate 110 described later. In addition, a plurality of light transmitting portions 31, 32, and 33 are provided for enabling the display of the display 90, which will be described later, to be visible from the front side. In the embodiment, the upper light transmission part 31, the left light transmission part 32, and the corner light transmission part 33 are provided at the upper part, the left part, and the lower right corner part of the window 28a (see FIGS. 6 and 7). Since these light transmitting portions 31, 32, 33 are related to the corresponding light emitting devices 39, 107, 108, the light emitting substrate 110, or the display 90, the light emitting devices 39, 107, 108, the light emitting substrate 110, or the display device. It will be described later in connection with the description of 90. Note that a right normal winning opening 34 is provided below the corner light transmitting portion 33 of the decorative member 28 at a position facing the right side of the start winning device 24 so as to open to the game area 18a. The pachinko ball W that has won the normal winning opening 34 is configured to be discharged to the outside (ball collecting unit) through a right discharge ball passage 77 (described later) provided in the back unit 19.

(ゲート用飾り部材について)
前記装飾部材28の左側部には、遊技領域18aを流下するパチンコ球Wを検出可能な球検出センサ35が配設される球通過ゲート36を備えるゲート用飾り部材(飾り部材)37が一体的に設けられている。そして、遊技領域18aに臨む球通過ゲート36をパチンコ球Wが通過したことを球検出センサ35で検出することで、後述する表示器90の普通表示部93で表示される普通図柄が変動開始するよう構成されている。またゲート用飾り部材37には、図11および図12に示す如く、遊技領域18aに臨む球通過ゲート36の後側に、前記球検出センサ35を保持するためのセンサ保持部37aが設けられており、装飾部材28を前記第1の貫通口21aに取り付けた状態で、該センサ保持部37aが前記貫通孔22に収容されるようになっている(図10参照)。なお、センサ保持部37aは、貫通孔22から後方に突出しない寸法に設定されている。そして、センサ保持部37aで保持された球検出センサ35の後端に一端が接続するセンサ用配線38が、図9または図10に示す如く、前記板部材18の裏面に形成された前記溝部23に収容された状態で引き回された後に、裏ユニット19に配設された後述する裏中継基板61に接続されるよう構成される。
(About decorative elements for gates)
A gate decoration member (decoration member) 37 including a ball passage gate 36 in which a ball detection sensor 35 capable of detecting a pachinko ball W flowing down the game area 18a is provided integrally with the left side portion of the decoration member 28. Is provided. Then, when the ball detection sensor 35 detects that the pachinko ball W has passed through the ball passing gate 36 facing the game area 18a, the normal symbol displayed on the normal display section 93 of the display 90 described later starts to change. It is configured as follows. 11 and 12, the gate decoration member 37 is provided with a sensor holding portion 37a for holding the ball detection sensor 35 on the rear side of the ball passing gate 36 facing the game area 18a. The sensor holding portion 37a is accommodated in the through hole 22 with the decorative member 28 attached to the first through hole 21a (see FIG. 10). The sensor holding portion 37a is set to a size that does not protrude rearward from the through hole 22. A sensor wire 38 having one end connected to the rear end of the sphere detection sensor 35 held by the sensor holding portion 37a is formed on the back surface of the plate member 18 as shown in FIG. 9 or FIG. After being routed in a state accommodated in the rear unit 19, it is configured to be connected to a back relay substrate 61 (described later) disposed in the back unit 19.

(窓側部用発光装置について)
前記装飾部材28に設けられた前記左側部光透過部32には、前記ゲート用飾り部材37に対応する内側の近傍位置に、前記窓口28aの内側を照明可能な窓側部用発光装置(電気部品)39が配設されている。左側部光透過部32には、図8,図11または図12に示す如く、装飾部材28の内周壁28bに沿って延在する外側壁部32aと、該外側壁部32aから内側に離間して位置する内側壁部32bおよび両壁部32a,32bの前端間に位置する前壁部32cとにより後方に開口する収容部32dが画成され、該収容部32dに前記窓側部用発光装置39が収容状態で配設される。窓側部用発光装置39は、図8または図12に示す如く、内側(窓口側)を向く実装面に複数のLED(発光体)40aを実装した窓用発光基板(発光基板,電気部品)40と、該窓用発光基板40を前記左側部光透過部32に縦向き姿勢で取り付けるための取付部材41とから構成される。取付部材41は、前記収容部32dの開口形状に略合致する板状に形成されたものであって、その内側縁の上下端部に、窓用発光基板40の後端部上下位置を支持可能な支持部41a,41aが形成される。また取付部材41には、上下に離間して前後に貫通する2つのネジ用通孔41bが夫々形成されると共に、両ネジ用通孔41b,41bの間に位置決め孔41cが前後に貫通するよう形成されている。
(About light emitting device for window side)
The left side light transmitting portion 32 provided on the decorative member 28 is provided with a window side light emitting device (electrical component) capable of illuminating the inside of the window 28a at a position near the inside corresponding to the gate decorative member 37. ) 39 is provided. As shown in FIG. 8, FIG. 11 or FIG. 12, the left side light transmitting portion 32 has an outer wall portion 32a extending along the inner peripheral wall 28b of the decorative member 28, and is spaced inward from the outer wall portion 32a. A housing portion 32d that opens rearward is defined by the inner wall portion 32b and the front wall portion 32c located between the front ends of both wall portions 32a and 32b, and the window side light emitting device 39 is formed in the housing portion 32d. Is disposed in the accommodated state. As shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 12, the window side light emitting device 39 is a window light emitting substrate (light emitting substrate, electrical component) 40 in which a plurality of LEDs (light emitting bodies) 40a are mounted on the mounting surface facing the inside (window side). And an attachment member 41 for attaching the window light emitting substrate 40 to the left side light transmitting portion 32 in a vertical orientation. The mounting member 41 is formed in a plate shape substantially matching the opening shape of the housing portion 32d, and can support the vertical position of the rear end portion of the window light emitting substrate 40 on the upper and lower end portions of the inner edge thereof. Support portions 41a and 41a are formed. The attachment member 41 is formed with two screw through holes 41b that are spaced apart vertically and penetrate forward and backward, and a positioning hole 41c penetrates forward and backward between the screw through holes 41b and 41b. Is formed.

これに対し、前記左側部光透過部32には、図8,図10,図11または図12に示す如く、収容部32dを画成する前壁部32cに、窓用発光基板40の前端部を支持可能な受部32eが設けられると共に、該前壁部32cおよび外側壁部32aには後方に向けて突出する固定ボス32fが、上下方向に離間して設けられている。また、外側壁部32aにおける両固定ボス32f,32fの間に臨む後端に、後方に突出する位置決めピン32gが突設される。そして、前端部を受部32eで支持するよう収容部32dに収容した窓用発光基板40の後端部を支持部41a,41aで支持すると共に、位置決め孔41cに位置決めピン32gを挿通することで位置決めされた取付部材41を、各ネジ用通孔41bに後側から挿通したネジを対応する固定ボス32fに設けたネジ孔に螺挿して固定することで、窓用発光基板40が受部32eと支持部41aとで前後から挟持された状態で収容部32dに収容状態で取り付けられる。   On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, FIG. 10, FIG. 11 or FIG. 12, the left side light transmitting portion 32 has a front wall portion 32c defining a housing portion 32d and a front end portion of the window light emitting substrate 40. The front wall 32c and the outer wall 32a are provided with fixed bosses 32f protruding rearward and spaced apart in the vertical direction. In addition, a positioning pin 32g that protrudes rearwardly projects from the rear end of the outer wall portion 32a that faces between the fixed bosses 32f and 32f. Then, the rear end portion of the window light emitting substrate 40 accommodated in the accommodating portion 32d is supported by the support portions 41a and 41a so that the front end portion is supported by the receiving portion 32e, and the positioning pin 32g is inserted into the positioning hole 41c. By fixing the positioned mounting member 41 by screwing screws inserted from the rear side into the respective screw through holes 41b into screw holes provided in the corresponding fixing bosses 32f, the window light emitting substrate 40 receives the receiving portions 32e. And the support part 41a are attached to the accommodation part 32d in a accommodated state while being sandwiched from the front and rear.

なお、前記収容部32dに収容された窓用発光基板40は、実装面が内側壁部32bに対向し、前記LED40aの発光によって内側壁部32bを介して前記窓口側部が照明される。また窓用発光基板40における後端部の上下部位には、図11または図12に示すように、前側に凹む切欠部40bが夫々形成され、両切欠部40b,40bにおいて前記取付部材41の支持部41a,41aで窓用発光基板40を支持することで、両切欠部40b,40bの間で後方に突出する部分が支持部41a,41aに当接して、当該窓用発光基板40の上下方向の位置決めがなされる。   The window light emitting substrate 40 housed in the housing portion 32d has a mounting surface facing the inner wall portion 32b, and the window side portion is illuminated through the inner wall portion 32b by light emission of the LED 40a. Further, as shown in FIG. 11 or FIG. 12, notches 40b that are recessed forward are formed in the upper and lower portions of the rear end portion of the window light emitting substrate 40, respectively, and the notches 40b and 40b support the mounting member 41. By supporting the window light emitting substrate 40 with the portions 41a and 41a, the portions protruding rearward between the notches 40b and 40b abut against the support portions 41a and 41a, and the vertical direction of the window light emitting substrate 40 Is positioned.

前記左側部光透過部32における外側壁部32aには、図11または図12に示す如く、前記ゲート用飾り部材37に配設された球検出センサ35の側方に対向する位置(第1の貫通口21aと貫通孔22との連通部)に、後方および外側方に開口する側開口42が形成されている。また、前記窓用発光基板40における実装面とは反対側の裏面には、前記側開口42と対応する位置にコネクタ受部40cが設けられ、該コネクタ受部40cに一端が接続する部品用配線43が、側開口42を介して収容部32dから外側方に引き出されるよう構成される。なお、前記取付部材41の前面における前記側開口42と対応する位置には、前方に向けて突出する閉塞片41dが設けられ(図11参照)、取付部材41を左側部光透過部32に取り付けた状態で、該閉塞片41dが側開口42の後部開口側を閉塞して、側開口42に挿通された部品用配線43が後方に抜けるのを防止するよう構成される。   As shown in FIG. 11 or FIG. 12, the outer wall portion 32a of the left side light transmitting portion 32 is positioned opposite to the side of the sphere detection sensor 35 disposed on the gate decoration member 37 (first position). A side opening 42 that opens rearward and outward is formed in a communication portion between the through hole 21 a and the through hole 22. In addition, a connector receiving portion 40c is provided at a position corresponding to the side opening 42 on the back surface of the window light emitting substrate 40 opposite to the mounting surface, and one end of the wiring is connected to the connector receiving portion 40c. 43 is configured to be drawn outward from the accommodating portion 32d through the side opening 42. A closing piece 41d protruding forward is provided at a position corresponding to the side opening 42 on the front surface of the mounting member 41 (see FIG. 11), and the mounting member 41 is attached to the left side light transmitting portion 32. In this state, the closing piece 41d closes the rear opening side of the side opening 42 and prevents the component wiring 43 inserted through the side opening 42 from coming out backward.

前記左側部光透過部32における外側壁部32aの後端は、前記板部材18の裏面より前側に位置するよう設定され、前記側開口42から外側方に引き出された部品用配線43は、第1の貫通口21aから貫通孔22に向けて板部材18の裏面より後方に突出しない状態で引き回し得るようになっている。そして、該部品用配線43は、図9または図10に示す如く、前記板部材18の裏面に形成されて前記センサ用配線38が引き回される前記溝部23内を引き回された後に、裏ユニット19に配設された後述する裏中継基板61に接続されるよう構成される。   The rear end of the outer wall portion 32a in the left side light transmitting portion 32 is set to be positioned in front of the back surface of the plate member 18, and the component wiring 43 led out from the side opening 42 It can be routed from one through hole 21a toward the through hole 22 without protruding backward from the back surface of the plate member 18. 9 or 10, the component wiring 43 is formed on the back surface of the plate member 18 and is routed through the groove 23 through which the sensor wiring 38 is routed. The unit 19 is configured to be connected to a back relay board 61 (described later) disposed in the unit 19.

(ステージ部について)
前記装飾部材28のステージ部29は、上下方向に緩やかに起伏する波形に形成された転動面29aを有し(図13参照)、該転動面29a上のパチンコ球Wは、上下方向に変位しながら左右に転動するようになっている。実施例の転動面29aは、上方に突出した凸形状部分(山状の部分)が1箇所設けられると共に、下方に突出した凹形状部分(谷状の部分)を凸形状部分の左右両側部の2箇所に備えた起伏形状に形成される。なお、装飾部材28には、ステージ部29における転動面29aの後端縁に沿って上下方向に延在する後壁部44が設けられ、該後壁部44における転動面29aから上方に延出する部分で、該転動面29aを転動するパチンコ球Wが板部材18の後方(図柄表示装置13の表示部側)へ移動するのを規制するよう構成される。
(About the stage)
The stage portion 29 of the decorative member 28 has a rolling surface 29a formed in a waveform that gently undulates in the vertical direction (see FIG. 13), and the pachinko balls W on the rolling surface 29a are in the vertical direction. It rolls to the left and right while being displaced. The rolling surface 29a of the embodiment is provided with one convex portion (mountain portion) protruding upward, and the concave portion (valley portion) protruding downward on both right and left sides of the convex portion. It is formed in the undulation shape provided in two places. The decorative member 28 is provided with a rear wall portion 44 extending in the vertical direction along the rear end edge of the rolling surface 29 a in the stage portion 29, and upward from the rolling surface 29 a in the rear wall portion 44. The extending portion is configured to restrict the pachinko ball W rolling on the rolling surface 29a from moving to the rear of the plate member 18 (the display unit side of the symbol display device 13).

(装飾部材の球通路について)
前記ステージ部29における転動面29aの後端縁に設けられた前記後壁部44には、図15または図16に示すように後方に膨出する画壁によって前記転動面29aを挟んで上下方向に延在する導入路45が画成され、該導入路45の上端部に形成される球入口45aは、該転動面29aにおける凸形状部分の頂部に対応する上方位置で開口し、転動面29aを転動するパチンコ球Wが球入口45aを介して導入路45に通入可能に構成される。なお、後壁部44は透明(光透過性)な合成樹脂材から形成されて、前記裏ユニット19に配設される後述する下部発光基板111の前側を覆う装飾カバー119に施された意匠が前側から視認可能に構成されると共に、該下部発光基板111に実装したLED(発光体)111aからの光が後壁部44に後側から照射されて、後壁部44全体が照らされるよう構成される。
(About the ball passage of decorative members)
The rear wall portion 44 provided at the rear end edge of the rolling surface 29a in the stage portion 29 sandwiches the rolling surface 29a with an image wall bulging rearward as shown in FIG. 15 or FIG. An introduction path 45 extending in the vertical direction is defined, and a spherical inlet 45a formed at the upper end of the introduction path 45 opens at an upper position corresponding to the top of the convex portion of the rolling surface 29a. A pachinko ball W rolling on the rolling surface 29a is configured to be able to enter the introduction path 45 through the ball inlet 45a. The rear wall portion 44 is formed of a transparent (light transmissive) synthetic resin material, and has a design applied to a decorative cover 119 that covers the front side of a lower light emitting substrate 111 (described later) disposed on the back unit 19. It is configured to be visible from the front side, and is configured such that light from an LED (light emitting body) 111a mounted on the lower light emitting substrate 111 is irradiated to the rear wall portion 44 from the rear side so that the entire rear wall portion 44 is illuminated. Is done.

前記装飾部材28には、前記導入路45の下端部に連通接続されて前記ステージ部29の下方において前後方向に延在し、前記始動入賞装置24の上側で球出口46aが開口する球通路46が形成されている。該球通路46の球出口46aは、図13に示す如く、前記転動面29aにおける凸形状部分の頂部に対応する下方位置において前記固定片28cに開設されたものであって、該球出口46aが始動入賞装置24に設けた上側の始動入賞口24aの鉛直上方に位置して、球出口46aから排出されるパチンコ球Wが上側の始動入賞口24aに入賞し易くなっている(図2参照)。ちなみに、前記ステージ部29の転動面29aから通入したパチンコ球Wを遊技領域18aに排出するための導入路45および球通路46は、遊技中のパチンコ球Wを誘導する通路である。   The decoration member 28 is connected to the lower end portion of the introduction passage 45 and extends in the front-rear direction below the stage portion 29. The ball passage 46 opens with a ball outlet 46a on the upper side of the start winning device 24. Is formed. As shown in FIG. 13, the ball outlet 46a of the ball passage 46 is formed in the fixed piece 28c at a lower position corresponding to the top of the convex portion of the rolling surface 29a, and the ball outlet 46a Is positioned vertically above the upper start winning opening 24a provided in the start winning apparatus 24, so that the pachinko balls W discharged from the ball outlet 46a can easily win the upper start winning opening 24a (see FIG. 2). ). Incidentally, the introduction path 45 and the ball path 46 for discharging the pachinko balls W that have entered from the rolling surface 29a of the stage portion 29 to the game area 18a are paths for guiding the pachinko balls W during the game.

前記球通路46には、図14に示す如く、3条のリブ47,48,49が、該球通路46に沿って並列に形成されている。実施例では、球通路46の底部中央に第1リブ47が形成され、該第1リブ47を挟んで左側部に左第2リブ48が形成されると共に右側部に右第2リブ49が形成される。また、左右の第2リブ48,49の離間間隔R1は、図17に示す如く、パチンコ球Wの直径Rより大きく設定され(R1>R)、前記導入路45から球通路46に通入したパチンコ球Wは、第1リブ47と左第2リブ48または第1リブ47と右第2リブ49の2点で支持して案内し得るよう構成される。なお、第1リブ47に対する左右の第2リブ48,49の高さ位置は、第1リブ47と第2リブ48,49とでパチンコ球Wが支持された状態において、第2リブ48,49とパチンコ球Wとの接触部が、図17(a),(b)に示すように当該パチンコ球Wにおける中心を通る水平線Xと交差する外周近傍となるよう設定されて、第1リブ47と左第2リブ48または第1リブ47と右第2リブ49の2点で支持されるパチンコ球Wを安定して誘導し得るよう構成されている。   As shown in FIG. 14, three ribs 47, 48, and 49 are formed in the ball passage 46 in parallel along the ball passage 46. In the embodiment, the first rib 47 is formed at the center of the bottom of the ball passage 46, the left second rib 48 is formed on the left side across the first rib 47, and the right second rib 49 is formed on the right side. Is done. Further, the separation interval R1 between the left and right second ribs 48 and 49 is set to be larger than the diameter R of the pachinko ball W (R1> R), as shown in FIG. The pachinko ball W is configured to be supported and guided at two points of the first rib 47 and the left second rib 48 or the first rib 47 and the right second rib 49. Note that the height positions of the left and right second ribs 48 and 49 with respect to the first rib 47 are the second ribs 48 and 49 when the pachinko ball W is supported by the first rib 47 and the second ribs 48 and 49. 17A and 17B, the contact portion between the first rib 47 and the pachinko ball W is set to be in the vicinity of the outer periphery intersecting the horizontal line X passing through the center of the pachinko ball W, as shown in FIGS. The pachinko ball W supported at the two points of the left second rib 48 or the first rib 47 and the right second rib 49 can be stably guided.

実施例において左右の第2リブ48,49は、球通路46における左右の側部の上下方向の略中央に位置して、該第2リブ48,49の下端縁が前記水平線Xより下側でパチンコ球Wに接触するようになっている。なお、各リブ47,48,49は、球通路46の延在方向と直交する方向での断面が、略矩形状に形成されている。また第2リブ48,49については、図17に示す如く、通路内側を向く面が弧状に形成されている。   In the embodiment, the left and right second ribs 48 and 49 are positioned at the approximate center in the vertical direction of the left and right side portions of the ball passage 46, and the lower end edges of the second ribs 48 and 49 are below the horizontal line X. It comes in contact with the pachinko ball W. Each of the ribs 47, 48, and 49 has a substantially rectangular cross section in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the spherical passage 46. As for the second ribs 48 and 49, as shown in FIG. 17, the surface facing the inside of the passage is formed in an arc shape.

前記球通路46を画成する上壁における前記第1リブ47と対向する位置には、図16に示す如く、該球通路46に沿って規制リブ50が下方に向けて突設されている。第1リブ47と規制リブ50との離間寸法は、パチンコ球Wの直径より大きく、第1リブ47と左第2リブ48または第1リブ47と右第2リブ49の2点で支持された状態のパチンコ球Wが規制リブ50に接触することはなく、かつパチンコ球Wが上下に大きく跳ねるのを規制し得る寸法に設定される。なお、規制リブ50における後端下角部(導入路45に臨む角部)は弧状に形成されて、導入路45から球通路46へのパチンコ球Wの流入を阻害しないよう構成される。   At the position facing the first rib 47 on the upper wall that defines the spherical passage 46, a regulating rib 50 projects downward along the spherical passage 46 as shown in FIG. The distance between the first rib 47 and the regulating rib 50 is larger than the diameter of the pachinko ball W, and is supported at two points, the first rib 47 and the left second rib 48 or the first rib 47 and the right second rib 49. The pachinko ball W in a state does not come into contact with the regulation rib 50, and the dimension is set such that the pachinko ball W can be largely prevented from bouncing up and down. In addition, the rear end lower corner portion (corner portion facing the introduction path 45) of the regulation rib 50 is formed in an arc shape so as not to inhibit the inflow of the pachinko sphere W from the introduction path 45 to the ball passage 46.

前記導入路45を画成する後壁および底壁には、図16に示す如く、前記球通路46の第1リブ47に整列する中間リブ51が、導入路45に沿って突設され、前記ステージ部29の転動面29aから導入路45に通入したパチンコ球Wを中間リブ51で球通路46に向けて安定して誘導し得るようになっている。また中間リブ51の前端における上端の位置は、図16に示す如く、第1リブ47の後端における上端より高くなるよう設定されており、導入路45から球通路46へのパチンコ球Wの円滑な流入を図り得るよう構成される。   As shown in FIG. 16, intermediate ribs 51 aligned with the first ribs 47 of the ball passages 46 project along the introduction path 45 on the rear wall and the bottom wall that define the introduction path 45. The pachinko ball W that has entered the introduction path 45 from the rolling surface 29 a of the stage portion 29 can be stably guided toward the ball path 46 by the intermediate rib 51. Further, as shown in FIG. 16, the position of the upper end at the front end of the intermediate rib 51 is set to be higher than the upper end at the rear end of the first rib 47, and the pachinko sphere W smoothly passes from the introduction path 45 to the ball path 46. It is configured so that a proper inflow is possible.

(裏ユニットについて)
前記裏ユニット19は、図19に示すように、前方に開口する矩形箱状に形成された箱状本体52と、該箱状本体52の下端部に形成され、複数の基板設置部60や排出用球通路76,77が形成された下部構造体53と、箱状本体52の開口前端部および下部構造体53の前端部に形成されて外側へ延出し、前記板部材18の裏面に当接する固定部54とから基本的に構成される。箱状本体52は、前記板部材18に対向する矩形板状に形成された対向面部(後壁)55と、該対向面部55における上下左右の各縁部から前方に延出する画壁部(外周壁部)56a,56b,56c,56dとから前方に開口するよう形成されて、上および左右の各画壁部56a,56c,56dの前端部から箱状本体52の開口外側へ向けて延出するよう前記固定部54が形成されている。また下部構造体53は、壁部によって前方に開口するよう形成されて、下および左右の壁部の前端から外側へ向けて前記固定部54が形成される。そして、各固定部54の前面を板部材18の裏面に当接した状態で、ネジを介して板部材18に裏ユニット19が着脱自在に固定されて、箱状本体52によって前記装飾部材28の窓口28aを後側から覆い得るよう構成される。
(About the back unit)
As shown in FIG. 19, the back unit 19 is formed at a box-like main body 52 formed in a rectangular box shape that opens to the front, and a lower end portion of the box-like main body 52. The lower structure 53 in which the ball passages 76 and 77 are formed, the opening front end portion of the box-shaped main body 52 and the front end portion of the lower structure 53 are extended to the outside and contact the back surface of the plate member 18. It is basically composed of the fixed portion 54. The box-shaped main body 52 includes a facing surface portion (rear wall) 55 formed in a rectangular plate shape facing the plate member 18, and an image wall portion extending forward from each of the upper, lower, left, and right edges of the facing surface portion 55. The outer peripheral wall portions 56a, 56b, 56c, 56d are formed so as to open forward, and extend from the front end portions of the upper and left image wall portions 56a, 56c, 56d toward the outside of the opening of the box-shaped main body 52. The fixing portion 54 is formed so as to come out. The lower structure 53 is formed so as to open forward by a wall portion, and the fixing portion 54 is formed outward from the front ends of the lower and left and right wall portions. Then, the back unit 19 is detachably fixed to the plate member 18 via screws in a state where the front surface of each fixing portion 54 is in contact with the back surface of the plate member 18. The window 28a can be covered from the rear side.

前記対向面部55に、上下および左右幅の大部分が開口する大型の前記開口部19aが形成されており、以下の説明において、対向面部55における開口部19aに対する上下左右に位置する部分について、上対向面部55a、下対向面部55b、左対向面部55c、右対向面部55dと夫々指称し、該上下左右の対向面部55a,55b,55c,55dに対応する画壁部を、上画壁部56a、下画壁部56b、左画壁部56c、右画壁部56dと夫々指称するものとする。そして、実施例では板部材18の裏側に裏ユニット19を配設した状態で、上下方向に延在する左画壁部56cが、図9に示す如く、板部材18の裏面に左右方向に延在するよう形成された前記溝部23の後側に交差するように延在し、該左画壁部56cを挟んで溝部23が裏ユニット19の内側と外側とに亘って延在するよう構成されている。また板部材18の貫通孔22は、左画壁部56cより内側に臨んでおり、前記球検出センサ35に接続するセンサ用配線38および前記窓側部用発光装置39の窓用発光基板40に接続する部品用配線43が、前記溝部23内を左画壁部56cを越えて内側から外側に引き回し得るようになっている。なお、前記左画壁部56cには、図4または図10に示す如く、板部材18の溝部23と対応する位置に、板部材18の裏面から離間する切欠部19bが上下方向に所定長さで形成され、溝部23から裏ユニット19の外側に引き出されるセンサ用配線38や部品用配線43が左画壁部56cの前端縁に接触するのを抑制し得るよう構成される。   The opposed surface portion 55 is formed with a large opening portion 19a having a large portion in the vertical and horizontal widths. In the following description, the upper surface portion of the opposed surface portion 55 that is located above and below the opening portion 19a The facing surface portion 55a, the lower facing surface portion 55b, the left facing surface portion 55c, and the right facing surface portion 55d are designated as the upper, lower, left and right facing surface portions 55a, 55b, 55c, and 55d. The lower drawing wall portion 56b, the left drawing wall portion 56c, and the right drawing wall portion 56d are respectively referred to. In the embodiment, with the back unit 19 disposed on the back side of the plate member 18, the left image wall portion 56c extending in the vertical direction extends in the left-right direction on the back surface of the plate member 18, as shown in FIG. It extends so as to intersect the rear side of the groove 23 formed so as to exist, and the groove 23 extends between the inner side and the outer side of the back unit 19 with the left image wall portion 56c interposed therebetween. ing. The through hole 22 of the plate member 18 faces the inner side of the left picture wall portion 56c, and is connected to the sensor wiring 38 connected to the sphere detection sensor 35 and the window light emitting substrate 40 of the window side light emitting device 39. The component wiring 43 to be routed can be routed from the inner side to the outer side through the left wall portion 56 c in the groove portion 23. As shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 10, the left picture wall portion 56c has a notch 19b spaced from the back surface of the plate member 18 at a position corresponding to the groove 23 of the plate member 18 with a predetermined length in the vertical direction. The sensor wiring 38 and the component wiring 43 drawn out from the groove 23 to the outside of the back unit 19 can be prevented from coming into contact with the front edge of the left image wall portion 56c.

前記裏ユニット19における対向面部55の裏面には、図19に示すように、前記開口部19aを囲繞するように位置決め突部57が、上下および左右の縁部に沿って設けられ、前記図柄表示装置13は、その表示部を開口部19aに裏側から臨ませた状態で、上下および左右の各端縁が対応する位置決め突部57に当接した状態で位置決め固定される。   As shown in FIG. 19, positioning protrusions 57 are provided on the back surface of the opposing surface portion 55 of the back unit 19 so as to surround the opening 19a along the upper and lower and left and right edges. The device 13 is positioned and fixed in a state where the display unit faces the opening 19a from the back side, and the upper and lower and left and right edges contact the corresponding positioning projections 57.

(制御装置について)
前記図柄表示装置13の裏面には、図3に示す如く、図柄表示装置13の表示を制御する基板を備える表示制御装置58および表示制御装置58に演出用の制御信号を出力する基板を備える統括制御装置(電気部品)59が左右方向に並べて着脱自在に配設される。また、前記裏ユニット19における図柄表示装置13の設置位置より下方に設けられる前記下部構造体53の裏面には、図3,図19に示す如く、複数(実施例では3つ)の前記基板設置部60が左右方向に離間して設けられ、各基板設置部60には、複数のコネクタ受部61a(図20,図21等参照)が設けられた裏中継基板(基板)61が着脱自在に取り付けられて、該裏中継基板61に設けたコネクタ受部61aに対して、前記可動演出装置105,106や発光装置39,85,107,108や発光基板109,110,111,154,158および表示器90等の電気部品に接続した配線および前記統括制御装置59に接続した配線の夫々がコネクタ接続されて、各電気部品が統括制御装置59に電気的に接続されるようになっている。また、前記主制御装置に接続した配線も裏中継基板61に接続されて、該主制御装置と統括制御装置59とは電気的に接続される。
(About control device)
As shown in FIG. 3, the rear surface of the symbol display device 13 is provided with a display control device 58 having a substrate for controlling the display of the symbol display device 13 and a substrate for outputting a control signal for presentation to the display control device 58. A control device (electrical component) 59 is detachably arranged in the left-right direction. Further, on the back surface of the lower structure 53 provided below the position where the symbol display device 13 is installed in the back unit 19, as shown in FIGS. The parts 60 are provided apart from each other in the left-right direction, and a back relay board (board) 61 provided with a plurality of connector receiving parts 61a (see FIGS. 20, 21, etc.) is detachably attached to each board installation part 60. Attached to the connector receiving portion 61a provided on the back relay substrate 61, the movable effect devices 105, 106, the light emitting devices 39, 85, 107, 108, the light emitting substrates 109, 110, 111, 154, 158, and Each of the wiring connected to the electrical components such as the display 90 and the wiring connected to the overall control device 59 is connected by a connector so that each electrical component is electrically connected to the overall control device 59. Further, the wiring connected to the main control device is also connected to the back relay board 61, and the main control device and the overall control device 59 are electrically connected.

前記統括制御装置59は、前記可動演出装置105,106や発光装置39,85,107,108および発光基板109,110,111,154,158の各LED等のパチンコ機10に配設される各種電気部品の制御も行なうものであって、統括制御装置59の制御信号に基づいて表示制御装置58が制御を実行して図柄表示装置13の表示部で図柄変動演出が行なわれると共に、可動演出装置105,106や発光装置39,85,107,108および発光基板109,110,111,154,158の各LED等が駆動または発光制御される。また、主制御装置からの制御信号に基づいて、後述する表示器90での図柄変動ゲームが行なわれる。   The overall control device 59 is variously arranged in the pachinko machine 10 such as the movable rendering devices 105, 106, the light emitting devices 39, 85, 107, 108 and the LEDs of the light emitting substrates 109, 110, 111, 154, 158. It also controls electric components. The display control device 58 executes control based on a control signal from the overall control device 59, and a symbol variation effect is performed on the display unit of the symbol display device 13, and a movable effect device. The LEDs 105 and 106, the light emitting devices 39, 85, 107, and 108 and the LEDs of the light emitting substrates 109, 110, 111, 154, and 158 are driven or controlled to emit light. Further, a symbol variation game is performed on the display 90 described later based on a control signal from the main control device.

(下部構造体の基板設置部について)
前記下部構造体53の裏面に形成される3つの基板設置部60は、基本的な構成は同じであるので、同一部位には同じ符号を付して説明すると共に、区別する場合には左基板設置部60、中基板設置部60および右基板設置部60と夫々指称するものとする。なお、実施例では、各基板設置部60に取り付けられる裏中継基板61は、前記コネクタ受部(コネクタ)61aが設けられる面が後側を向く姿勢で取り付けられるようになっており、このコネクタ受部61aが設けられて表側に現われる面(表面)を実装面と指称すると共に、これとは反対に前側を向いて表側に現われない面(裏面)を回路面と指称するものとする。また前記コネクタ受部61aは、前記統括制御装置59との間で信号をやり取りする複数の装置に対応する複数の配線を纏めたケーブルYが接続するよう構成された大型のものである。
(Substrate installation part of the lower structure)
Since the three substrate mounting portions 60 formed on the back surface of the lower structure 53 have the same basic configuration, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the left substrate is used for distinction. The installation unit 60, the middle substrate installation unit 60, and the right substrate installation unit 60 are respectively referred to. In the embodiment, the back relay board 61 attached to each board installation part 60 is attached so that the surface on which the connector receiving part (connector) 61a is provided faces rearward. The surface (front surface) that is provided with the portion 61a and appears on the front side is referred to as a mounting surface, and on the contrary, the surface that faces the front side and does not appear on the front side (back surface) is referred to as a circuit surface. The connector receiving portion 61a is a large-sized one configured to connect a cable Y in which a plurality of wirings corresponding to a plurality of devices that exchange signals with the overall control device 59 are connected.

前記基板設置部60は、図3または図19に示すように、取り付け対象となる裏中継基板61の外形形状と略一致する矩形枠状に形成された当接支持部62と、当接支持部62における前記統括制御装置59の配設位置に対して離間する側である下側の支持壁62aに形成されて、裏中継基板61の下端縁(一端縁)が挿脱可能に差込み状態で係合可能な複数の係合部63と、当接支持部62における前記統括制御装置59の配設位置に近接する側である上側の支持壁62aに形成されて、係合部63に係合した裏中継基板61の上端縁(他端縁)に係脱可能に係合する弾性フック(係合片)64とを基本的に備えている。そして、各基板設置部60に対して対象となる裏中継基板61は、実装面とは反対の回路面を前記当接支持部62の端部に当接した状態で、下端縁が係合部63に係合すると共に上端縁に弾性フック64が係合して取り付けられる。なお、係合部63の少なくとも1つは、裏中継基板61の角部において下端縁と側端縁の両方に係合して、該裏中継基板61の左右方向への位置決めを行ない得るよう構成される。また、基板設置部60には、当接支持部62における上側の支持壁62aに近接する位置に、該当接支持部62より後方へ突出する位置決めピン65が突設されており、基板設置部60に裏中継基板61を設置した際に、該裏中継基板61に形成した係合孔(図示せず)に位置決めピン65が挿入されるようになっている。   As shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 19, the board installation part 60 includes a contact support part 62 formed in a rectangular frame shape substantially matching the outer shape of the back relay board 61 to be attached, and a contact support part. 62 is formed on the lower support wall 62a, which is a side away from the position where the overall control device 59 is disposed, and the lower end edge (one end edge) of the back relay board 61 is detachably inserted in the inserted state. A plurality of engaging portions 63 that can be combined with each other, and an upper support wall 62a that is close to the position where the overall control device 59 is disposed in the contact support portion 62, are engaged with the engagement portion 63. An elastic hook (engagement piece) 64 that is detachably engaged with the upper end edge (other end edge) of the back relay substrate 61 is basically provided. And the back relay board 61 which is the object for each board installation part 60 is in a state where the circuit surface opposite to the mounting surface is in contact with the end part of the contact support part 62, and the lower end edge is the engagement part. The elastic hook 64 is engaged with and attached to the upper end edge. In addition, at least one of the engaging portions 63 is configured to engage both the lower end edge and the side end edge at the corner of the back relay board 61 so as to position the back relay board 61 in the left-right direction. Is done. Further, a positioning pin 65 that protrudes rearward from the corresponding contact support portion 62 is provided on the substrate installation portion 60 at a position close to the upper support wall 62 a of the contact support portion 62. When the back relay board 61 is installed, the positioning pins 65 are inserted into engagement holes (not shown) formed in the back relay board 61.

前記弾性フック64は、当接支持部62の上側の支持壁62aにおける左右方向の略中央に位置して、その先端下面に設けた爪部64aが裏中継基板61の上端縁側の実装面に当接することで裏中継基板61を保持するよう構成される。そして、該弾性フック64を裏中継基板61の上端縁から離間するよう上側に向けて弾性変形することで、当該裏中継基板61の基板設置部60からの取り外しを許容するようになっている。   The elastic hook 64 is positioned substantially at the center in the left-right direction on the upper support wall 62 a of the contact support portion 62, and the claw portion 64 a provided on the lower surface of the tip of the elastic hook 64 contacts the mounting surface on the upper edge side of the back relay substrate 61. The back relay board 61 is configured to be held by contact. Then, the elastic hook 64 is elastically deformed upward so as to be separated from the upper end edge of the back relay substrate 61, thereby allowing the back relay substrate 61 to be detached from the substrate installation portion 60.

前記中基板設置部60の当接支持部62における上側の支持壁62aには、図19または図22に示す如く、前記弾性フック64を挟む左右両側に、当接支持部62の端部に回路面が当接した裏中継基板61における上端縁側の周端に当接可能な突部66が夫々設けられている。この突部66は、前述したように中基板設置部60に対して裏中継基板61が上下の弾性フック64および係合部63を介して取り付けられている状態で、該裏中継基板61の上端縁側の周端に当接可能に構成されたものであって、弾性フック64の爪部64aと裏中継基板61との係合が解除される方向への該裏中継基板61の移動を規制するべく機能する。突部66における当接支持部62の端部からの突出寸法は、図22に示す如く、当接支持部62に回路面が当接した裏中継基板61の実装面より後方に突出する高さに設定されている。なお、突部66は、図21に示す如く、前記図柄表示装置13の下端縁を位置決めする下側の前記位置決め突部57の突出端の下側に位置して、該位置決め突部57と当接支持部62および下対向面部55bとの間に画成された空間67を引き回される後述する表示器用配線97が後方に移動するのを規制する規制手段としても機能するよう構成される。実施例では、中基板設置部60にのみ突部66を設けているが、左右の基板設置部60,60にも同様に突部66を設けてもよい。   As shown in FIG. 19 or FIG. 22, the upper support wall 62a of the contact support portion 62 of the middle substrate installation portion 60 has a circuit on the left and right sides sandwiching the elastic hook 64 at the end of the contact support portion 62. Protrusions 66 that can come into contact with the peripheral edge on the upper edge side of the back relay substrate 61 with which the surface is in contact are provided. As described above, the protrusion 66 has an upper end of the back relay board 61 in a state where the back relay board 61 is attached to the middle board installation part 60 via the upper and lower elastic hooks 64 and the engaging part 63. It is configured to be able to contact the peripheral edge on the edge side, and restricts the movement of the back relay board 61 in the direction in which the engagement between the claw portion 64a of the elastic hook 64 and the back relay board 61 is released. It works as much as possible. As shown in FIG. 22, the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 66 from the end of the contact support portion 62 is a height protruding rearward from the mounting surface of the back relay substrate 61 in which the circuit surface contacts the contact support portion 62. Is set to As shown in FIG. 21, the protrusion 66 is positioned below the protruding end of the positioning protrusion 57 on the lower side for positioning the lower end edge of the symbol display device 13, and contacts the positioning protrusion 57. It is configured to function also as a restricting means for restricting the later-described indicator wiring 97 routed through the space 67 defined between the contact support portion 62 and the lower facing surface portion 55b from moving backward. In the embodiment, the protrusions 66 are provided only on the middle substrate installation part 60, but the protrusions 66 may be provided on the left and right substrate installation parts 60 and 60 in the same manner.

(下部構造体の前側の構成について)
図18,図22または図23に示すに如く、前記下部構造体53の前側中央には、前記始動入賞装置24における板部材18から後方に突出する装置本体を収容する中収容部68が画成されている。この中収容部68は、図20に示す如く、前方および下方に開口するように画成される。また、下部構造体53の下端部には、中収容部68の下方位置に上側に向けて凹設された凹部69が設けられている。そして、中収容部68に前記始動入賞装置24の装置本体が収容されると共に、凹部69に前記特別入賞装置26の板部材18から後方に突出する装置本体が収容されるようになっている。
(About the front structure of the lower structure)
As shown in FIGS. 18, 22, or 23, an intermediate housing portion 68 that houses a device main body that protrudes rearward from the plate member 18 in the start winning device 24 is defined at the front center of the lower structure 53. Has been. As shown in FIG. 20, the middle accommodating portion 68 is defined so as to open forward and downward. In addition, a recess 69 is provided at the lower end of the lower structure 53 so as to be recessed upward at a position below the middle housing portion 68. The apparatus main body of the start winning device 24 is accommodated in the middle accommodating portion 68, and the device main body protruding rearward from the plate member 18 of the special prize winning device 26 is accommodated in the recess 69.

前記下部構造体53には、前記中収容部68の左側に、後述する左下磁気センサ73が配設される左収容部70が前方に開口するよう画成されると共に、該中収容部68の右側には、後述する表示器90の表示設置部100が設けられる右収容部71が前方に開口するよう画成される。なお、前記中収容部68には、後述する右下磁気センサ75が配設されるようになっている。   The lower structure 53 is defined on the left side of the middle housing portion 68 such that a left housing portion 70 in which a lower left magnetic sensor 73 described later is disposed opens forward. On the right side, a right accommodating portion 71 provided with a display installation portion 100 of the display 90 described later is defined so as to open forward. The middle housing portion 68 is provided with a lower right magnetic sensor 75 described later.

(下磁気センサについて)
前記左収容部70の後側を画成する収容壁部70aには、前側に向けて突出する複数の取付けボス70bが設けられ(図23参照)、これら取付けボス70bの前端にセンサホルダ72を介して左下磁気センサ73が着脱自在に取り付けられる。また、前記中収容部68の後側を画成する収容壁部68aには、該中収容部68に収容される始動入賞装置24の装置本体と干渉しない右方位置に、前側に向けて突出する複数の取付けボス68bが設けられ、これら取付けボス68bの前端にセンサホルダ74を介して右下磁気センサ75が着脱自在に取り付けられる。両下磁気センサ73,75は、長方形状のケーシングの内部に、その長手方向に沿う方向に延在する一対のリード片の一部を接離可能に対向配置して構成されたリードスイッチであって、各収容部68,70に配設した左右の下磁気センサ73,75は、該センサ73,75を構成するリード片の延在方向(ケーシングの長手方向)が、左右方向に沿うと共に前記板部材18の裏面と平行となる横置き姿勢で、前記始動入賞装置24の左右両側に位置決めされる。
(About the bottom magnetic sensor)
A housing wall 70a that defines the rear side of the left housing portion 70 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 70b that project toward the front side (see FIG. 23), and a sensor holder 72 is provided at the front end of these mounting bosses 70b. A left lower magnetic sensor 73 is detachably attached. Further, the housing wall 68a that defines the rear side of the middle housing portion 68 protrudes toward the front side at a right position that does not interfere with the apparatus main body of the start winning device 24 housed in the middle housing portion 68. A plurality of mounting bosses 68b are provided, and a lower right magnetic sensor 75 is detachably attached to the front ends of these mounting bosses 68b via a sensor holder 74. The lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75 are reed switches that are configured such that a part of a pair of lead pieces extending in a direction along the longitudinal direction is opposed to each other so as to be able to contact and separate inside a rectangular casing. The left and right lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75 disposed in the housing portions 68 and 70 have the extending direction of the lead pieces (the longitudinal direction of the casing) constituting the sensors 73 and 75 along the left-right direction and the above-described direction. It is positioned on both the left and right sides of the start winning device 24 in a horizontal posture parallel to the rear surface of the plate member 18.

なお、中および左の各収容部68,70に取り付けられた左右の下磁気センサ73,75の磁気検出可能範囲は、何れも前記始動入賞装置24における上下の始動入賞口24a,24b、特別入賞装置26の特別入賞口26aに臨むように設定される。また、左下磁気センサ73の磁気検出可能範囲は、左普通入賞口27bにも及び、右下磁気センサ75の磁気検出可能範囲は、右普通入賞口34にも及ぶように設定されている。両下磁気センサ73,75は前記統括制御装置59に接続され、該下磁気センサ73,75が磁気を検出した際には、統括制御装置59の制御下にランプやスピーカ等を用いた異常報知が行なわれるよう構成される。   It should be noted that the magnetic detection ranges of the left and right lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75 attached to the middle and left accommodating portions 68 and 70 are the upper and lower start winning ports 24a and 24b and the special prizes in the start winning device 24, respectively. It is set to face the special winning opening 26a of the device 26. Further, the magnetic detection possible range of the lower left magnetic sensor 73 is set to extend to the left normal winning opening 27b, and the magnetic detectable range of the lower right magnetic sensor 75 is set to extend to the right normal winning opening 34. Both lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75 are connected to the overall control device 59, and when the lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75 detect magnetism, an abnormality notification using a lamp, a speaker or the like under the control of the overall control device 59 is provided. Is configured to be performed.

(排出用球通路について)
前記下部構造体53には、前記板部材18に配設された入賞口用飾り部材27に設けた3つの左普通入賞口27bと対応する位置に、各左普通入賞口27bに入賞したパチンコ球Wを遊技盤17の下方へ排出案内する左排出用球通路(球通路)76が形成されると共に、前記右普通入賞口34と対応する位置に、該右普通入賞口34に入賞したパチンコ球Wを遊技盤17の下方へ排出案内する右排出用球通路77が形成される(図18,図23等参照)。
(About discharge ball passage)
The lower structure 53 has a pachinko ball that has won a prize in each of the left ordinary winning holes 27b at positions corresponding to the three left ordinary winning holes 27b provided in the decorative elements 27 for winning holes arranged in the plate member 18. A left discharge ball passage (ball passage) 76 for discharging and guiding W to the lower side of the game board 17 is formed, and a pachinko ball won in the right normal winning opening 34 at a position corresponding to the right normal winning opening 34. A right discharge ball passage 77 for discharging and guiding W to the lower side of the game board 17 is formed (see FIGS. 18 and 23).

前記左排出用球通路76は、図27に示す如く、前方に開口する複数の通路78,79,80,81を連通して構成され、各通路78,79,80,81を画成する通路用壁部(壁部)82の前端は、前記裏ユニット19の固定部54の前面と同一面に位置しており、裏ユニット19を板部材18の裏側に取り付けた際には通路用壁部82の前端が板部材18の裏面に当接して、該左排出用球通路76の前方開口は板部材18により塞がれるようになっている(図26参照)。左排出用球通路76は、最上部に位置する左普通入賞口27bに連通する第1縦通路78と、中間に位置する左普通入賞口27bに連通する第2縦通路79および、最下部に位置する左普通入賞口27bに連通する第3縦通路80とを、第1縦通路78から第3縦通路80に向けて下方傾斜するよう形成された傾斜通路81を介して連通して構成されて、各左普通入賞口27bに入賞したパチンコ球Wを、集合して第3縦通路80の下流端(下端)に形成した球排出口80aを介して機外(球回収部)に排出するよう構成される。なお、前記裏ユニット19の下部構造体53の下辺に形成される固定部54は、図27に示す如く、傾斜通路81を画成する通路用壁部82の下側に一体的に形成されており、該固定部54を前記板部材18に当接固定することで、左排出用球通路76の前端を板部材18の裏面に確実に当接させるようになっている。   As shown in FIG. 27, the left discharge ball passage 76 is formed by communicating a plurality of passages 78, 79, 80, 81 opened forward, and defines the passages 78, 79, 80, 81. The front end of the wall portion (wall portion) 82 is located on the same plane as the front surface of the fixing portion 54 of the back unit 19, and when the back unit 19 is attached to the back side of the plate member 18, the passage wall portion The front end of 82 is in contact with the back surface of the plate member 18, and the front opening of the left discharge ball passage 76 is closed by the plate member 18 (see FIG. 26). The left discharge ball passage 76 includes a first vertical passage 78 that communicates with the left ordinary winning port 27b located at the top, a second vertical passage 79 that communicates with the left ordinary winning port 27b located at the middle, and a lower portion. The third vertical passage 80 that communicates with the left left regular winning opening 27b is configured to communicate with the first vertical passage 78 through an inclined passage 81 that is inclined downward from the first vertical passage 78 toward the third vertical passage 80. Thus, the pachinko balls W won in each of the left normal winning ports 27b are collected and discharged to the outside (the ball collecting portion) through a ball discharge port 80a formed at the downstream end (lower end) of the third vertical passage 80. It is configured as follows. The fixing portion 54 formed on the lower side of the lower structure 53 of the back unit 19 is integrally formed below the passage wall portion 82 that defines the inclined passage 81 as shown in FIG. By fixing the fixing portion 54 to the plate member 18, the front end of the left discharge ball passage 76 is reliably brought into contact with the back surface of the plate member 18.

前記第3縦通路80の下流端部に左普通入賞センサ83が取り付けられ(図18参照)、各左普通入賞口27bに入賞したパチンコ球Wを、該左普通入賞センサ83で検出することで賞球が払い出されるようになっている。   A left ordinary winning sensor 83 is attached to the downstream end of the third vertical passage 80 (see FIG. 18), and the left ordinary winning sensor 83 detects a pachinko ball W that has won a prize in each left ordinary winning opening 27b. Prize balls are paid out.

なお、前記右排出用球通路77は、前方および下方に開口する縦通路から構成されて、裏ユニット19を板部材18の裏側に取り付けた際に該右排出用球通路77に前記右普通入賞口34が連通し、右普通入賞口34に入賞したパチンコ球Wを、右排出用球通路77の下流端(下端)に形成した球排出口77aを介して機外(球回収部)に排出するよう構成される。また、右排出用球通路77の下流端部に右普通入賞センサ84が取り付けられ(図18参照)、右普通入賞口34に入賞したパチンコ球Wを、該右普通入賞センサ84で検出することで賞球が払い出されるようになっている。   The right discharge ball passage 77 is composed of a vertical passage that opens forward and downward. When the back unit 19 is attached to the back side of the plate member 18, the right discharge ball passage 77 receives the right normal prize. The pachinko ball W won in the right normal winning port 34 is discharged to the outside of the machine (the ball collecting section) through a ball discharge port 77a formed at the downstream end (lower end) of the right discharge ball passage 77. Configured to do. A right normal winning sensor 84 is attached to the downstream end of the right discharge ball passage 77 (see FIG. 18), and the right normal winning sensor 84 detects a pachinko ball W that has won the right normal winning port 34. The prize ball is paid out.

(入賞口用発光装置について)
前記裏ユニット19には、前記左排出用球通路76の形成位置に対応して、前記板部材18に配設した入賞口用飾り部材27の光透過部材27cを裏側から照明可能な入賞口用発光装置(演出装置)85が配設される。この入賞口用発光装置85は、図27に示す如く、実装面に複数のLED(発光体)86aを実装した入賞用発光基板86と、該入賞用発光基板86が実装面を前側に向けた姿勢で収容されるケース体87を備える。ケース体87は、透明な合成樹脂材から形成されたものであって、平板状の板部の外周縁に後側に突出するよう壁部を形成した後方に開口する箱状体87aの後端に、複数のフランジ部87bが外方に向けて形成されており、箱状体87aの内部に前記入賞用発光基板86がネジ止め固定される。前記下部構造体53には、左排出用球通路76の形成位置を外れると共に、ケース体87の各フランジ部87bと対応する位置の夫々に取付けボス88が設けられている。そして、箱状体87aおよびフランジ部87bの裏面を前記左排出用球通路76を画成する通路用壁部82または取付けボス88の前端に当接した状態で、各フランジ部87bを対応する取付けボス88にネジ止めすることで、下部構造体53の前面に入賞口用発光装置85が着脱自在に位置決め固定される(図13,図25参照)。
(About the light emitting device for the prize opening)
The back unit 19 is for a prize opening that can illuminate the light transmitting member 27c of the decoration member 27 for the prize opening arranged on the plate member 18 from the back side corresponding to the position where the left discharge ball passage 76 is formed. A light emitting device (effect device) 85 is provided. As shown in FIG. 27, the winning opening light emitting device 85 includes a winning light emitting substrate 86 having a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 86a mounted on the mounting surface, and the winning light emitting substrate 86 facing the mounting surface forward. A case body 87 accommodated in a posture is provided. The case body 87 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, and has a rear end of a box-shaped body 87a that is opened rearward and has a wall portion that protrudes rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the flat plate-like plate portion. In addition, a plurality of flange portions 87b are formed outward, and the winning light emitting substrate 86 is screwed and fixed inside the box-shaped body 87a. The lower structure 53 is provided with a mounting boss 88 at a position corresponding to each flange portion 87 b of the case body 87 while leaving the position where the left discharge ball passage 76 is formed. Each flange portion 87b is attached in a state where the back surfaces of the box-shaped body 87a and the flange portion 87b are in contact with the front end of the passage wall portion 82 or the mounting boss 88 defining the left discharge ball passage 76. By screwing to the boss 88, the winning hole light emitting device 85 is detachably positioned and fixed to the front surface of the lower structure 53 (see FIGS. 13 and 25).

前記ケース体87の箱状体87aは、図5に示す如く、前記板部材18に形成された前記第3の貫通口21cにおける左普通入賞口27bの樋部27dが臨む部位を除く部分の開口形状と略相似する形状に形成される。また入賞口用発光装置85は、下部構造体53(裏ユニット19)の前面から突出する状態で配設され、裏ユニット19を板部材18の裏側に取り付けた際に、図26に示す如く、該入賞口用発光装置85のケース体87が板部材18の第3の貫通口21cに収容されて、前記入賞口用飾り部材27の光透過部材27cを裏側から照らすことができるよう構成される。   As shown in FIG. 5, the box-shaped body 87 a of the case body 87 is an opening in a portion excluding a portion of the third through hole 21 c formed in the plate member 18 where the collar portion 27 d of the left normal winning port 27 b faces. It is formed in a shape substantially similar to the shape. The winning opening light emitting device 85 is disposed so as to protrude from the front surface of the lower structure 53 (back unit 19). When the back unit 19 is attached to the back side of the plate member 18, as shown in FIG. The case body 87 of the winning hole light emitting device 85 is accommodated in the third through hole 21c of the plate member 18 so that the light transmitting member 27c of the winning hole decoration member 27 can be illuminated from the back side. .

前記入賞口用発光装置85は、図13または図25に示す如く、前記左排出用球通路76の前面開口の一部と前後に重なるように位置して、当該入賞口用発光装置85により左排出用球通路76の前面開口の一部が覆われるようになっている。具体的には、左排出用球通路76を構成する第1縦通路78および第2縦通路79の下部(左普通入賞口27bと各通路78,79との連通部の下側)および傾斜通路81の一部が入賞口用発光装置85で覆われ、その他の部分の前面開口は覆われることなく前記第3の貫通口21cの裏側に開口状態で臨んでいる。   As shown in FIG. 13 or FIG. 25, the winning opening light emitting device 85 is positioned so as to overlap with a part of the front opening of the left discharge ball passage 76, and left by the winning opening light emitting device 85. A part of the front opening of the discharge ball passage 76 is covered. Specifically, a lower portion of the first vertical passage 78 and the second vertical passage 79 constituting the left discharge ball passage 76 (below the communication portion between the left normal winning port 27b and each of the passages 78 and 79) and an inclined passage. A part of 81 is covered with the winning opening light emitting device 85, and the front opening of the other part is not covered and faces the back side of the third through hole 21c in an open state.

(カバー部材について)
前記左排出用球通路76には、その前面開口の一部を覆うカバー部材89が着脱自在に配設される。このカバー部材89は、図27に示す如く、前記第1縦通路78および第2縦通路79における左普通入賞口27bとの連通部を除く部分の前面開口および傾斜通路81の前面開口を覆い得るようその開口形状に略一致する形状に形成された本体板89aと、該本体板89aの外縁の複数箇所に設けられた係合部89bとから構成される。また、左排出用球通路76を画成する通路用壁部82には、カバー部材89の係合部89bに対応する夫々の位置に、該係合部89bが係脱自在に係合する被係合部82aが形成されている。実施例では、係合部89bが本体板89aの外縁から突出する突部として形成されると共に、被係合部82aが通路用壁部82の前端から退避する凹部として形成される。そして、各係合部89bを対応する被係合部82aに係合することで、本体板89aが通路78,79,81の前面開口を覆った状態で、当該カバー部材89が下部構造体53に位置決めされる。またカバー部材89の本体板89aは、通路78,79,81の前面開口内に臨んだ状態で、その前面が通路用壁部82の前端と同一位置に臨むよう構成される。
(About cover members)
A cover member 89 that covers a part of the front opening is detachably disposed in the left discharge ball passage 76. As shown in FIG. 27, the cover member 89 can cover the front opening of the first vertical passage 78 and the second vertical passage 79 except for the portion communicating with the left normal winning port 27b and the front opening of the inclined passage 81. The main body plate 89a is formed in a shape substantially corresponding to the opening shape, and the engaging portions 89b are provided at a plurality of locations on the outer edge of the main body plate 89a. Further, the passage wall portion 82 that defines the left discharge ball passage 76 is covered with the engagement portion 89b that is detachably engaged with each of the positions corresponding to the engagement portion 89b of the cover member 89. An engaging portion 82a is formed. In the embodiment, the engaging portion 89b is formed as a protruding portion that protrudes from the outer edge of the main body plate 89a, and the engaged portion 82a is formed as a recess that retreats from the front end of the passage wall portion 82. Then, by engaging each engaging portion 89b with the corresponding engaged portion 82a, the cover member 89 is in the lower structure 53 in a state where the main body plate 89a covers the front opening of the passages 78, 79, 81. Is positioned. The main body plate 89 a of the cover member 89 is configured such that the front surface thereof faces the same position as the front end of the passage wall portion 82 in a state of facing the front opening of the passages 78, 79, 81.

前記左排出用球通路76の前面開口を覆うように配設されたカバー部材89は、該カバー部材89の前側に臨むように下部構造体53に取り付けられる前記入賞口用発光装置85(ケース体87)と前記通路用壁部82とで前後から挟持されることで脱落不能に取り付けられる。そして、左排出用球通路76において前記第3の貫通口21cに入賞口用発光装置85と重なることなく開口状態で臨んでいる部分がカバー部材89で覆われるようになっている(図25参照)。なお、入賞口用発光装置85における左排出用球通路76の前面開口に重なる部分の裏側は、前記カバー部材89が存在し、該通路76を流下するパチンコ球Wが前記入賞用発光基板86に接触するのは該カバー部材89で防止される。   The cover member 89 disposed so as to cover the front opening of the left discharge ball passage 76 is attached to the lower structure 53 so as to face the front side of the cover member 89. 87) and the wall portion 82 for passage are attached from the front and rear so that they cannot be dropped off. In the left discharge ball passage 76, a portion facing the third through hole 21c in an open state without overlapping the winning hole light emitting device 85 is covered with a cover member 89 (see FIG. 25). ). Note that the cover member 89 is present on the back side of the portion of the winning opening light emitting device 85 that overlaps the front opening of the left discharge ball passage 76, and the pachinko balls W flowing down the passage 76 form the winning light emitting substrate 86. Contact with the cover member 89 is prevented.

(表示器について)
前記裏ユニット19の下部構造体53における右収容部71には、該裏ユニット19を板部材18に取り付けた状態で、前記遊技領域18a内における右下部に臨むように、当該パチンコ機10の現在の遊技状態を表示する表示器90が配設されている。この表示器90は、図31に示す如く、特別表示部91、ラウンド回数表示部92、普通表示部93、特別保留表示部94および普通保留表示部95等が、一枚の表示基板96に纏めて設置されており、これら各表示部91,92,93,94,95は、表示基板96の裏側を向く実装面に設けられたコネクタ受部96aに一端が接続される表示器用配線(配線)97、前記裏中継基板61を介して主制御装置に接続されるよう構成される。各表示部91,92,93,94,95は、夫々が少なくとも1個以上の発光手段としてのLEDを備えており、主制御装置による各LEDの点灯制御により所定の状態を表示し得るようになっている。
(About the display)
The right housing 71 in the lower structure 53 of the back unit 19 has the current state of the pachinko machine 10 facing the lower right in the game area 18a with the back unit 19 attached to the plate member 18. A display 90 for displaying the game state of the game is arranged. As shown in FIG. 31, the display 90 includes a special display unit 91, a round number display unit 92, a normal display unit 93, a special hold display unit 94, a normal hold display unit 95 and the like on a single display board 96. The display portions 91, 92, 93, 94, and 95 are connected to a connector receiving portion 96 a provided on the mounting surface facing the back side of the display substrate 96. 97, configured to be connected to the main controller via the back relay board 61. Each of the display units 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 includes at least one LED as a light emitting means, and can display a predetermined state by lighting control of each LED by the main controller. It has become.

特別表示部91は、前記始動入賞装置24の始動入賞口24a,24bにパチンコ球Wが入賞することを契機として主制御装置において実行される特別図柄の抽選結果を、複数の表示パターンにて表示するためのものである。実施例の特別表示部91は、7個のLEDを8の字状に配置したブロック状の7セグメント形表示部から構成されて、上側の始動入賞口24aへのパチンコ球Wの入賞を契機として図柄変動を開始すると共に結果を表示する第1特別表示部91aと、下側の始動入賞口24bへのパチンコ球Wの入賞を契機として図柄変動を開始すると共に結果を表示する第2特別表示部91bとを左右並列に備える。各特別表示部91a,91bでは、各LEDを個別に点灯制御することで、点灯したLEDの組合わせにより複数の表示パターンを発現し得るようになっている。   The special display unit 91 displays, in a plurality of display patterns, lottery results of special symbols that are executed in the main controller when the pachinko ball W wins at the start winning ports 24a and 24b of the start winning device 24. Is to do. The special display portion 91 of the embodiment is composed of a block-like 7-segment display portion in which 7 LEDs are arranged in an 8-shape, and triggered by the winning of the pachinko ball W to the upper start winning opening 24a. A first special display unit 91a for starting the symbol variation and displaying the result, and a second special display unit for starting the symbol variation and displaying the result in response to the winning of the pachinko ball W in the lower start winning opening 24b. 91b are provided in parallel on the left and right. In each special display part 91a, 91b, by controlling lighting of each LED individually, a plurality of display patterns can be expressed by a combination of the lighted LEDs.

ラウンド回数表示部92は、前述した主制御装置における特別図柄の抽選結果により特定遊技状態が成立した場合に、成立した該特定遊技状態に対応する上限ラウンド回数を、遊技者に報知するためのものである。実施例のパチンコ機10は、上限ラウンド回数を2回に設定した第1特定遊技状態、上限ラウンド回数を15回に設定した第2特定遊技状態、そして上限ラウンド回数を16回に設定した第3特定遊技状態との、合計3種類の特定遊技状態を発現するように設計されている。従ってラウンド回数表示部92は、3種類の各特定遊技状態に夫々対応する3個のラウンド回数表示LED92a,92b,92cにより構成される。そして、各ラウンド回数表示LED92a,92b,92cは、主制御装置により個別に点灯制御され、主制御装置における抽選結果として第1特定遊技状態が成立した場合には第1ラウンド回数表示LED92aが点灯し、第2特定遊技状態が成立した場合には第2ラウンド回数表示LED92bが点灯し、第3特定遊技状態が成立した場合には第3ラウンド回数表示LED92cが点灯するよう構成されている。   The round number display unit 92 is for informing the player of the upper limit number of rounds corresponding to the established specific gaming state when the particular gaming state is established by the special symbol lottery result in the main control device described above. It is. The pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment has a first specific gaming state in which the upper limit number of rounds is set to 2, a second specific gaming state in which the upper limit number of rounds is set to 15 times, and a third in which the upper limit number of rounds is set to 16 times. It is designed to express a total of three types of specific game states with the specific game state. Accordingly, the round number display unit 92 is configured by three round number display LEDs 92a, 92b, and 92c that respectively correspond to the three types of specific gaming states. The round number display LEDs 92a, 92b, and 92c are individually controlled to be turned on by the main control device, and the first round number display LED 92a is turned on when the first specific gaming state is established as a lottery result in the main control device. When the second specific game state is established, the second round number display LED 92b is lit, and when the third specific game state is established, the third round number display LED 92c is lit.

普通表示部93は、前記球通過ゲート36をパチンコ球Wが通過して、球検出センサ35での検出信号が主制御装置に入力された際に、該主制御装置において実行される前記始動入賞装置24の開閉羽根25の開閉動作有無の抽選結果を表示するものである。この普通表示部93は、第1および第2からなる2個の普通表示LED93a,93bから構成される。第1普通表示LED93aおよび第2普通表示LED93bは、所要の点滅時間に亘って交互に点滅するよう点灯制御された後、主制御装置における抽選結果が「開閉動作あり」の場合には、第1普通表示LED93aが点灯した状態で停止し、前記始動入賞装置24に設けた開閉羽根25,25が所定時間および所定回数だけ開放制御される。また、主制御装置における抽選結果が「開閉動作なし」の場合には、第2普通表示LED93bが点灯した状態で停止し、該開閉羽根25,25の開放制御は行なわれない。   The normal display unit 93 is configured to execute the start prize that is executed in the main control device when the pachinko ball W passes through the ball passage gate 36 and a detection signal from the ball detection sensor 35 is input to the main control device. The lottery result indicating whether or not the opening / closing blade 25 of the device 24 is open / closed is displayed. The normal display section 93 includes two normal display LEDs 93a and 93b including first and second. After the first normal display LED 93a and the second normal display LED 93b are controlled to turn on and off alternately over a required flashing time, the first normal display LED 93a and the second normal display LED 93b are the first when the lottery result in the main controller is “open / close operation”. The normal display LED 93a is turned on and stopped, and the opening and closing blades 25, 25 provided in the start winning device 24 are controlled to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. When the lottery result in the main controller is “no opening / closing operation”, the second normal display LED 93b is turned on and stopped, and the opening / closing of the opening / closing blades 25, 25 is not performed.

前記特別保留表示部94は、始動入賞装置24における上側の始動入賞口24aに入賞したパチンコ球(入賞球)Wの保留個数を表示する第1特別保留表示部98と、始動入賞装置24における下側の始動入賞口24bに入賞したパチンコ球(入賞球)Wの保留個数を表示する第2特別保留表示部99で構成される。第1特別保留表示部98は、2個の第1特別保留表示LED98a,98bから構成されると共に、第2特別保留表示部99は、2個の第2特別保留表示LED99a,99bから構成され、各々が個別に点灯または点滅制御されることで4個の保留個数まで表示可能となっている。また前記普通保留表示部95は、前記球通過ゲート36を通過したパチンコ球(通過球)Wの保留個数を表示するための2個の普通保留表示LED95a,95bから構成され、各々が個別に点灯または点滅制御されることで4個の保留個数まで表示可能となっている。   The special hold display unit 94 includes a first special hold display unit 98 for displaying the number of pachinko balls (winning balls) W held in the upper start winning port 24a of the start winning device 24, and a lower position in the start winning device 24. It comprises a second special hold display unit 99 for displaying the number of pachinko balls (winning balls) W that have won a prize at the start winning opening 24b on the side. The first special hold display unit 98 includes two first special hold display LEDs 98a and 98b, and the second special hold display unit 99 includes two second special hold display LEDs 99a and 99b. Each can be individually turned on or blinked to display up to four reserved numbers. The normal holding display unit 95 is composed of two normal holding display LEDs 95a and 95b for displaying the number of pachinko balls (passing balls) W that have passed through the ball passing gate 36, and each of them is lit individually. Alternatively, it is possible to display up to four reserved numbers by controlling blinking.

前記特別保留表示部98,99および普通保留表示部95における各2個のLEDによる保留個数の表示態様として、実施例では、保留個数の1個の場合は、一方のLEDが点灯、他方のLEDが消灯、保留個数の2個の場合は、一方のLEDが点灯、他方のLEDが点灯、保留個数の3個の場合は、一方のLEDが点滅、他方のLEDが点灯、保留個数の4個の場合は、一方のLEDが点滅、他方のLEDが点滅に設定されている。   In the embodiment, as a display mode of the number of holdings by each of the two LEDs in the special holding display units 98 and 99 and the normal holding display unit 95, in the embodiment, when the number of holdings is 1, one LED is lit, and the other LED Is off, if the number of reserves is 2, one LED is lit, the other LED is lit, if the number of reserves is 3, one LED flashes, the other LED is lit, the number of reserves is 4 In this case, one LED is set to flash and the other LED is set to flash.

なお、前記特別表示部91には、現在のパチンコ機10の状態を表示するためのLEDからなる状態表示部(図示せず)が設けられ、状態表示部におけるLEDの状態によって、該パチンコ機10が変動時間短縮機能の作動中(時短状態中)であるか否か、または復電時(電源投入時)に確率変動機能の作動中であるか否かを表示するよう構成される。実施例では、第1特別表示部91aに第1状態表示LEDが設けられ、第2特別表示部91bに第2状態表示LEDが設けられ、パチンコ機10が変動時間短縮状態となっている場合には、第2状態表示LEDが点灯するよう制御され、復電時に確率変動状態となっている場合には、第1状態表示LEDが点灯するよう制御される。   The special display unit 91 is provided with a state display unit (not shown) composed of LEDs for displaying the current state of the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 depends on the state of the LEDs in the state display unit. Is displayed during the operation of the variable time shortening function (during the short-time state) or whether the probability variable function is operating during power recovery (when the power is turned on). In the embodiment, the first special display unit 91a is provided with a first status display LED, the second special display unit 91b is provided with a second status display LED, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the variation time is shortened. Is controlled so that the second status display LED is lit, and when the probability variation state is present at the time of power recovery, the first status display LED is controlled to be lit.

前記「変動時間短縮機能」とは、特定遊技状態の終了後に、(1)主制御装置により実行される前記開閉羽根25,25の開閉動作有無の抽選において「開閉動作あり」の条件が成立する抽選確率の変化、(2)開閉羽根25,25の開閉動作パターンの変化、(3)普通表示部93における第1普通表示LED93aおよび第2普通表示LED93bの点滅時間の変化、の何れかを付与する機能である。また、前記「確率変動機能」とは、特定遊技状態が終了した後に、前記主制御装置における抽選の確率(特別表示部91a,91bにおける大当りの当選確率)を、低確率(通常状態)から高確率(確率変動状態)に変動させる機能である。   The “variable time shortening function” means that after completion of a specific gaming state, (1) a condition of “with opening / closing operation” is established in a lottery for opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blades 25, 25 executed by the main controller. Any one of change in the lottery probability, (2) change in the opening / closing operation pattern of the opening / closing blades 25, 25, and (3) change in the blinking time of the first normal display LED 93a and the second normal display LED 93b in the normal display section 93 It is a function to do. In addition, the “probability changing function” means that after the specific gaming state is finished, the probability of the lottery in the main control device (winning probability in the special display units 91a and 91b) is increased from a low probability (normal state) to a high probability. This is a function to change the probability (probability fluctuation state).

(表示設置部について)
前記表示基板96は、前記装飾部材28の右下部において該装飾部材28の一部を構成する前記隅部光透過部33の裏側に臨むように、前記裏ユニット19の前記右収容部71に設けた表示設置部(設置部)100に配設される。表示設置部100は、図29または図30に示す如く、表示基板96を裏側に収容可能な後方に開放する箱状に形成されたものであって、裏面には後方に突出する複数(実施例では2つ)の脚部101が設けられる。各脚部101には、前記裏ユニット19の下部構造体53における右収容部71を画成する後側の収容壁部71aから前方に突設した取付けボス71bの前端が嵌合する凹部(図示せず)が裏面に設けられると共に、該凹部の中央に対応して前後方向に貫通するネジ用通孔101aが穿設されている。そして、表示設置部100は、各取付けボス71bに対応する脚部101の凹部を前側から嵌合した状態で、ネジ用通孔101aに前側から挿通したネジを取付けボス71bのネジ孔に螺挿することで、裏ユニット19の前面から所定長だけ突出した状態で位置決め固定される。そして、裏ユニット19に取り付けられた表示設置部100は、該裏ユニット19を板部材18の裏側に取り付けた際には、前面が板部材18の前面と略同一レベルに臨むように前記第1の貫通口21aに臨むよう構成される。
(About the display installation section)
The display substrate 96 is provided in the right accommodating portion 71 of the back unit 19 so as to face the back side of the corner light transmitting portion 33 constituting a part of the decorative member 28 in the lower right portion of the decorative member 28. It is disposed in the display installation unit (installation unit) 100. As shown in FIG. 29 or FIG. 30, the display installation unit 100 is formed in a box shape that can be accommodated on the back side and opened rearward. Then, two leg portions 101 are provided. Each leg 101 has a recess (Fig. 5) in which a front end of a mounting boss 71b projecting forward from a rear housing wall 71a defining the right housing 71 in the lower structure 53 of the back unit 19 is fitted. (Not shown) is provided on the back surface, and a screw through-hole 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed corresponding to the center of the recess. The display installation unit 100 then inserts a screw inserted from the front side into the screw hole 101a into the screw hole of the mounting boss 71b with the recesses of the leg portions 101 corresponding to the mounting bosses 71b fitted from the front side. By doing so, it is positioned and fixed in a state where it protrudes from the front surface of the back unit 19 by a predetermined length. The display installation unit 100 attached to the back unit 19 is configured such that when the back unit 19 is attached to the back side of the plate member 18, the front side faces the front surface of the plate member 18 at substantially the same level. It is comprised so that it may face the through-hole 21a.

前記表示設置部100は、光の透過が不能な素材から構成され、裏側にネジ止め固定される前記表示基板96の実装面に設けられた各表示部91,92,93,94,95に対応する位置には、該表示部91,92,93,94,95を前側から視認可能な孔部102,103が設けられている。前記特別表示部91に対応する第1の孔部102は、第1および第2特別表示部91a,91bを共通して収容可能な形状に設定されたものであり、表示基板96を設置部裏面に取り付けた状態で、特別表示部91は、その前面が表示設置部100の前面(最前面)に臨むように第1の孔部102に収容される。これに対し、他の表示部92,93,94,95に対応する第2の孔部103は、各LED92a,92b,92c,93a,93b,95a,95b,98a,98b,99a,99bに対応する位置において表示設置部100の前後方向に突出する突出部104に前後方向に貫通するよう形成されたものであって、表示基板96を設置部裏面に取り付けた状態で、各第2の孔部103の後端部に対応する各LED92a,92b,92c,93a,93b,95a,95b,98a,98b,99a,99bが収容されるよう構成される(図28参照)。そして、各第2の孔部103では、LED92a,92b,92c,93a,93b,95a,95b,98a,98b,99a,99bが個々に収容されることで、各LED92a,92b,92c,93a,93b,95a,95b,98a,98b,99a,99bの点灯時には他のLEDの光と明確に区分し得るようになっている。   The display installation unit 100 is made of a material that cannot transmit light, and corresponds to each display unit 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 provided on the mounting surface of the display substrate 96 fixed with screws on the back side. Holes 102 and 103 that can visually recognize the display portions 91, 92, 93, 94, and 95 from the front side are provided at positions where the display portions 91, 92, 93, 94, and 95 are visible. The first hole portion 102 corresponding to the special display portion 91 is set to a shape that can accommodate the first and second special display portions 91a and 91b in common, and the display substrate 96 is disposed on the back surface of the installation portion. The special display unit 91 is accommodated in the first hole 102 so that the front surface thereof faces the front surface (frontmost surface) of the display installation unit 100. On the other hand, the second hole portion 103 corresponding to the other display portions 92, 93, 94, 95 corresponds to the respective LEDs 92a, 92b, 92c, 93a, 93b, 95a, 95b, 98a, 98b, 99a, 99b. In the state where the display board 96 is attached to the back surface of the installation part 96, the second hole part is formed so as to penetrate the protrusion 104 protruding in the front-rear direction of the display installation part 100 at the position where the display board 96 is attached. Each of the LEDs 92a, 92b, 92c, 93a, 93b, 95a, 95b, 98a, 98b, 99a, 99b corresponding to the rear end portion 103 is accommodated (see FIG. 28). And in each 2nd hole 103, LED92a, 92b, 92c, 93a, 93b, 95a, 95b, 98a, 98b, 99a, 99b is accommodated individually, and each LED92a, 92b, 92c, 93a, When lighting 93b, 95a, 95b, 98a, 98b, 99a, 99b, it can be clearly distinguished from the light of other LEDs.

(配線挿通口について)
前記表示設置部100が取り付けられる下部構造体53を構成して、前記表示基板96と対向する収容壁部71aに、図30に示す如く、前後方向に貫通する配線挿通口71cが形成され、該表示基板96のコネクタ受部96aに一端が接続する表示器用配線97は、該配線挿通口71cを介して裏ユニット19の裏側に引き出されるよう構成される。そして、裏側に引き出された表示器用配線97が、前記位置決め突部57と中基板設置部60の当接支持部62および下対向面部55bとの間に画成された空間67を左方に引き回されて、前記左基板設置部60に取り付けられている裏中継基板61に接続されるようになっている。
(About wiring entry)
As shown in FIG. 30, a wiring insertion port 71c penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the housing wall 71a opposite to the display substrate 96. The display wiring 97 having one end connected to the connector receiving portion 96a of the display substrate 96 is configured to be drawn out to the back side of the back unit 19 through the wiring insertion port 71c. Then, the display wiring 97 pulled out to the back side pulls the space 67 defined between the positioning projection 57 and the contact support portion 62 and the lower facing surface portion 55b of the middle board installation portion 60 to the left. It is rotated and connected to the back relay board 61 attached to the left board installation part 60.

(装飾部材の隅部光透過部について)
前記裏ユニット19に取り付けた前記表示器90の前側に位置する前記装飾部材28の隅部光透過部33は、光の透過が可能な透明または半透明の素材から形成された装飾板から構成されると共に、該装飾板の前面にはパチンコ機10のモチーフとなる意匠が施されている。また、隅部光透過部33における表示器90の各表示部91,92,93,94,95の前側に臨む位置には、透明な透明部33a,33bが設けられ(図7参照)、7セグメントを構成するLEDや各表示LED92a,92b,92c,93a,93b,95a,95b,98a,98b,99a,99bが点灯した際には、その光が隅部光透過部33を透過して前側から認識されるようになっている。なお、隅部光透過部33の裏面には、特別表示部91に対応する第1透明部33aの形成部位と、他の表示部92,93,94,95に対応する第2透明部33bの形成部位との間に段差が設けられて、前記板部材18の裏側に裏ユニット19を取り付けた状態で、第1透明部33aの周囲裏面に前記表示設置部100の前面が当接すると共に、第2透明部33bの周囲裏面に表示設置部100に設けた突出部104の前面が当接するよう構成される。また隅部光透過部33における透明部33a,33b以外の部位は半透明に形成されて、裏側に臨む各表示部91,92,93,94,95からの光を明確に区分し得るようになっている。
(About the corner light transmission part of the decorative member)
The corner light transmitting portion 33 of the decorative member 28 located on the front side of the display unit 90 attached to the back unit 19 is configured by a decorative plate made of a transparent or translucent material capable of transmitting light. In addition, a design that is a motif of the pachinko machine 10 is applied to the front surface of the decorative plate. Transparent transparent portions 33a and 33b are provided at positions facing the front sides of the display portions 91, 92, 93, 94, and 95 of the display 90 in the corner light transmitting portion 33 (see FIG. 7). When the LEDs constituting the segment and the respective display LEDs 92a, 92b, 92c, 93a, 93b, 95a, 95b, 98a, 98b, 99a, 99b are lit, the light passes through the corner light transmitting portion 33 and the front side Has come to be recognized. In addition, on the back surface of the corner light transmission part 33, the formation part of the first transparent part 33 a corresponding to the special display part 91 and the second transparent part 33 b corresponding to the other display parts 92, 93, 94, 95 are provided. A step is provided between the first and second transparent portions 33a, and the front surface of the display installation unit 100 comes into contact with the back surface around the first transparent portion 33a with the back unit 19 attached to the back side of the plate member 18. It is comprised so that the front surface of the protrusion part 104 provided in the display installation part 100 may contact | abut the surrounding back surface of 2 transparent part 33b. Further, the portions other than the transparent portions 33a and 33b in the corner light transmitting portion 33 are formed to be translucent so that light from the display portions 91, 92, 93, 94, and 95 facing the back side can be clearly distinguished. It has become.

なお、隅部光透過部33における前記ラウンド回数表示LED92a,92b,92cに対応する第2透明部33b,33b,33bの前面には、図示しないが夫々対応するラウンド回数(2,15,16)が表示されて、各特定遊技状態が成立したことが容易かつ明確に認識できるようになっている。   In addition, although not shown, the corresponding round number (2, 15, 16) is provided on the front surface of the second transparent portions 33b, 33b, and 33b corresponding to the round number display LEDs 92a, 92b, and 92c in the corner light transmitting portion 33. Is displayed so that it can be easily and clearly recognized that each specific gaming state is established.

(裏ユニットに配設される可動演出装置および発光装置について)
前記板部材18の裏側に裏ユニット19を取り付けた状態で、該裏ユニット19の対向面部55と板部材18との間に所要の空間が画成され、前記対向面部55に設けられる前記可動演出装置105,106、発光装置107,108および発光基板109,110,111が、該空間に臨むよう構成される。実施例では、図18に示す如く、左対向面部55cに左可動演出装置105が配設され、右対向面部55dに右可動演出装置106が配設される。また図24に示す如く、上対向面部55aには、左可動演出装置105に設けられる可動体120,139a,139bの前後に臨む2つの上部発光装置107,108が配設され、右対向面部55dには、前記右可動演出装置106の後側に臨む側部発光基板109が配設され、右対向面部55dと下対向面部55bとが交わる右下隅部には、装飾部材28の前記隅部光透過部33の後側に臨む隅部発光基板110が配設される。更に、下対向面部55bには、前記装飾部材28においてステージ部29の後端縁に沿って設けられた前記後壁部44の後側に臨むように下部発光基板111が配設される。
(Moveable rendering device and light-emitting device installed in the back unit)
In a state where the back unit 19 is attached to the back side of the plate member 18, a required space is defined between the facing surface portion 55 of the back unit 19 and the plate member 18, and the movable effect provided on the facing surface portion 55. The devices 105 and 106, the light emitting devices 107 and 108, and the light emitting substrates 109, 110, and 111 are configured to face the space. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the left movable effect device 105 is disposed on the left facing surface portion 55c, and the right movable effect device 106 is disposed on the right facing surface portion 55d. As shown in FIG. 24, the upper facing surface portion 55a is provided with two upper light emitting devices 107, 108 facing the front and rear of the movable bodies 120, 139a, 139b provided in the left movable effect device 105, and the right facing surface portion 55d. The side light emitting substrate 109 facing the rear side of the right movable effect device 106 is disposed, and the corner light of the decorative member 28 is disposed at the lower right corner where the right facing surface portion 55d and the lower facing surface portion 55b intersect. A corner light emitting substrate 110 facing the rear side of the transmission part 33 is disposed. Further, a lower light emitting substrate 111 is disposed on the lower facing surface portion 55b so as to face the rear side of the rear wall portion 44 provided along the rear end edge of the stage portion 29 in the decorative member 28.

(第1の上部発光装置について)
前記裏ユニット19における上画壁部56aには、図19に示す如く、前記板部材18の裏面に当接する前端面より前側で上方に延出する延出部117cが設けられ、該延出部117cの前側に第1の上部発光装置(発光装置)107が配設される。第1の上部発光装置107は、図24に示す如く、実装面に複数のLED(発光体)112aを実装した第1発光基板(発光基板)112と、該第1発光基板112が実装面を前側に向けた姿勢で収容されるケース部材113を備える。ケース部材113は、透明な合成樹脂材から形成されたものであって、平板状の板部の外周縁に後側に突出するよう壁部を形成した後方に開口する箱状を呈し、該ケース部材113の内部に前記第1発光基板112がネジ止め固定される。そして、ケース部材113が前記延出部117cの前側にネジ止め固定されることで、当該第1の上部発光装置107は、裏ユニット19の前端から前方および上方に延出した状態で該裏ユニット19に取り付けられる(図32参照)。
(About the first upper light-emitting device)
As shown in FIG. 19, the upper wall portion 56 a of the back unit 19 is provided with an extension portion 117 c that extends upward in front of the front end surface that contacts the back surface of the plate member 18. A first upper light emitting device (light emitting device) 107 is disposed on the front side of 117c. As shown in FIG. 24, the first upper light emitting device 107 includes a first light emitting substrate (light emitting substrate) 112 on which a plurality of LEDs (light emitting bodies) 112a are mounted on the mounting surface, and the first light emitting substrate 112 has a mounting surface. A case member 113 is provided that is accommodated in a posture toward the front side. The case member 113 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, and has a box shape that opens to the rear with a wall portion formed on the outer peripheral edge of the flat plate portion so as to protrude rearward. The first light emitting substrate 112 is fixed to the inside of the member 113 with screws. Then, the case member 113 is screwed and fixed to the front side of the extension portion 117c, so that the first upper light emitting device 107 extends forward and upward from the front end of the back unit 19 in the back unit 19. 19 (see FIG. 32).

前記第1発光基板112は、図19または図24に示す如く、略円形の第1基板部112bと、該第1基板部112bから右方に延出するよう連設される略弧状の第2基板部112cとから構成され、実施例では第1基板部112bと第2基板部112cに実装されるLED112aの種類が異なるよう構成される。例えば第1基板部112bには発光色が単色(例えば白色)のLEDが実装されるのに対し、第2基板部112cには発光色が可変可能なフルカラーLEDが実装される。但し、各基板部112b,112cに実装されるLEDの種類は他の組合わせであってもよく、また同種のものであってもよい。   As shown in FIG. 19 or FIG. 24, the first light emitting substrate 112 includes a substantially circular first substrate portion 112b and a second substantially arc-shaped second member that is connected to the right to extend rightward from the first substrate portion 112b. It is comprised from the board | substrate part 112c, and it is comprised in the Example so that the kind of LED112a mounted in the 1st board | substrate part 112b and the 2nd board | substrate part 112c may differ. For example, an LED having a single color (for example, white) is mounted on the first substrate portion 112b, whereas a full color LED having a variable emission color is mounted on the second substrate portion 112c. However, the types of LEDs mounted on the board portions 112b and 112c may be other combinations or the same type.

前記ケース部材113は、前記第1発光基板112の形成に応じた形状に形成されたものであって、前記第1基板部112bに対応する略円筒状の第1ケース部113aと、前記第2基板部112cに対応する円弧箱状の第2ケース部113bとから構成される。そして、第1ケース部113aの前壁には、第1基板部112bに実装されたLED112aに対応する位置の夫々にレンズ部(図示せず)が設けられて、単色LEDからの光を強調し得るようになっている。これに対し、第2ケース部113bの前壁には乱反射加工が施されて、フルカラーLEDからの光で広範囲を照明し得るよう構成される。なお、各ケース部113a,113bに施される加工は、対応するLEDの種類に応じて設定すればよく、前述したものに限定されない。   The case member 113 is formed in a shape corresponding to the formation of the first light emitting substrate 112, and has a substantially cylindrical first case portion 113a corresponding to the first substrate portion 112b, and the second case. It is comprised from the arcuate box-shaped 2nd case part 113b corresponding to the board | substrate part 112c. A lens portion (not shown) is provided on the front wall of the first case portion 113a at a position corresponding to the LED 112a mounted on the first substrate portion 112b to emphasize light from the monochromatic LED. To get. On the other hand, the front wall of the second case portion 113b is subjected to irregular reflection processing so that a wide range can be illuminated with light from the full color LED. In addition, what is necessary is just to set the process given to each case part 113a, 113b according to the kind of corresponding LED, and is not limited to what was mentioned above.

(装飾部材の上部光透過部について)
前記装飾部材28の上部には、図6または図7に示す如く、窓口側(内周壁28bの内側)の略中央において前後方向に開口する筒状の第1の収容部114と、該第1の収容部114の右側に連通状態で形成されて後方に開口する第2の収容部115とが形成される。また両収容部114,115により形成される後方に開口する収容部の全体形状が、裏ユニット19に配設される前記第1の上部発光装置107(ケース部材113)の外形形状に略相似するよう構成される。すなわち、裏ユニット19を板部材18の裏側に取り付けた際に、該第1の上部発光装置107が第1および第2の収容部114,115に亘って収容されるようになっている(図34参照)。
(About the upper light transmission part of the decorative member)
As shown in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7, a cylindrical first accommodating portion 114 that opens in the front-rear direction at the approximate center on the window side (inside the inner peripheral wall 28 b) is disposed at the top of the decorative member 28. A second housing portion 115 is formed on the right side of the housing portion 114 in a communication state and opens rearward. Further, the overall shape of the housing portion opened rearward formed by both housing portions 114 and 115 is substantially similar to the outer shape of the first upper light emitting device 107 (case member 113) disposed in the back unit 19. It is configured as follows. That is, when the back unit 19 is attached to the back side of the plate member 18, the first upper light emitting device 107 is accommodated across the first and second accommodating portions 114, 115 (see FIG. 34).

前記第1の収容部114の前側開口には、光透過性の合成樹脂材から形成されたレンズ体114aが配設されて、前記第1の上部発光装置107の第1発光基板112における第1基板部112bに実装したLED112aからの光がレンズ体114aに照射されるよう構成される。また、第2の収容部115を構成する前壁には前後に貫通する複数のスリット115aが形成され、前記第1の上部発光装置107の第1発光基板112における第2基板部112cに実装したLED112aからの光がスリット115aを介して前側に照射されるようになっている。すなわち実施例では、レンズ体114aおよびスリット115aが上部光透過部(光透過部)31として機能している。なお、光透過部は、レンズ体やスリット等に限らず、裏側から照射される光を前側に透過可能なものであれば、半透明板や各種光拡散加工を施した板部材から構成されたものであってもよい。   A lens body 114 a made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material is disposed in the front opening of the first housing portion 114, and the first light-emitting substrate 112 of the first upper light-emitting device 107 has a first light-emitting substrate 112. The lens body 114a is configured to be irradiated with light from the LED 112a mounted on the substrate portion 112b. In addition, a plurality of slits 115a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the front wall constituting the second housing portion 115 and mounted on the second substrate portion 112c of the first light emitting substrate 112 of the first upper light emitting device 107. The light from the LED 112a is irradiated to the front side through the slit 115a. That is, in the embodiment, the lens body 114 a and the slit 115 a function as the upper light transmission part (light transmission part) 31. The light transmission part is not limited to a lens body, a slit, or the like, and is configured from a translucent plate or a plate member subjected to various light diffusion processes as long as it can transmit light irradiated from the back side to the front side. It may be a thing.

(第2の上部発光装置について)
前記裏ユニット19における上対向面部(設置部)55aには、前記第2の上部発光装置(第2の発光装置)108が配設される。この第2の上部発光装置108は、前側を向く実装面に複数のLED(発光体)116aが実装された第2発光基板116(図23参照)と、該第2発光基板116の前側を覆うカバー体117とから構成されて、第2発光基板116およびカバー体117の夫々が上対向面部55aにネジ止め固定されている。カバー体117は、光透過性の合成樹脂材から形成されたものであって、図32に示す如く、上対向面部55aに沿って延在する垂直面部117aと、該垂直面部117aの上端縁から前方に突出するよう形成された突出面部117bと、該突出面部117bの前端縁から上方に延出する前記延出部117cとから構成される。すなわち、実施例では前記第1の上部発光装置107が配設される延出部117cが第2の上部発光装置108のカバー体117に一体形成されている。
(About the second upper light-emitting device)
The second upper light emitting device (second light emitting device) 108 is disposed on the upper facing surface portion (installation portion) 55a of the back unit 19. The second upper light emitting device 108 covers a second light emitting substrate 116 (see FIG. 23) in which a plurality of LEDs (light emitting bodies) 116a are mounted on a mounting surface facing the front side, and the front side of the second light emitting substrate 116. The second light emitting substrate 116 and the cover body 117 are each fixed to the upper facing surface portion 55a with screws. The cover body 117 is formed from a light-transmitting synthetic resin material. As shown in FIG. 32, the cover body 117 includes a vertical surface portion 117a extending along the upper facing surface portion 55a and an upper end edge of the vertical surface portion 117a. It is comprised from the protrusion surface part 117b formed so that it may protrude ahead, and the said extension part 117c extended upwards from the front-end edge of this protrusion surface part 117b. In other words, in the embodiment, the extending portion 117 c where the first upper light emitting device 107 is disposed is integrally formed with the cover body 117 of the second upper light emitting device 108.

前記第1の上部発光装置107は、図32または図35に示す如く、前記第2の上部発光装置108の前方に離間して位置し、両上部発光装置107,108の間に、前記左可動演出装置105に設けられる可動体120,139a,139bが収容可能な下方に開放する可動体用空間118が画成される。すなわち、後述するように可動体120,139a,139bは、待機位置において両上部発光装置107,108の間に画成される可動体用空間118に収容され(図32)、該可動体120,139a,139bの前方に第1の上部発光装置107が臨むと共に、該可動体120,139a,139bの後方に第2の上部発光装置108が臨むようになっている。前記可動体用空間118は、待機位置と作動位置との間を往復移動する可動体120,139a,139bが待機位置に臨む状態で、作動位置に向けて開口して、該可動体120,139a,139bの作動位置への移動を許容すると共に、作動位置から待機位置に移動する可動体120,139a,139bの収容を許容するものである。   The first upper light-emitting device 107 is located in front of the second upper light-emitting device 108 as shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 35, and is movable between the upper light-emitting devices 107 and 108 to the left. A movable body space 118 is defined that opens downward and can accommodate the movable bodies 120, 139 a, and 139 b provided in the rendering device 105. That is, as will be described later, the movable bodies 120, 139a, 139b are accommodated in the movable body space 118 defined between the upper light emitting devices 107, 108 at the standby position (FIG. 32). The first upper light emitting device 107 faces the front of 139a, 139b, and the second upper light emitting device 108 faces the rear of the movable bodies 120, 139a, 139b. The movable body space 118 opens toward the operating position with the movable bodies 120, 139a, 139b reciprocating between the standby position and the operating position facing the standby position, and the movable bodies 120, 139a are opened. , 139b is allowed to move to the operating position, and the movable bodies 120, 139a, 139b moving from the operating position to the standby position are allowed to be accommodated.

前記延出部117cには、図19に示す如く、前記第1の上部発光装置107における第1発光基板112の裏面に設けたコネクタ受部112dに対応する位置に通孔117dが設けられ、第1の上部発光装置107を延出部117cに取り付けた際に、該コネクタ受部112dが通孔117dに臨むよう構成される。そして、コネクタ受部112dに一端が接続する配線(図示せず)が、前記突出面部117bの上側(可動体用空間118とは反対側)を引き回された後に第2の上部発光装置108の第2発光基板116に接続される。なお、突出面部117dの上面には配線保持部117eが設けられ、第1発光基板112と第2発光基板116とを接続する配線を該配線保持部117eに保持するよう構成される。また、前記裏ユニット19の上画壁部56aの前部側には、前記第1発光基板112のコネクタ受部112dと配線との接続部分を上方に露出するよう後側に向けて後退する切欠凹部19cが設けられ、第1の上部発光装置107を延出部117cに取り付けた状態で配線の接続作業を行ない得るようになっている。   As shown in FIG. 19, the extending portion 117c is provided with a through hole 117d at a position corresponding to the connector receiving portion 112d provided on the back surface of the first light emitting substrate 112 in the first upper light emitting device 107. When the upper light emitting device 107 is attached to the extending portion 117c, the connector receiving portion 112d is configured to face the through hole 117d. Then, a wiring (not shown) having one end connected to the connector receiving portion 112d is routed above the protruding surface portion 117b (on the side opposite to the movable body space 118). It is connected to the second light emitting substrate 116. Note that a wiring holding portion 117e is provided on the upper surface of the protruding surface portion 117d, and is configured to hold the wiring connecting the first light emitting substrate 112 and the second light emitting substrate 116 to the wiring holding portion 117e. In addition, a cutout is formed on the front side of the upper wall portion 56a of the back unit 19 so as to recede toward the rear side so as to expose a connection portion between the connector receiving portion 112d of the first light emitting board 112 and the wiring. A recess 19c is provided so that wiring connection work can be performed with the first upper light-emitting device 107 attached to the extension 117c.

(裏ユニットの対向面部に配設される発光基板について)
前記裏ユニット19の下対向面部55bには、図23,図24または図26に示す如く、左右方向に延在する前記下部発光基板111が配設されている。下部発光基板111は、前記装飾部材28におけるステージ部29の上方に臨む前記後壁部44の裏側に臨んで、前方に向けて光を照射する複数のLED(発光体)111aを備えている。そして、下部発光基板111のLED111aを発光することで、後壁部44を裏側から照明するよう構成される。なお、下対向面部55bには、下部発光基板111を前側から覆う装飾カバー119が配設される。この装飾カバー119は、光透過性の合成樹脂材から形成されると共に、前面にはパチンコ機10のモチーフとなる意匠が施されており、下部発光基板111におけるLED111aからの光の透過を許容すると共に、前記透明な後壁部44を透して装飾カバー119の前面の意匠が前側から視認可能となっている。
(About the light emitting substrate disposed on the opposite surface of the back unit)
As shown in FIG. 23, FIG. 24, or FIG. 26, the lower light emitting substrate 111 extending in the left-right direction is disposed on the lower facing surface portion 55b of the back unit 19. The lower light emitting substrate 111 includes a plurality of LEDs (light emitting bodies) 111 a that irradiate light forward facing the back side of the rear wall portion 44 facing the upper side of the stage portion 29 in the decorative member 28. And it is comprised so that the rear wall part 44 may be illuminated from the back side by light-emitting LED111a of the lower light emission board | substrate 111. FIG. A decorative cover 119 that covers the lower light emitting substrate 111 from the front side is disposed on the lower facing surface portion 55b. The decorative cover 119 is formed of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material and has a design as a motif of the pachinko machine 10 on the front surface to allow light from the LED 111a in the lower light emitting substrate 111 to pass therethrough. At the same time, the design on the front surface of the decorative cover 119 is visible from the front side through the transparent rear wall 44.

前記裏ユニット19の右対向面部55dには、図23または図24に示す如く、上下方向に延在する前記側部発光基板109が配設されている。側部発光基板109は、右可動演出装置106の裏側に臨んで、前方に向けて光を照射する複数のLED(発光体)109aを備えている。そして、側部発光基板109のLED109aを発光することで、右可動演出装置106を裏側から照明するよう構成される。また、裏ユニット19の下対向面部55bと右対向面部55dとが交わる右下隅部には、隅部発光基板110が配設される。隅部発光基板110は、前記装飾部材28の隅部光透過部33における前記表示器90と対向する部位より上方の裏側に臨んで、前方に向けて光を照射する複数のLED(発光体)110aを備えている。そして、隅部発光基板110のLED110aを発光することで、隅部光透過部33を裏側から照明するよう構成される。   On the right facing surface portion 55d of the back unit 19, the side light emitting substrate 109 extending in the vertical direction is disposed as shown in FIG. The side light emitting substrate 109 includes a plurality of LEDs (light emitting bodies) 109a that face the back side of the right movable effect device 106 and emit light toward the front. And it is comprised so that the right movable production | presentation apparatus 106 may be illuminated from the back side by light-emitting LED109a of the side part light emission board | substrate 109. FIG. In addition, a corner light emitting substrate 110 is disposed at the lower right corner where the lower facing surface portion 55b and the right facing surface portion 55d intersect with each other. The corner light emitting substrate 110 faces a back side above the portion of the corner light transmitting portion 33 of the decorative member 28 that faces the display 90, and emits light toward the front (light emitting body). 110a. And it is comprised so that the corner light transmission part 33 may be illuminated from the back side by light-emitting LED110a of the corner light emission board | substrate 110. FIG.

なお、前記第2の上部発光装置108の第2発光基板116と側部発光基板109とが配線を介して接続すると共に、該側部発光基板109と隅部発光基板110とが配線を介して接続される。そして、隅部発光基板110から導出する配線が、前記裏中継基板61を介して統括制御装置59に接続され、該統括制御装置59により各発光基板112,116,109,110のLED112a,116a,109a,110aが発光制御されるようになっている。   Note that the second light emitting substrate 116 and the side light emitting substrate 109 of the second upper light emitting device 108 are connected via wiring, and the side light emitting substrate 109 and the corner light emitting substrate 110 are connected via wiring. Connected. Then, the wiring led out from the corner light emitting substrate 110 is connected to the overall control device 59 via the back relay substrate 61, and the overall control device 59 causes the LEDs 112 a, 116 a, 110 of each light emitting substrate 112, 116, 109, 110 to be connected. 109a and 110a are controlled to emit light.

(左可動演出装置について)
前記裏ユニット19における左対向面部55cに配設される前記左可動演出装置105は、図41または図42に示すように、所定の演出動作を行なう大型の左可動体120と、この左可動体120を往復移動する第1の駆動部121とから基本的に構成される。左可動体120は、後述するラック128の取付部位となる可動基部122(基部)と、この可動基部122における往復移動方向と交差する横方向に向けて可動基部122から延出するよう形成された腕部123とを備えている。なお、左可動体120は、可動基部122と腕部123とが直交または略直交する関係で、かつ可動基部122の上端に腕部123が接続するよう形成されて、全体として正面視で上下反転した略L字形状を呈している。そして、左可動体120は、可動基部122が前記左対向面部55cの前側に配設されて前記装飾部材28の窓口28aの左横側に位置し、該可動基部122から腕部123が前記窓口28aの中央側に向けて延出している(図33参照)。なお、腕部123における窓口28aの左右方向中央に位置する右端部には、上下幅が大きく設定された意匠部123aが設けられ、該意匠部123aに後述する副可動体139a,139bが配設されている。また、左可動体120の可動基部122は、裏ユニット19を板部材18の裏側に取り付けた状態で、該板部材18に配設した装飾部材28の窓口28a(第1の貫通口21a)より左側に位置して、該可動基部122は板部材18で前側が覆われて遊技盤17の前側から視認されない部分となるのに対し、左可動体120の腕部123は、前記したように窓口28aに臨んで遊技盤17の前側から視認可能な露出部となっている。
(Left movable effect device)
As shown in FIG. 41 or 42, the left movable effect device 105 disposed on the left facing surface portion 55c of the back unit 19 includes a large left movable body 120 that performs a predetermined effect operation, and the left movable body. The first drive unit 121 that reciprocates 120 is basically configured. The left movable body 120 is formed so as to extend from the movable base 122 toward a lateral direction intersecting a reciprocating direction of the movable base 122 and a movable base 122 (base) serving as a mounting portion of a rack 128 described later. Arm portion 123. In addition, the left movable body 120 is formed so that the movable base 122 and the arm 123 are orthogonal or substantially orthogonal, and the arm 123 is connected to the upper end of the movable base 122. It has a substantially L-shape. In the left movable body 120, the movable base 122 is disposed on the left side of the window 28a of the decorative member 28 with the movable base 122 disposed on the front side of the left facing surface portion 55c, and the arm 123 extends from the movable base 122 to the window. It extends toward the center side of 28a (see FIG. 33). A design portion 123a having a large vertical width is provided at the right end portion of the arm portion 123 located at the center in the left-right direction of the window 28a, and sub-movable bodies 139a and 139b described later are disposed on the design portion 123a. Has been. Further, the movable base 122 of the left movable body 120 is connected to the decorative member 28 provided on the plate member 18 with the back unit 19 attached to the back side of the plate member 18 from the window 28a (first through hole 21a). Located on the left side, the movable base 122 is a portion that is covered with the plate member 18 and is not visible from the front side of the game board 17, whereas the arm 123 of the left movable body 120 has a window as described above. It is an exposed portion that is visible from the front side of the game board 17 facing 28a.

前記左可動体120の本体は、後述する転がり軸受129を介して左対向面部55cに対して往復移動可能な可動体ベース124と、この可動体ベース124の前面に配設され、可動体ベース124の前側を覆う可動体カバー125とから構成され、可動体ベース124と可動体カバー125とで画成される内部空間に、後述する可動体発光基板154や内部中継基板158、副可動体139a,139bを動作させる第2の駆動部140や連繋機構141等が収容される。可動体ベース124は、図43に示す如く、上下反転した略L字形状に形成されたベース板の周縁から前側に壁部を延出した前方に開口する箱状に形成されたものであって、上下方向に長手が延在するベース基部124aと、このベース基部124aの右側上端部から延出して、左右方向に延在するベース腕部124bと、ベース腕部124bの右端部に設けられて前記意匠部123aを構成すると共に可動体発光基板154の設置部分となるベース取付部124cとから構成される。また、ベース腕部124bおよびベース取付部124cのベース板には、後述する連繋機構141と発光用配線156の引き回し経路とを上下に区画すると共に補強を兼ねる第1区画壁(区画壁)126が複数設けられている(図46参照)。   The main body of the left movable body 120 is disposed on the front surface of the movable body base 124 that can reciprocate with respect to the left facing surface portion 55c via a rolling bearing 129 described later. A movable body cover 125 covering the front side of the movable body, and in an internal space defined by the movable body base 124 and the movable body cover 125, a movable body light emitting substrate 154, an internal relay substrate 158, and a sub movable body 139a, which will be described later. The second drive unit 140 for operating the 139b, the linkage mechanism 141, and the like are accommodated. As shown in FIG. 43, the movable body base 124 is formed in a box shape that opens to the front with a wall portion extending forward from the periphery of a base plate formed in an approximately L shape that is inverted upside down. A base base portion 124a extending in the vertical direction, a base arm portion 124b extending from the right upper end portion of the base base portion 124a and extending in the left-right direction, and a right end portion of the base arm portion 124b. The design portion 123a is configured and a base mounting portion 124c that is an installation portion of the movable body light emitting substrate 154 is configured. Further, the base plate of the base arm portion 124b and the base mounting portion 124c has a first partition wall (partition wall) 126 that vertically divides a connection mechanism 141 and a routing route for the light emission wiring 156, which will be described later, and also serves as a reinforcement. A plurality are provided (see FIG. 46).

これに対し、可動体カバー125は、図43に示す如く、上下反転した略L字形状に形成された板状に形成されたものであって、上下方向に長手が延在するカバー基部125aと、このカバー基部125aの右側上端部から延出して、左右方向に延在するカバー腕部125bとから構成される。なお、カバー腕部125bにおける前記ベース取付部124cに対応する部分の上下寸法は小さく設定されて、該カバー腕部125bの下側においてベース取付部124cは前側に開口するよう構成される。但し、カバー腕部125bには、該カバー腕部125bの下側において開口するベース取付部124cの前側開口を覆う装飾覆い体127が着脱自在に配設される。実施例では、装飾覆い体127と前記ベース取付部124cとから意匠部123aが構成されている。またカバー基部125aにおける窓口28a側の縁部には、後述する内部中継基板158に実装したLED158bと対応する位置にレンズ部125cが設けられている。   On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, the movable body cover 125 is formed in a plate shape formed in an approximately L shape that is inverted up and down, and has a cover base portion 125a having a longitudinally extending length. The cover arm 125b extends from the upper right end of the cover base 125a and extends in the left-right direction. The vertical dimension of the portion corresponding to the base mounting portion 124c in the cover arm portion 125b is set small, and the base mounting portion 124c is configured to open to the front side below the cover arm portion 125b. However, the cover arm portion 125b is detachably provided with a decorative cover 127 that covers the front opening of the base mounting portion 124c that opens below the cover arm portion 125b. In the embodiment, the design portion 123a is constituted by the decorative cover 127 and the base mounting portion 124c. In addition, a lens portion 125c is provided at a position corresponding to an LED 158b mounted on an internal relay substrate 158, which will be described later, at the edge of the cover base 125a on the window 28a side.

前記ベース基部124aの裏面には、上下方向に延在するラック128が、歯部128aを窓口28aとは反対側である左側に向けた姿勢で配設される。またラック128の裏面には、転がり軸受129が配設され、該転がり軸受129は、前記左対向面部55cにおいて上下方向に所定長さで延在するよう配設されたレール部材130に移動自在に支持されている(図39参照)。すなわち、左可動体120は、転がり軸受129がレール部材130に支持された状態で、前記腕部123が前記窓口28aに臨む領域において、裏ユニット19の上対向面部55aの前側に位置して前記窓口28aの内部上方縁部に位置した図2に示す待機位置(第1位置)と、この待機位置から下方変位して窓口28aの中央部近傍に臨む図33に示す作動位置(第2位置)との間を往復移動し得るようになっている。左可動体120の移動支持構造として転がり軸受129を用いることで、ラック128に可動基部122を取り付けて片持ち支持された左可動体120は、前記レール部材130に沿って上下方向に直線的にスムーズに往復移動し得るよう構成される。また転がり軸受129は、可動基部122において腕部123が連設される部分において該可動基部122の長手方向(往復移動方向)に所定長さで延在するように配設され、該転がり軸部129で腕部123の荷重を支持して左可動体120を安定して移動し得るよう構成されている。なお、転がり軸受129としては、レール部材130に当接して転動する転動体として金属球を用いた所謂ボール軸受構造が採用される。また実施例では、レール部材130に転がり軸受129を介して支持される可動基部122が、該可動基部122から横方向に延出して窓口28aに臨むことで遊技者から視認可能な腕部(第1の可動体)123に対する支持部となっている。   On the back surface of the base base portion 124a, a rack 128 extending in the vertical direction is disposed in such a posture that the tooth portion 128a is directed to the left side opposite to the window 28a. Further, a rolling bearing 129 is disposed on the back surface of the rack 128, and the rolling bearing 129 is movably movable on a rail member 130 disposed to extend in the vertical direction at a predetermined length in the left facing surface portion 55c. It is supported (see FIG. 39). That is, the left movable body 120 is positioned in front of the upper facing surface portion 55a of the back unit 19 in a region where the arm portion 123 faces the window 28a in a state where the rolling bearing 129 is supported by the rail member 130. The standby position (first position) shown in FIG. 2 located at the inner upper edge of the window 28a, and the operating position (second position) shown in FIG. 33 that is displaced downward from this standby position and faces the vicinity of the center of the window 28a. It can be moved back and forth between. By using the rolling bearing 129 as the moving support structure of the left movable body 120, the left movable body 120 that is cantilevered by attaching the movable base 122 to the rack 128 is linearly moved in the vertical direction along the rail member 130. It is configured to be able to reciprocate smoothly. Further, the rolling bearing 129 is disposed so as to extend by a predetermined length in the longitudinal direction (reciprocating direction) of the movable base 122 at a portion where the arm portion 123 is continuously provided in the movable base 122, and the rolling shaft portion. The left movable body 120 can be stably moved by supporting the load of the arm portion 123 at 129. The rolling bearing 129 employs a so-called ball bearing structure using a metal ball as a rolling element that rolls in contact with the rail member 130. Further, in the embodiment, the movable base 122 supported by the rail member 130 via the rolling bearing 129 extends from the movable base 122 in the lateral direction and faces the window 28a, so that it can be seen by the player (a first portion). 1 movable body) 123.

ここで、前記板部材18の裏側に裏ユニット19を取り付けた状態で、該裏ユニット19の左対向面部55cと板部材18との間には、前記左可動体120における可動基部122の往復移動を許容する空間部131が上下方向に延在するように画成される。この空間部131は、図40に示す如く、左可動体120が待機位置に臨む状態で、可動基部122の下方に、該左可動体120が作動位置まで移動する長さより長い空間が確保されて、可動基部122の下端から引き出された後述の中継用配線160が可動基部122と裏ユニット19とで挟まれることがないよう設定される。   Here, with the back unit 19 attached to the back side of the plate member 18, the movable base portion 122 of the left movable body 120 is reciprocated between the left facing surface portion 55 c of the back unit 19 and the plate member 18. Is defined so as to extend in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 40, the space 131 has a space longer than the length that the left movable body 120 moves to the operating position below the movable base 122 with the left movable body 120 facing the standby position. The relay wiring 160 (described later) drawn from the lower end of the movable base 122 is set so as not to be sandwiched between the movable base 122 and the back unit 19.

また左可動体120の待機位置では、前記上対向面部55aに配設した前記第2の上部発光装置108の前側に前記腕部123および意匠部123aが重なるように位置すると共に、該意匠部123aの一部が、第2の上部発光装置108と前記第1の上部発光装置107との間に画成される前記可動体用空間118に収容されるように臨んで(図32,図34参照)、第2の上部発光装置108、左可動体120の意匠部123aおよび第1の上部発光装置107が前後の関係で重なるようになっている。そして、左可動体120の作動位置では、腕部123および意匠部123aが上対向面部55a、すなわち第2の上部発光装置108の前側から下方に退避することで、図33に示す如く、該第2の上部発光装置108が窓口28aから露出し、第2の上部発光装置108におけるLED116aの発光によって前方を直接照明し得るよう構成される。   Further, in the standby position of the left movable body 120, the arm portion 123 and the design portion 123a are positioned so as to overlap the front side of the second upper light emitting device 108 disposed on the upper facing surface portion 55a, and the design portion 123a. A part of the second upper light emitting device 108 faces the movable body space 118 defined between the second upper light emitting device 108 and the first upper light emitting device 107 (see FIGS. 32 and 34). ), The second upper light emitting device 108, the design portion 123a of the left movable body 120, and the first upper light emitting device 107 are overlapped in the front-rear relationship. Then, in the operating position of the left movable body 120, the arm portion 123 and the design portion 123a are retracted downward from the upper facing surface portion 55a, that is, from the front side of the second upper light emitting device 108, and as shown in FIG. The second upper light emitting device 108 is exposed from the window 28a, and the front of the second upper light emitting device 108 can be directly illuminated by the light emission of the LED 116a in the second upper light emitting device 108.

前記可動体ベース124、可動体カバー125および装飾覆い体127の夫々は、光透過性の合成樹脂材から形成されており、前記第2の上部発光装置108の前側に腕部123や意匠部123aが重なった状態において、第2の上部発光装置108におけるLED116aの光によって腕部123および意匠部123aが明輝し得るよう構成される。但し、可動体カバー125および装飾覆い体127には所要の光拡散加工が施されて、内部に収容した各種の部品の形状等が明確には視認し得ないようにしてある。   Each of the movable body base 124, the movable body cover 125, and the decorative cover body 127 is formed of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material, and an arm portion 123 and a design portion 123a are provided on the front side of the second upper light emitting device 108. In the state where the two overlap, the arm portion 123 and the design portion 123a can be brightened by the light of the LED 116a in the second upper light emitting device 108. However, the movable body cover 125 and the decorative cover 127 are subjected to a required light diffusion process so that the shapes and the like of various components housed therein cannot be clearly seen.

前記左対向面部55cの上部側には、図40に示す如く、前記レール部材130の配設位置より左側に、前記第1の駆動部121を備える駆動ユニット132が着脱自在に配設される。駆動ユニット132は、前ケース133aと後ケース133bとを前後に合わせて構成した駆動用カバー部材(カバー部材)133に、第1の駆動モータ(第1の駆動手段)134および該モータ134の回転を伝達する複数のギヤ135,136,137からなる第1の駆動部121を配設して構成されて(図48参照)、該駆動用カバー部材133を単位として左対向面部55cに対して着脱自在に取り付け可能に構成される。前ケース133aの前面には、図42に示す如く、第1の駆動モータ134が後向き姿勢で配設されて、その出力軸を駆動用カバー部材133の内部に突出させている。図48に示す如く、駆動用カバー部材133の内部に臨む出力軸に第1駆動ギヤ135が配設されると共に、該駆動用カバー部材133の内部には該第1駆動ギヤ135と噛合する中間ギヤ136および該中間ギヤ136に噛合する作動ギヤ(ギヤ)137が夫々回転自在に配設され、第1の駆動モータ134の正転および逆転駆動によって作動ギヤ137が正転および逆転するよう構成される。   On the upper side of the left facing surface portion 55c, as shown in FIG. 40, a drive unit 132 including the first drive unit 121 is detachably disposed on the left side of the position where the rail member 130 is disposed. The drive unit 132 includes a first drive motor (first drive means) 134 and a rotation of the motor 134. The drive cover member (cover member) 133 includes a front case 133a and a rear case 133b. The first drive unit 121 including a plurality of gears 135, 136, and 137 that transmit power is disposed (see FIG. 48), and is attached to and detached from the left facing surface unit 55c in units of the drive cover member 133. It is configured to be freely mountable. As shown in FIG. 42, a first drive motor 134 is disposed in a rearward posture on the front surface of the front case 133a, and its output shaft protrudes into the drive cover member 133. As shown in FIG. 48, the first drive gear 135 is disposed on the output shaft facing the inside of the drive cover member 133, and the drive cover member 133 has an intermediate portion that meshes with the first drive gear 135. A gear 136 and an operation gear (gear) 137 meshing with the intermediate gear 136 are rotatably disposed, and the operation gear 137 is configured to rotate forward and reverse by forward rotation and reverse rotation of the first drive motor 134. The

前記駆動用カバー部材133における前記ラック128を指向する右側部には、前記作動ギヤ137の配設位置に対応してギヤ用開口部133cが開設されて、該ギヤ用開口部133cを介して作動ギヤ137の一部が外方に突出するよう構成される(図48参照)。そして、駆動ユニット132を左対向面部55cに取り付けた状態で、ギヤ用開口部133cから外方に突出する歯部が、前記ラック128の歯部128aに噛合し、該作動ギヤ137とラック128との噛合作用下に、作動ギヤ137の回転に伴って前記左可動体120がラック128(レール部材130)の延在方向(上下方向)に往復移動するようになっている。前記駆動ユニット132においては、駆動用カバー部材133の外部(前側)に配設した第1の駆動モータ134と、該駆動用カバー部材133の内部に配設した複数のギヤ135,136,137との噛合部(連繋部)とが区画されて、第1の駆動モータ134から導出する後述の第1駆動用配線163が、ギヤ135,136,137の噛合部に接触することなく左対向面部55cの前側を引き回し得るよう構成されている。また前記作動ギヤ137とラック128との噛合位置は、左可動体120から外部に引き出される後述の中継用配線160の左可動体120からの引き出し端側とは、該左可動体120の往復移動方向の反対端側に偏倚するよう位置決めされている。   A gear opening 133c is formed on the right side of the drive cover member 133 that faces the rack 128, corresponding to the position where the operation gear 137 is disposed, and is operated through the gear opening 133c. A part of the gear 137 is configured to protrude outward (see FIG. 48). Then, with the drive unit 132 attached to the left facing surface portion 55c, the teeth protruding outward from the gear opening 133c mesh with the teeth 128a of the rack 128, and the operating gear 137, the rack 128, Under the meshing action, the left movable body 120 reciprocates in the extending direction (vertical direction) of the rack 128 (rail member 130) as the operating gear 137 rotates. In the drive unit 132, a first drive motor 134 disposed outside (front side) of the drive cover member 133, and a plurality of gears 135, 136, 137 disposed inside the drive cover member 133, And a first driving wire 163 to be described later derived from the first drive motor 134 without contacting the meshing portions of the gears 135, 136, 137, and the left facing surface portion 55c. It is comprised so that the front side of can be routed. Further, the meshing position of the operating gear 137 and the rack 128 is different from the retraction movement of the left movable body 120 to the drawing end side from the left movable body 120 of a later-described relay wiring 160 drawn out from the left movable body 120. Positioned to be biased to the opposite end of the direction.

(副可動演出装置について)
前記左可動演出装置105には、左可動体120とは独立して動作可能(変位可能)な副可動体(第2の可動体,可動部材)139a,139bを備える副可動演出装置138が配設されている。この副可動演出装置138は、前記左可動体120の意匠部123a前側に配設されて往復移動可能な左右一対の副可動体139a,139bと、この副可動体139a,139bを往復移動させるための駆動源となる第2の駆動部140と、該第2の駆動部140と副可動体139a,139bとを連繋して第2の駆動部140の駆動を伝達する連繋機構141とから基本的に構成される。
(Sub-movable production device)
The left movable effect device 105 is provided with a sub movable effect device 138 including sub movable members (second movable members, movable members) 139a and 139b that are operable (displaceable) independently of the left movable member 120. It is installed. The secondary movable effect device 138 is disposed on the front side of the design portion 123a of the left movable body 120 so as to reciprocate the pair of left and right secondary movable bodies 139a, 139b and the secondary movable bodies 139a, 139b. Basically, a second drive unit 140 serving as a drive source for the second drive unit 140 and a linkage mechanism 141 for linking the second drive unit 140 and the sub movable bodies 139a and 139b to transmit the drive of the second drive unit 140. Configured.

前記副可動体139a,139bは、前記意匠部123aにおける前記装飾覆い体127の前側において左右方向に移動自在に配設されて、両副可動体139a,139bが相互に近接した待機位置と、両副可動体139a,139bが相互に離間した作動位置との間を往復移動するよう構成される。両副可動体139a,139bは、パチンコ機10のモチーフに関連する、例えば錠を模した形状に形成されて、図18に示すように一対の副可動体139a,139bが近接して施錠状態を表わし、図33に示すように離間して解錠状態を表わすようになっている。また両副可動体139a,139bは、非光透過性に構成されて、待機位置では前記装飾覆い体127の前側全体を覆うことで、意匠部123aに内蔵される後述する可動体発光基板154のLED154aを発光した光で明輝した装飾覆い体127が前側から視認し得ないように構成される。   The auxiliary movable bodies 139a and 139b are arranged to be movable in the left-right direction on the front side of the decorative cover 127 in the design portion 123a, and both the auxiliary movable bodies 139a and 139b are close to each other, The sub movable bodies 139a and 139b are configured to reciprocate between operating positions separated from each other. Both the sub movable bodies 139a and 139b are formed in a shape related to the motif of the pachinko machine 10, for example, imitating a lock, and as shown in FIG. 18, the pair of sub movable bodies 139a and 139b are close to each other and locked. As shown in FIG. 33, the unlocked state is shown separated. Further, the sub movable bodies 139a and 139b are configured to be non-light transmissive, and cover the entire front side of the decorative cover 127 at the standby position, so that a movable light emitting substrate 154 (to be described later) built in the design portion 123a is covered. The decorative cover 127 brightened with the light emitted from the LED 154a is configured not to be visible from the front side.

前記可動体ベース124におけるベース基部124aとベース腕部124bとの接続部分には、仕切部材142を介して第2の駆動部140が配設される。仕切部材142は、図46に示す如く、可動体ベース124のベース基部124aおよびベース腕部124bの所定領域に亘って収容可能な形状に形成されて、該仕切部材142におけるベース基部側に臨む位置に第2の駆動部140が配設される。この第2の駆動部140は、仕切部材142の裏面に前向きに配設された駆動源としての第2の駆動モータ(第2の駆動手段,電気部品)143および該モータ143における仕切部材142の前側に突出する出力軸に配設された第2駆動ギヤ144から構成されて、仕切部材142を可動体ベース124に前側から取り付けることで、ベース基部内において仕切部材142を挟んで第2駆動ギヤ144と第2の駆動モータ143とが前後の関係で仕切られた状態で臨むようになっている。   A second driving unit 140 is disposed via a partition member 142 at a connection portion between the base base portion 124 a and the base arm portion 124 b in the movable body base 124. As shown in FIG. 46, the partition member 142 is formed in a shape that can be accommodated over a predetermined region of the base base portion 124a and the base arm portion 124b of the movable body base 124, and faces the base base side of the partition member 142. The second driving unit 140 is disposed at the center. The second drive unit 140 includes a second drive motor (second drive means, electrical component) 143 as a drive source disposed forward on the back surface of the partition member 142, and the partition member 142 of the motor 143. The second drive gear 144 is arranged on the output shaft protruding forward, and the partition member 142 is attached to the movable body base 124 from the front side, so that the second drive gear is sandwiched between the partition member 142 in the base base portion. 144 and the second drive motor 143 face each other in a front-rear relationship.

前記第2の駆動部140は、左可動体120において前記レール部材130に転がり軸受129を介して支持される部位(可動基部122)に配置されて、該第2の駆動部140の荷重が可動基部122と腕部123との連設部に加わらないようにしてある。また、前記仕切部材142の前面には、図46に示す如く、前記ベース基部124aおよびベース腕部124bの内部において、前記第2駆動ギヤ144の配設位置を挟んで空間を上下に区画すると共に補強を兼る第2区画壁(区画壁)142aが設けられて、該第2区画壁142aの下側に後述する発光用配線156の引き回し経路を確保するよう構成される。なお、第2区画壁142aのベース腕部124b内に臨む右端は、該ベース腕部124bのベース板に設けた前記第1区画壁126の左端に整合するよう構成されて、両区画壁126,142aによってベース腕部124b内の空間が上下に区画されるようになっている。   The second driving unit 140 is disposed in a portion (movable base 122) supported by the rail member 130 via the rolling bearing 129 in the left movable body 120, and the load of the second driving unit 140 is movable. The base portion 122 and the arm portion 123 are not added to the connecting portion. In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, the front surface of the partition member 142 divides the space up and down inside the base base portion 124a and the base arm portion 124b with the arrangement position of the second drive gear 144 interposed therebetween. A second partition wall (compartment wall) 142a also serving as a reinforcement is provided, and is configured to secure a routing route for a light-emitting wiring 156, which will be described later, below the second partition wall 142a. The right end of the second partition wall 142a facing the base arm portion 124b is configured to be aligned with the left end of the first partition wall 126 provided on the base plate of the base arm portion 124b. A space in the base arm portion 124b is vertically divided by 142a.

(連繋機構について)
前記副可動演出装置138の連繋機構141は、相互に連結されて前記ベース腕部124bに沿って延在する複数の横長形状の連杆(連繋部材)145,146,147と、複数のギヤ144,151等とを組合わせて構成されて、前記ベース腕部124b内にコンパクトに纏めて配設されている。図46に示す如く、前記仕切部材142における第2駆動ギヤ144の配設位置より上側(第2区画壁142aより上側)に、該駆動ギヤ144に噛合する歯部145aが下面に左右方向に所定長さで形成された第1連杆145が、左右方向に移動自在に配設される。この第1連杆145には、左右方向に所定長さで延在する一対の長孔145b,145bが、左右方向に離間して穿設されており、仕切部材142の前面に突設した一対の案内ピン142b,142bに対応する長孔145b,145bを摺動自在に挿通することで、該第1連杆145は歯部145aと第2駆動ギヤ144との噛合状態を維持しつつ左右方向に安定して往復移動するよう構成される。
(About linkage mechanism)
The linkage mechanism 141 of the auxiliary movable effect device 138 includes a plurality of horizontally long linkages (linking members) 145, 146, and 147 that are connected to each other and extend along the base arm portion 124b, and a plurality of gears 144. , 151 and the like, and are arranged in a compact manner in the base arm portion 124b. As shown in FIG. 46, a tooth portion 145a meshing with the drive gear 144 on the upper side (above the second partition wall 142a) of the partition member 142 above the second drive gear 144 is predetermined on the lower surface in the left-right direction. A first linkage 145 formed with a length is disposed so as to be movable in the left-right direction. A pair of long holes 145b and 145b extending in a predetermined length in the left-right direction are formed in the first linkage 145 so as to be spaced apart in the left-right direction, and a pair of protrusions projecting from the front surface of the partition member 142. By inserting the long holes 145b and 145b corresponding to the guide pins 142b and 142b in a slidable manner, the first linkage 145 maintains the meshing state between the tooth portion 145a and the second drive gear 144 in the left-right direction. It is configured to reciprocate stably.

前記第1連杆145の右端部下面に右連結ピン145cが設けられ、該右連結ピン145cが、前記第1および第2区画壁126,142aの上側において左右方向に移動自在に支持された第2連杆146の左端部に形成した左連結孔146a(図43参照)に回動自在に挿通係合されて、第1連杆145の往復移動に伴って第2連杆146も往復移動するよう構成される。また、前記ベース腕部124bにおけるベース取付部124cに、第3連杆147が左右方向に往復移動自在に配設されており、第3連杆147の左端部に形成した左連結ピン147aが、前記第2連杆146の右端部に形成した右連結孔146b(図43参照)に回動自在に挿通係合されて、第2連杆146の往復移動に伴って第3連杆147も往復移動するよう構成される。なお、第3連杆147には、図46に示す如く、左右方向に所定長さで延在する一対の長孔147b,147bが、左右方向に離間して穿設されており、ベース取付部124cにおけるベース板の前面に突設した一対の案内ピン124d,124dに対応する長孔147b,147bを摺動自在に挿通することで、該第3連杆147は上下方向の移動が規制された状態で左右方向に安定して往復移動し得るようになっている。   A right connection pin 145c is provided on the lower surface of the right end of the first linkage 145, and the right connection pin 145c is supported on the upper side of the first and second partition walls 126, 142a so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The second connecting rod 146 is reciprocated as the first connecting rod 145 is reciprocated through a left connecting hole 146a (see FIG. 43) formed at the left end of the two connecting rod 146. It is configured as follows. A third connecting rod 147 is disposed on the base mounting portion 124c of the base arm portion 124b so as to be reciprocally movable in the left-right direction. A left connecting pin 147a formed at the left end of the third connecting rod 147 is provided. The second connecting rod 146 is pivotally inserted into and engaged with a right connecting hole 146b (see FIG. 43) formed in the right end portion of the second connecting rod 146, and the third connecting rod 147 also reciprocates as the second connecting rod 146 reciprocates. Configured to move. As shown in FIG. 46, the third continuous rod 147 has a pair of long holes 147b, 147b extending in the left-right direction and spaced apart in the left-right direction. The third linkage 147 is restricted from moving in the vertical direction by slidably passing through the long holes 147b and 147b corresponding to the pair of guide pins 124d and 124d protruding from the front surface of the base plate at 124c. In this state, the reciprocating movement can be stably performed in the left-right direction.

前記ベース腕部124bにおけるベース取付部124cには、図46に示す如く、左右一対の作動部材148,149が左右方向に直線的に往復移動自在に配設されている。左作動部材148の前面には、図43に示す如く、左右方向に離間して一対の左ボス部148a,148aが突設され、両左ボス部148a,148aが、前記装飾覆い体127の対応位置において左右方向に延在するよう形成された左貫通長孔127aに挿通された状態で、前記左側に位置する左副可動体139aに連結されている。同様に、右作動部材149の前面には、左右方向に離間して一対の右ボス部149a,149aが突設され、両右ボス部149a,149aが、前記装飾覆い体127の対応位置において左右方向に延在するよう形成された右貫通長孔127bに挿通された状態で、前記右側に位置する右副可動体139bに連結されている。すなわち、左右の副可動体139a,139bは、装飾覆い体127を挟んで後側に位置する対応する左右の作動部材148,149と一体で左右方向に往復移動するよう構成される。そして、左作動部材148に前記第3連杆147が連結固定されて、該第3連杆147の往復移動に伴って左作動部材148および左副可動体139aが往復移動するよう構成されている。   As shown in FIG. 46, a pair of left and right actuating members 148, 149 are arranged on the base mounting portion 124c of the base arm portion 124b so as to be linearly reciprocable in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 43, a pair of left boss portions 148a and 148a project from the front surface of the left operating member 148 in the left-right direction, and both left boss portions 148a and 148a correspond to the decorative cover 127. It is connected to the left sub movable body 139a located on the left side in a state of being inserted through a left through long hole 127a formed so as to extend in the left-right direction at the position. Similarly, a pair of right boss portions 149a and 149a project from the front surface of the right actuating member 149 in the left-right direction, and the right boss portions 149a and 149a are left and right at the corresponding positions of the decorative cover 127. The right sub movable body 139b located on the right side is connected to the right through long hole 127b formed so as to extend in the direction. That is, the left and right sub movable bodies 139a and 139b are configured to reciprocate in the left and right directions integrally with the corresponding left and right actuating members 148 and 149 located on the rear side with the decorative cover 127 interposed therebetween. The third connecting rod 147 is connected and fixed to the left operating member 148, and the left operating member 148 and the left sub movable body 139a are reciprocated as the third connecting rod 147 reciprocates. .

前記ベース取付部124cのベース板に、図48に示す如く、右作動部材149の後側で前記第3連杆147の下側に臨む位置にピニオン150が回転自在に配設されると共に、第3連杆147の左端部下面には、該ピニオン150に噛合する歯部147cが左右方向に所定長さで形成されている。また、ベース板におけるピニオン150の配設位置の下側に、該ピニオン150に噛合する歯部151aを上面に設けたラック部材151が左右方向に移動自在に配設されると共に、該ラック部材151が前記右作動部材149に連結されている。すなわち、左作動部材148に連結する第3連杆147の歯部147cと、右作動部材149に連結するラック部材151の歯部151aとが、ピニオン150に上下位置で噛合する関係となっていることで、第3連杆147の左右方向への往復移動に伴って、左右の作動部材148,149に連結する左右の副可動体139a,139bが同期して相互に近接移動したり離間移動するよう構成される。なお、ピニオン150の前端には歯部より径方向外方に延出する円形のフランジ150aが一体に形成され、該フランジ150aによって上下に位置する第3連杆147およびラック部材151の前面を摺動自在に支持することで、該第3連杆147およびラック部材151の前方への変位を規制し、ピニオン150との噛合状態を維持し得るようになっている。実施例では、右副可動体139bは、ピニオン150およびラック部材151を介して前記連繋機構141に連繋されており、該ピニオン150とラック部材151とで第2の連繋機構が構成される。   As shown in FIG. 48, a pinion 150 is rotatably disposed on the base plate of the base mounting portion 124c at a position facing the lower side of the third linkage 147 on the rear side of the right actuating member 149. A tooth portion 147c that meshes with the pinion 150 is formed on the lower surface of the left end portion of the triple rod 147 with a predetermined length in the left-right direction. A rack member 151 provided on the upper surface with a tooth portion 151a meshing with the pinion 150 is disposed below the position where the pinion 150 is disposed on the base plate, and is movable in the left-right direction. Is connected to the right actuating member 149. That is, the tooth portion 147c of the third linkage 147 connected to the left operating member 148 and the tooth portion 151a of the rack member 151 connected to the right operating member 149 are engaged with the pinion 150 in the vertical position. Thus, as the third linkage 147 reciprocates in the left-right direction, the left and right auxiliary movable bodies 139a, 139b connected to the left and right actuating members 148, 149 are synchronously moved toward and away from each other. It is configured as follows. The front end of the pinion 150 is integrally formed with a circular flange 150a extending radially outward from the tooth portion, and the front surface of the third linkage 147 and the rack member 151 positioned vertically is slid by the flange 150a. By being supported movably, the forward displacement of the third linkage 147 and the rack member 151 is restricted, and the meshed state with the pinion 150 can be maintained. In the embodiment, the right sub movable body 139b is linked to the linkage mechanism 141 via a pinion 150 and a rack member 151, and the pinion 150 and the rack member 151 constitute a second linkage mechanism.

前記左可動体120における腕部123の上面に金属片152が設けられ、該金属片152が前記第2の上部発光装置108の突出面部117bに配設した保持手段としての磁石153(図40参照)に磁力吸着されることで、該左可動体120を待機位置で停止保持する補助を行なうよう構成される。   A metal piece 152 is provided on the upper surface of the arm portion 123 in the left movable body 120, and the metal piece 152 is a magnet 153 as a holding means disposed on the projecting surface portion 117b of the second upper light emitting device 108 (see FIG. 40). ), The left movable body 120 is stopped and held at the standby position.

(可動体発光基板について)
前記ベース取付部124cには、前記第2連杆146や第3連杆147等の連繋機構141の配設位置より下側に、可動体発光基板(電気部品)154が配設されている。この可動体発光基板154は、前側を向く実装面に複数のLED(発光体)154aが実装されて、該LED154aの発光によって前記装飾覆い体127を裏側から照明するよう構成される。また可動体発光基板154には、図43または図47に示す如く、副可動体用原位置センサ155が配設され、該原位置センサ155で前記第3連杆147に設けた検出片147dを検出することで、該第3連杆147が連結される左副可動体139a(連繋機構141に直接連繋されて直接作動される側の副可動体)の位置を検出可能に構成されている。
(About movable body light-emitting substrate)
A movable body light emitting substrate (electrical component) 154 is disposed on the base mounting portion 124c below the position where the linkage mechanism 141 such as the second linkage 146 or the third linkage 147 is provided. The movable body light emitting substrate 154 is configured such that a plurality of LEDs (light emitting bodies) 154a are mounted on a mounting surface facing the front side, and the decorative cover 127 is illuminated from the back side by light emission of the LEDs 154a. Further, as shown in FIG. 43 or FIG. 47, the movable body light-emitting substrate 154 is provided with a sub-movable body original position sensor 155, and the original position sensor 155 provides a detection piece 147 d provided on the third linkage 147. By detecting, the position of the left sub movable body 139a (the sub movable body on the side directly operated by being directly linked to the linkage mechanism 141) to which the third linkage 147 is connected can be detected.

(左可動体の内部における電気部品の配線処理について)
前記可動体発光基板154の前面には、図46に示す如く、前記ベース腕部124bおよび仕切部材142に設けた区画壁126,142aの下側に画成される引き回し空間に臨む位置にコネクタ受部154bが設けられ、該コネクタ受部154bに一端が接続された発光用配線(部品用の配線)156は、該引き回し空間内を引き回された後にベース基部124a(可動基部122)内に引き込まれるよう構成されて、前記連繋機構141と発光用配線156とが接触することによる問題の発生を防止するようにしている。なお、前記仕切部材142の前面には、第2区画壁142aの下側に配線フック142cが設けられ、該配線フック142cに発光用配線156が係止される。
(About wiring of electrical parts inside the left movable body)
As shown in FIG. 46, on the front surface of the movable body light emitting substrate 154, there is a connector receiving portion at a position facing a routing space defined below the partition walls 126, 142a provided on the base arm portion 124b and the partition member 142. A light emitting wiring (component wiring) 156 provided with a portion 154b and having one end connected to the connector receiving portion 154b is drawn into the base base 124a (movable base 122) after being routed in the routing space. Thus, the occurrence of a problem due to the contact between the linkage mechanism 141 and the light emitting wiring 156 is prevented. A wiring hook 142c is provided on the front surface of the partition member 142 below the second partition wall 142a, and the light emitting wiring 156 is locked to the wiring hook 142c.

前記第2の駆動モータ143に一端が接続する第2駆動用配線(部品用の配線)157は、前記ベース基部124aにおけるベース板と前記仕切部材142の下端側との間の隙間を介して該ベース基部124aに配設した内部中継基板158の前側に引き出されるよう構成される。すなわち、第2駆動用配線157は、仕切部材142に設けられた前記第2区画壁142aより下側から仕切部材142の前側に引き出されて、前記第2区画壁142aより上前側に配置される第2駆動ギヤ144や連繋機構141等と干渉しないようになっている。   A second drive wiring (component wiring) 157 having one end connected to the second drive motor 143 is provided via a gap between the base plate of the base base portion 124a and the lower end side of the partition member 142. It is configured to be drawn out to the front side of the internal relay board 158 disposed on the base base portion 124a. In other words, the second drive wiring 157 is drawn from the lower side of the second partition wall 142a provided on the partition member 142 to the front side of the partition member 142, and is disposed on the upper front side of the second partition wall 142a. The second drive gear 144 and the linkage mechanism 141 are not interfered with.

(内部中継基板について)
前記左可動体120における可動基部122の内部には、前記可動体発光基板154および第2の駆動モータ143に一端が接続する配線156,157の他端が接続する内部中継基板(中継基板)158が配設される。この内部中継基板158は、図46に示す如く、可動基部122を構成するベース基部124a内における第2の駆動部140が配設される位置より下側において、ベース板から前側に離間した状態で配設される。内部中継基板158の前面には、左可動体120に配設された電気部品(可動体発光基板154,第2の駆動モータ143)の数に対応する前コネクタ受部158aが配設され、各前コネクタ受部158aに対応する可動体発光基板154や第2の駆動モータ143から導出する配線156,157が接続される。また内部中継基板158の前面には、前記装飾部材28の窓口28a側の縁部に沿って、上下に離間して複数のLED(発光体)158bが実装されており、各LED158bの光が、前記カバー基部125aの対応するレンズ部125cに照射されるよう構成される。なお、左可動体120における可動基部122は、前記装飾部材28における左側部光透過部32の後側において右側部が窓口28aに臨むよう構成されて、前記内部中継基板158のLED158bの光によって、窓口28a内を側方から照明し得るようになっている。すなわち、内部中継基板158は、窓口28a内を照明する発光基板としても機能している。
(About internal relay board)
Inside the movable base 122 of the left movable body 120, an internal relay board (relay board) 158 to which the other ends of the wirings 156 and 157 connected at one end to the movable body light emitting board 154 and the second drive motor 143 are connected. Is disposed. As shown in FIG. 46, the internal relay substrate 158 is spaced from the base plate to the front side below the position where the second drive unit 140 is disposed in the base base portion 124a constituting the movable base portion 122. Arranged. A front connector receiving portion 158a corresponding to the number of electrical components (movable body light emitting substrate 154, second drive motor 143) disposed on the left movable body 120 is disposed on the front surface of the internal relay substrate 158. Wirings 156 and 157 derived from the movable body light emitting substrate 154 and the second drive motor 143 corresponding to the front connector receiving portion 158a are connected. A plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 158b are mounted on the front surface of the internal relay board 158 so as to be spaced apart from each other along the edge of the decorative member 28 on the window 28a side. The lens unit 125c corresponding to the cover base 125a is irradiated. The movable base 122 of the left movable body 120 is configured such that the right side thereof faces the window 28a on the rear side of the left side light transmission part 32 of the decorative member 28, and the light of the LED 158b of the internal relay board 158 is used. The inside of the window 28a can be illuminated from the side. That is, the internal relay substrate 158 also functions as a light emitting substrate that illuminates the inside of the window 28a.

前記内部中継基板158の裏面には、前記前コネクタ受部158aに接続された全ての配線156,157が、該基板158に設けた回路によって集約して電気的に接続する内部中継用コネクタ受部(中継用コネクタ受部)159が設けられる。この内部中継用コネクタ受部159の接続口159aは、可動基部122における往復移動方向の一方端である下端部(作動位置に向く端部)に向けて開口し、該内部中継用コネクタ受部159の接続口159aに一端が接続する中継用配線(部品用の配線)160は、可動基部122の移動方向に沿って下側に向けて引き回される(図46参照)。また、可動基部122における下端には上下方向(往復移動方向)に貫通する挿通口122aが形成され、該挿通口122aを介して前記中継用配線160が外部(空間部131)に引き出されている。すなわち、左可動体120の内部に配設した可動体発光基板154や第2の駆動モータ143に電気的に接続する中継用配線160が該左可動体120から外部に引き出される側は、当該左可動体120を往復移動するための前記第1の駆動部121(駆動ユニット132)の配設位置に対して左可動体120の往復移動方向の反対側であり、第1の駆動部121の作動ギヤ137と前記ラック128との噛合位置に中継用配線160が臨むことがないよう構成される。なお、可動基部122の挿通口122aは、後述する外部中継基板161より前側に臨むよう設定される(図39参照)。   On the back surface of the internal relay board 158, all the wirings 156, 157 connected to the front connector receiving part 158a are aggregated and electrically connected by a circuit provided on the board 158, and the internal relay connector receiving part (Relay connector receiving portion) 159 is provided. The connection port 159a of the internal relay connector receiving portion 159 opens toward the lower end (the end toward the operating position) that is one end of the movable base 122 in the reciprocating direction, and the internal relay connector receiving portion 159. The relay wiring (component wiring) 160 having one end connected to the connection port 159a is routed downward along the moving direction of the movable base 122 (see FIG. 46). Further, an insertion port 122a penetrating in the vertical direction (reciprocating direction) is formed at the lower end of the movable base 122, and the relay wiring 160 is drawn out to the outside (space portion 131) through the insertion port 122a. . That is, the side where the relay wiring 160 electrically connected to the movable light emitting substrate 154 and the second drive motor 143 disposed inside the left movable body 120 is drawn out from the left movable body 120 is the left The first drive unit 121 (drive unit 132) for reciprocating the movable body 120 is opposite to the reciprocating direction of the left movable body 120 with respect to the arrangement position of the first drive unit 121, and the operation of the first drive unit 121 is performed. The relay wiring 160 does not face the meshing position of the gear 137 and the rack 128. The insertion opening 122a of the movable base 122 is set so as to face the front side of the external relay board 161 described later (see FIG. 39).

(外部中継基板について)
前記左対向面部55cには、図40に示す如く、前記空間部131の側方であって可動基部122の移動領域から左側方(窓口28aとは反対側)に外れた位置に、外部中継基板(基板,中継基板)161が配設される。この外部中継基板161の前面には、接続口162aを下方に向けて開口する外部中継用コネクタ受部(コネクタ受部)162が配設され、前記可動基部122の下端から引き出された前記中継用配線160の他端が、該外部中継用コネクタ受部162の下側から接続される。外部中継用コネクタ受部162は、左可動体120が待機位置に臨む状態では可動基部122の下端より下方に位置すると共に、左可動体120が作動位置に臨む状態では可動基部122の下端より上方に位置するよう設定される。また、待機位置の可動基部122の下端から引き出されて外部中継用コネクタ受部162に接続される中継用配線160は、図40に示すように、略J字状の屈曲状態で前記空間部131に臨むように構成される。そして、左可動体120が待機位置から作動位置に移動するにつれて中継用配線160は空間部内を移動しつつ、逆略J字状に屈曲する状態に変化することで、該中継用配線160に無理な力が作用しないよう構成される。
(External relay board)
As shown in FIG. 40, the left facing surface portion 55c is located on the side of the space portion 131 and on the left side from the moving region of the movable base portion 122 (on the side opposite to the window 28a). (Substrate, relay substrate) 161 is provided. An external relay connector receiving portion (connector receiving portion) 162 that opens the connection port 162a downward is disposed on the front surface of the external relay board 161, and the relay relay drawn out from the lower end of the movable base 122 is provided. The other end of the wiring 160 is connected from the lower side of the external relay connector receiving portion 162. The external relay connector receiving portion 162 is positioned below the lower end of the movable base 122 when the left movable body 120 faces the standby position, and above the lower end of the movable base 122 when the left movable body 120 faces the operating position. Is set to be located. Further, as shown in FIG. 40, the relay wiring 160 drawn out from the lower end of the movable base portion 122 at the standby position and connected to the external relay connector receiving portion 162 has a substantially J-shaped bent state. Configured to face. Then, as the left movable body 120 moves from the standby position to the operating position, the relay wiring 160 moves in the space portion and changes to a state of being bent in an approximately J-shape, so that the relay wiring 160 cannot be forced. It is configured so that no strong force is applied.

前記外部中継基板161の前面には、前記外部中継用コネクタ受部162より上側に、前記第1の駆動モータ134から導出する第1駆動用配線(駆動用の配線)163が接続される駆動用コネクタ受部(コネクタ受部)161aが設けられている。第1駆動用配線163は、前記駆動用カバー部材133の前側に配設されている第1の駆動モータ134における左側(ラック128から離間する側)に一端が接続し、図38に示す如く、駆動用カバー部材133の前側から外部中継基板161の前側に引き回されて、他端が前記駆動用コネクタ受部161aに接続される。なお、外部中継基板161は、前面が前記ラック128より前側であって、前記駆動ユニット132の前ケース133aの前面と同一レベルに臨むと共に、上端が駆動ユニット132の駆動用カバー部材133の下端と略隙間なく位置するように位置決めされて、駆動用カバー部材133の前側から外部中継基板161の前側に引き回される第1駆動用配線163が駆動用カバー部材133の前面より後方に変位しないよう構成される。また、駆動用カバー部材133の前面には、下端部近傍に配線フック133dが配設されて、該配線フック133dに第1駆動用配線163が係止される。この配線フック133dは、図42または図44に示すように、駆動用カバー部材133の前面から前側に延出して左側が開放する鈎形に形成されたものであって、当該配線フック133dの左側から係止された第1駆動用配線163が前記可動基部122の移動領域側へ変位するのを抑制し得るようになっている。   A first driving wiring (driving wiring) 163 led out from the first driving motor 134 is connected to the front surface of the external relay board 161 above the external relay connector receiving portion 162. A connector receiving portion (connector receiving portion) 161a is provided. One end of the first drive wiring 163 is connected to the left side (the side away from the rack 128) of the first drive motor 134 disposed on the front side of the drive cover member 133. As shown in FIG. The drive cover member 133 is drawn from the front side to the front side of the external relay substrate 161, and the other end is connected to the drive connector receiving portion 161a. The external relay board 161 has a front surface on the front side of the rack 128 and faces the same level as the front surface of the front case 133a of the drive unit 132, and an upper end of the external relay board 161 and a lower end of the drive cover member 133 of the drive unit 132. The first drive wiring 163 that is positioned so as to be positioned substantially without a gap and routed from the front side of the drive cover member 133 to the front side of the external relay substrate 161 does not displace rearward from the front surface of the drive cover member 133. Composed. In addition, a wiring hook 133d is disposed in the vicinity of the lower end portion on the front surface of the driving cover member 133, and the first driving wiring 163 is locked to the wiring hook 133d. As shown in FIG. 42 or 44, the wiring hook 133d is formed in a bowl shape that extends from the front surface of the driving cover member 133 to the front side and opens on the left side, and the left side of the wiring hook 133d. It is possible to prevent the first driving wiring 163 locked from the side from moving toward the moving region of the movable base 122.

前記外部中継基板161の前面には、前記外部中継用コネクタ受部162より左側(可動基部122の移動領域から離間する側)に、該外部中継用コネクタ受部162および駆動用コネクタ受部161aに接続された全ての配線160,163が、該外部中継基板161に設けた回路によって集約して電気的に接続する集約コネクタ受部(中継用コネクタ受部)161bが設けられる。そして、この集約コネクタ受部161bに一端が接続される集約中継用配線(中継用の配線)164は、外部中継基板161の前側を後述する配線ガイド166を挟んで前記可動基部122の移動領域とは反対側を引き回され、前記裏ユニット19の裏側に引き出された後に前記裏中継基板61に他端が接続される。なお、集約中継用配線164は、前記入賞口用発光装置85の後側を引き回された後に裏ユニット19の裏側に引き出されるようになっている(図40参照)。   On the front surface of the external relay board 161, on the left side of the external relay connector receiving portion 162 (on the side away from the moving region of the movable base 122), the external relay connector receiving portion 162 and the driving connector receiving portion 161a are connected. An aggregation connector receiving portion (relay connector receiving portion) 161b is provided in which all the connected wirings 160 and 163 are aggregated and electrically connected by a circuit provided on the external relay substrate 161. Then, an aggregation relay wiring (relay wiring) 164 having one end connected to the aggregation connector receiving portion 161b is connected to the moving region of the movable base 122 with the wiring guide 166 described later sandwiched between the front side of the external relay substrate 161. Is pulled out on the opposite side and pulled out to the back side of the back unit 19, and the other end is connected to the back relay board 61. The collective relay wiring 164 is drawn out to the back side of the back unit 19 after being routed behind the winning hole light emitting device 85 (see FIG. 40).

前記外部中継基板161の裏面には、図39に示す如く、左可動体用原位置センサ165が配設され、該原位置センサ165で前記ラック128に設けた検出片128bを検出することで、左可動体120の位置を検出可能に構成されている。なお、実施例では、左可動体120が待機位置に到来した際に、検出片128bが左可動体用原位置センサ165で検出されるよう設定される。   As shown in FIG. 39, a left movable body original position sensor 165 is disposed on the back surface of the external relay substrate 161, and the original position sensor 165 detects a detection piece 128b provided on the rack 128. The position of the left movable body 120 can be detected. In the embodiment, the detection piece 128b is set to be detected by the left movable body original position sensor 165 when the left movable body 120 arrives at the standby position.

(配線ガイドについて)
前記外部中継基板161の前側には、図40に示す如く、左可動体120の移動に伴って移動する中継用配線160が前側および外側方(左側方)に変位するのを規制する配線ガイド166が配設されている。この配線ガイド166は、逆略J字状に形成されて外部中継基板161と平行に延在する前壁部(規制部材)166aと、該前壁部166aにおける左および下側の端縁から後側に延在する外壁部166bとから構成されて、上端が前記外部中継用コネクタ受部162の下側に臨む位置で前壁部166aと外部中継基板161の前面との間に所要の空間を画成するように配設される(図38参照)。また配線ガイド166は、外部中継基板161の前側に取り付けた状態で、上方および右側方(空間部側)に開放して、前記可動基部122から引き出されている中継用配線160を外部中継基板161との間に収容可能に構成される。更に、配線ガイド166の前壁部166aは、図40に示す如く、前記左可動体120の待機位置において、前記可動基部122の下端から引き出されている中継用配線160の下端部の前側に臨むよう位置決めされて、該中継用配線160が前側に変位するのを規制し得るようになっている。そして、左可動体120が作動位置に臨む状態では、中継用配線160は、配線ガイド166の外壁部166bに略沿った状態となって、前側および左側(空間部131から離間する側)への変位を規制するよう構成される。
(About the wiring guide)
On the front side of the external relay substrate 161, as shown in FIG. 40, a wiring guide 166 that restricts displacement of the relay wiring 160 that moves in accordance with the movement of the left movable body 120 to the front side and the outer side (left side). Is arranged. The wiring guide 166 has a front wall portion (regulating member) 166a that is formed in an inverted substantially J-shape and extends in parallel with the external relay substrate 161, and a rear edge from the left and lower edges of the front wall portion 166a. And a required space between the front wall portion 166a and the front surface of the external relay board 161 at a position where the upper end faces the lower side of the external relay connector receiving portion 162. It arrange | positions so that it may define (refer FIG. 38). In addition, the wiring guide 166 is attached to the front side of the external relay board 161 and is opened upward and to the right side (space part side) so that the relay wiring 160 drawn from the movable base 122 is connected to the external relay board 161. It is comprised so that accommodation is possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 40, the front wall portion 166a of the wiring guide 166 faces the front side of the lower end portion of the relay wiring 160 drawn from the lower end of the movable base portion 122 at the standby position of the left movable body 120. Thus, the relay wiring 160 can be prevented from being displaced forward. When the left movable body 120 faces the operating position, the relay wiring 160 is substantially along the outer wall portion 166b of the wiring guide 166, and is directed to the front side and the left side (side away from the space portion 131). Configured to regulate displacement.

なお、前記配線ガイド166は、外壁部166bが前記集約コネクタ受部161bの配設位置より右側(可動基部122の移動領域側)に位置するよう配設され、該集約コネクタ受部161bに接続して外部中継基板161の前側を引き回される前記集約中継用配線164と前記中継用配線160とが干渉するのを該配線ガイド166によって防止するようになっている。   The wiring guide 166 is disposed so that the outer wall portion 166b is located on the right side (the moving region side of the movable base portion 122) from the position where the aggregate connector receiving portion 161b is disposed, and is connected to the aggregate connector receiving portion 161b. Thus, the wiring guide 166 prevents the aggregation relay wiring 164 routed around the front side of the external relay board 161 from interfering with the relay wiring 160.

(センサ設置部について)
前記駆動ユニット132の駆動用カバー部材133および外部中継基板161の前側には、図37,図38,図39または図40に示す如く、前記球通過ゲート36や装飾部材28におけるステージ部材29へのパチンコ球Wの球導入口30aに対する磁石による不正行為を検出する左側部磁気センサ167を配設するためのセンサ設置部168が配設されている。なお、左側部磁気センサ167は、前記左右の下磁気センサ73,75と同様に、略長方形状のケーシングの内部に、その長手方向に沿う方向に延在する一対のリード片の一部を接離可能に対向配置して構成されたリードスイッチであって、センサ設置部168に対してリード片の延在方向(ケーシングの長手方向)が上下方向となる縦向きで、かつ前記板部材18の裏面と平行となる姿勢で配設される。
(About sensor installation part)
As shown in FIG. 37, FIG. 38, FIG. 39, or FIG. 40, the driving cover member 133 of the driving unit 132 and the front side of the external relay substrate 161 are connected to the stage member 29 in the ball passage gate 36 and the decorative member 28. A sensor installation portion 168 for arranging a left side magnetic sensor 167 for detecting an illegal act by a magnet with respect to the ball introduction port 30a of the pachinko ball W is provided. The left side magnetic sensor 167, like the left and right lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75, contacts a part of a pair of lead pieces extending in a direction along the longitudinal direction inside a substantially rectangular casing. A reed switch configured so as to be detachably opposed to each other, wherein the extending direction of the lead piece (longitudinal direction of the casing) is a vertical direction with respect to the sensor installation portion 168, and the plate member 18 Arranged in a posture parallel to the back surface.

前記センサ設置部168は、正面視において上下方向に長手が延在する略矩形状で、前側に開口する略トレー状に形成されたものであって、図39または図44に示す如く、前記左対向面部(後壁)55cおよび駆動用カバー部材133の前面から前側に突出するよう設けられた複数の取付けボス(突出部)169の前端にネジ止めされて、該センサ設置部168の裏面と駆動用カバー部材133および外部中継基板161の前面との間に、前記第1駆動用配線163の引き回しを許容する空間を存して配設される。すなわち、センサ設置部168は、第1駆動用配線163が前方へ変位するのを規制する規制部材としても機能するよう構成される。   The sensor installation portion 168 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a longitudinal extension in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially tray shape opening to the front side. As shown in FIG. 39 or FIG. Screwed to the front ends of a plurality of mounting bosses (protrusions) 169 provided so as to project forward from the front surface of the opposing surface portion (rear wall) 55c and the driving cover member 133, the back surface of the sensor installation portion 168 and the drive Between the cover member 133 and the front surface of the external relay substrate 161, a space that allows the first drive wiring 163 to be routed exists. That is, the sensor installation unit 168 is configured to function also as a restricting member that restricts the first drive wiring 163 from being displaced forward.

前記センサ設置部168の前面にはセンサ保持部168aが形成され、該センサ保持部168aに前記左側部磁気センサ167が前述した縦向き姿勢で保持されるようになっている。センサ保持部168aに保持された左側部磁気センサ167は、前記球通過ゲート36の下方でかつ装飾部材28の球導入口30aの側方に位置して、その磁気検出可能範囲が球通過ゲート36および球導入口30aに及ぶ位置に臨むように、当該センサ設置部168の位置が設定してある。すなわち、実施例では、左側部磁気センサ167の磁気検出可能範囲は、遊技領域18aにおける装飾部材28の左側に位置する横部分を左右方向に横断する領域をカバーするようセンサ設置部168の位置が設定される。また、左側部磁気センサ167は前記統括制御装置59に接続され、該左側部磁気センサ167が磁気を検出した際には、統括制御装置59の制御下にランプやスピーカ等を用いた異常報知が行なわれるよう構成される。なお、左側部磁気センサ167から導出する配線(図示せず)は、前記裏ユニット19における左画壁部56cに設けた前記切欠部19bから裏側に引き出されて裏中継基板61を介して統括制御装置59に接続される。   A sensor holding portion 168a is formed on the front surface of the sensor installation portion 168, and the left magnetic sensor 167 is held in the above-described vertical orientation by the sensor holding portion 168a. The left side magnetic sensor 167 held by the sensor holding unit 168a is located below the ball passage gate 36 and to the side of the ball introduction port 30a of the decorative member 28, and its magnetic detection range is the ball passage gate 36. In addition, the position of the sensor installation portion 168 is set so as to face the position extending to the ball introduction port 30a. That is, in the embodiment, the magnetic detection range of the left side magnetic sensor 167 is such that the position of the sensor installation portion 168 covers the region that crosses the horizontal portion located on the left side of the decorative member 28 in the game region 18a in the left-right direction. Is set. The left side magnetic sensor 167 is connected to the overall control device 59. When the left side magnetic sensor 167 detects magnetism, an abnormality notification using a lamp, a speaker, or the like is performed under the control of the overall control device 59. Configured to be done. A wiring (not shown) derived from the left side magnetic sensor 167 is led out from the notch 19b provided in the left wall portion 56c of the back unit 19 to the back side, and is controlled through the back relay board 61. Connected to device 59.

前記センサ設置部168の右端部は、図44または図45に示す如く、前記左可動体120における可動基部122の左端部の前側を覆うように位置しており、該センサ設置部168における可動基部122の前側に非接触で重なる重なり部168bと前記左対向面部55cとの間を可動基部122が上下方向に往復移動するようになっている。センサ設置部168における重なり部168bの裏面は、その長手方向の全長に亘って左側から右側に向かうにつれて可動基部122から前側に退避するように傾斜している。また、センサ設置部168の重なり部168bと重なる可動基部122の左端前部には、後方に凹む凹部122bが長手方向(往復移動方向)に沿って形成され、センサ設置部168と可動基部122とが接触することなくできる限り可動基部122を前記板部材18の裏面に近接配置し得るよう構成される。   44 or 45, the right end portion of the sensor installation portion 168 is located so as to cover the front side of the left end portion of the movable base portion 122 in the left movable body 120, and the movable base portion in the sensor installation portion 168 is covered. The movable base 122 reciprocates in the vertical direction between the overlapping portion 168b that overlaps the front side of 122 in a non-contact manner and the left facing surface portion 55c. The back surface of the overlapping portion 168b in the sensor installation portion 168 is inclined so as to retreat from the movable base 122 to the front side from the left side to the right side over the entire length in the longitudinal direction. Further, a concave portion 122b that is recessed backward is formed along the longitudinal direction (reciprocating direction) at the front left end of the movable base portion 122 that overlaps the overlapping portion 168b of the sensor placement portion 168, and the sensor placement portion 168 and the movable base portion 122 The movable base 122 can be arranged as close to the back surface of the plate member 18 as possible without contact.

(右可動演出装置について)
前記裏ユニット19に配設された前記右可動演出装置106は、図18、図19〜図54に示すように、該裏ユニット19に取り付けられた右可動演出装置106の本体としての設置部材170と、該設置部材170に配設されて第1位置(図2、図49等参照)および第2位置(図51、図52参照)の間を往復移動可能な可動部材180と、当該設置部材170に配設されて駆動機構194を介して可動部材180に接続し、当該可動部材180を駆動する駆動手段としての駆動モータ178とから構成されている。ここで、前記駆動モータ178は、前記統括制御装置59に対して電気的に接続されており、該統括制御装置59からの制御信号に基づいて前記駆動モータ178が駆動制御されるよう構成され、図柄表示装置13の表示部に表示される図柄変動演出に関連付けた可動演出を前記可動部材180で行ない得るようになっている。
(About the right movable effect device)
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 to 54, the right movable effect device 106 disposed in the back unit 19 is an installation member 170 as a main body of the right movable effect device 106 attached to the back unit 19. A movable member 180 disposed on the installation member 170 and capable of reciprocating between a first position (see FIGS. 2, 49, etc.) and a second position (see FIGS. 51, 52), and the installation member A driving motor 178 is provided as a driving unit that is disposed in 170 and is connected to the movable member 180 via the driving mechanism 194 and drives the movable member 180. Here, the drive motor 178 is electrically connected to the overall control device 59, and is configured such that the drive motor 178 is driven and controlled based on a control signal from the overall control device 59, A movable effect associated with a symbol variation effect displayed on the display unit of the symbol display device 13 can be performed by the movable member 180.

前記設置部材170は、図18、図24、図52に示すように、前記裏ユニット19の対向面部55における開口部19aの右側部(対向面部における右対向面部55d、右上隅部および右下隅部の夫々)を略全面的に覆う形状に形成される。すなわち、前記対向面部55に配設された前記側部発光基板109および隅部発光基板110の前側を、前記右可動演出装置106の設置部材170が被覆している。ここで、前記設置部材170は、光透過性の合成樹脂材により形成されており、前記側部発光基板109および隅部発光基板110に配設された各LED109a,110aの光が設置部材170を透過して前方へ照射されるようになっている。すなわち、前記右可動演出装置106の設置部材170は、前記側部発光基板109および隅部発光基板110のカバー部材としての機能を備えている。   18, 24, and 52, the installation member 170 includes a right side portion of the opening 19 a in the facing surface portion 55 of the back unit 19 (a right facing surface portion 55 d in the facing surface portion, an upper right corner portion, and a lower right corner portion). Each of which is covered almost entirely. That is, the installation member 170 of the right movable effect device 106 covers the front side of the side light emitting substrate 109 and the corner light emitting substrate 110 disposed on the facing surface portion 55. Here, the installation member 170 is formed of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material, and the light of the LEDs 109a and 110a disposed on the side light-emitting substrate 109 and the corner light-emitting substrate 110 passes through the installation member 170. It passes through and is irradiated forward. That is, the installation member 170 of the right movable effect device 106 has a function as a cover member for the side light emitting substrate 109 and the corner light emitting substrate 110.

図53に示すように、前記設置部材170には、前記板部材18に配設した装飾部材28(より具体的には隅部光透過部33)と前後に重なる下部位置に、前方へ開口する支持孔171が形成されており、該支持孔171に対して前記可動部材180を枢支する第1の回転連結軸(回転軸)172が取り付けられている。また、前記設置部材170における前記支持孔171との対応位置には、該支持孔171より大径となる大径凹部171aが前方に開口するよう形成されており、前記可動部材180(後述の揺動可動体181)に形成された円筒状突部183が回転可能に挿入されるようになっている。そして、前記設置部材170における前記遊技盤17の板部材18と前後に重なる上部位置には、前後に貫通する軸挿通孔173が形成されており、駆動軸178a(図54参照)を設置部材170の前面側から挿通した状態で前記駆動モータ178が配設されている。そして、前記軸挿通孔173に挿通した駆動軸178aに駆動ギア179が取り付けられており、前記設置部材170の裏面側に枢支された従動ギア205が駆動ギア179に噛合するよう構成されている。   As shown in FIG. 53, the installation member 170 opens forward at a lower position overlapping with the decorative member 28 (more specifically, the corner light transmitting portion 33) disposed on the plate member 18 in the front-rear direction. A support hole 171 is formed, and a first rotation connecting shaft (rotation shaft) 172 that pivotally supports the movable member 180 is attached to the support hole 171. In addition, a large-diameter recess 171a having a larger diameter than the support hole 171 is formed at a position corresponding to the support hole 171 in the installation member 170, and the movable member 180 (a rocking member described later) is formed. A cylindrical protrusion 183 formed on the movable movable body 181) is rotatably inserted. A shaft insertion hole 173 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at an upper position of the installation member 170 that overlaps with the plate member 18 of the game board 17 in the front-rear direction, and the drive shaft 178 a (see FIG. 54) is provided. The drive motor 178 is disposed in a state of being inserted from the front side. A drive gear 179 is attached to the drive shaft 178 a inserted through the shaft insertion hole 173, and the driven gear 205 pivotally supported on the back side of the installation member 170 is configured to mesh with the drive gear 179. .

すなわち、前記設置部材170において前記板部材18と前後に重なる上部位置が、前記駆動モータ178を設置する駆動機構設置部とされ、該駆動機構設置部の下方が前記可動部材180を設置する可動部材設置部とされている。なお、前記設置部材170における駆動機構設置部の前面側には、右可動体用原位置センサ174が実装されたセンサ取付基板175が配設されており、該設置部材170に形成されたセンサ挿通孔107aを介して右可動体用原位置センサ174が駆動機構設置部の裏面側に臨むようになっている。   That is, the upper position of the installation member 170 that overlaps with the plate member 18 in the front-rear direction is a drive mechanism installation unit that installs the drive motor 178, and the lower part of the drive mechanism installation unit is a movable member that installs the movable member 180. It is an installation part. A sensor mounting board 175 on which the right movable body original position sensor 174 is mounted is disposed on the front side of the drive mechanism installation portion of the installation member 170, and the sensor insertion formed in the installation member 170 is inserted. The right movable body original position sensor 174 faces the back side of the drive mechanism installation portion through the hole 107a.

なお、図49〜図54における符号176は、前記設置部材170(可動部材設置部)の前面に取り付けられる装飾体176であって、装飾体176で設置部材170(可動部材設置部)の前面を部分的に覆うよう構成されている。そして、前記右可動演出装置106を裏ユニット19に配設した状態では、前記板部材18に配設した装飾部材28の窓口28aを介して、前記設置部材170の装飾体176が遊技盤17の前面に露出するよう構成されている(図2参照)。   49 to 54, reference numeral 176 denotes a decorative body 176 that is attached to the front surface of the installation member 170 (movable member installation portion). The decorative body 176 covers the front surface of the installation member 170 (movable member installation portion). It is configured to partially cover. In the state in which the right movable effect device 106 is disposed in the back unit 19, the decoration body 176 of the installation member 170 is attached to the game board 17 via the window 28 a of the decoration member 28 disposed on the plate member 18. It is configured to be exposed on the front surface (see FIG. 2).

(可動部材について)
前記可動部材180は、図49〜図54に示すように、前記設置部材170(可動部材設置部)に対して揺動可能に支持される揺動可動体181と、該揺動可動体181に対して揺動可動に支持される装飾可動体185とから構成されている。そして、前記揺動可動体181に対して駆動モータ178が駆動機構194を介して接続されており、該駆動モータ178の駆動に伴って揺動可動体181が揺動する(設置部材170に対して姿勢変化する)と共に、装飾可動体185の自重により揺動可動体181に対する該装飾可動体185の姿勢が相対的に変化するようになっている。
(About movable members)
49 to 54, the movable member 180 includes a swing movable body 181 that is swingably supported with respect to the installation member 170 (movable member installation portion), and the swing movable body 181. On the other hand, it is comprised from the decoration movable body 185 supported so that rocking | fluctuation movement is possible. A drive motor 178 is connected to the swing movable body 181 via a drive mechanism 194, and the swing movable body 181 swings as the drive motor 178 is driven (with respect to the installation member 170). The posture of the decorative movable body 185 is changed relative to the swing movable body 181 by the weight of the decorative movable body 185.

(揺動可動体について)
前記揺動可動体181は、棒形状に形成された長尺な部材であって、前後に貫通する軸孔182a,182bが両端部に形成されている。そして、揺動可動体181の一方の軸孔182a(図53、図54における下端部側の軸孔)に挿通した前記第1の回転連結軸172を前記設置部材170の支持孔171に固定することで、揺動可動体181が設置部材170に対して揺動可能に支持されている。ここで、前記揺動可動体181の下端部には、左方向へ突出する突出部181aが形成されており、前記第1の回転連結軸172を挿通する軸孔182aを突出部181aに形成してある。また、前記揺動可動体181の他方の軸孔182b(図53、図54における上端部側の軸孔)には、前記装飾可動体185に設けられた支持軸190(後述)を介して装飾可動体185が揺動可動体181に揺動可能に支持されている。なお、以下の説明では、前記設置部材170に対して支持される軸孔を下側軸孔182aと指称し、前記装飾可動体185を支持する軸孔を上側軸孔182bと指称するものとする。
(About swinging movable body)
The swingable movable body 181 is a long member formed in a rod shape, and shaft holes 182a and 182b penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at both ends. Then, the first rotation connecting shaft 172 inserted into one shaft hole 182a (the shaft hole on the lower end side in FIGS. 53 and 54) of the swingable movable body 181 is fixed to the support hole 171 of the installation member 170. Thus, the swing movable body 181 is supported so as to be swingable with respect to the installation member 170. Here, a projecting portion 181a projecting leftward is formed at the lower end of the swingable movable body 181, and a shaft hole 182a through which the first rotary connecting shaft 172 is inserted is formed in the projecting portion 181a. It is. Further, the other shaft hole 182b (the shaft hole on the upper end side in FIGS. 53 and 54) of the swing movable body 181 is decorated via a support shaft 190 (described later) provided on the decor movable body 185. The movable body 185 is supported by the swing movable body 181 so as to be swingable. In the following description, the shaft hole supported with respect to the installation member 170 is referred to as a lower shaft hole 182a, and the shaft hole that supports the decorative movable body 185 is referred to as an upper shaft hole 182b. .

図53、図54に示すように、前記揺動可動体181の突出部181aには、後方に突出する円筒状突部183が形成されて、該円筒状突部183を前記下側軸孔182aが貫通して後方に開口しており、該下側軸孔182aに挿通された前記第1の回転連結軸172が円筒状突部183に挿通したもとで前記支持孔171に固定されている。この円筒状突部183は、前記設置部材170に形成された大径凹部171aに挿入され、可動部材180の荷重を支持し得るようになっている。また、前記揺動可動体181には、図53、図54、図56に示すように、前記上側軸孔182bの下方位置に、前方に突出する位置規制突部184(突部)が形成されており、前記装飾可動体185に形成された位置規制凹部191(後述)に対して位置規制突部184が遊嵌されるようになっている。   As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the projecting portion 181a of the swingable movable body 181 is formed with a cylindrical projecting portion 183 projecting rearward, and the cylindrical projecting portion 183 is connected to the lower shaft hole 182a. Penetrates through the lower shaft hole 182a and is fixed to the support hole 171 while the first rotary connecting shaft 172 is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 183. . The cylindrical protrusion 183 is inserted into a large-diameter recess 171 a formed in the installation member 170 so that the load of the movable member 180 can be supported. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53, 54, and 56, the swing movable body 181 is formed with a position restricting protrusion 184 (protrusion) protruding forward at a position below the upper shaft hole 182b. The position restricting protrusion 184 is loosely fitted to a position restricting recess 191 (described later) formed in the decorative movable body 185.

前記揺動可動体181には、上下の軸孔182a,182bの間(すなわち第1の回転連結軸172から偏倚した位置)に、後方に開口する軸孔182c(以下中間軸孔という)が形成されており(図54参照)、該中間軸孔182cに対して前記駆動機構194を構成する作動杆200(後述)が第2の回転連結軸202を介して回転可能に支持されている。すなわち、前記駆動モータ178の駆動により作動杆200が変位することで、前記揺動可動体181が第1の回転連結軸172を中心として揺動される。ここで、前記揺動可動体181は、後述のように、前記第1の回転連結軸172を中心に略直立するよう上方に延在した第1位置(図49等参照)と、該第1位置に対して左方向(裏ユニット19の開口部19a側)に傾倒した第2位置(図50等参照)との間を揺動し得るよう前記駆動機構194(作動杆200)に支持される。また、前記中間軸孔182cは、前記揺動可動体181の中間位置よりも第1の回転連結軸172から離間するよう偏倚して設けられ、前記作動杆200を介して揺動可動体181を揺動する際に駆動モータ178に掛る負荷を軽減するようになっている。   A shaft hole 182c (hereinafter referred to as an intermediate shaft hole) that opens rearward is formed in the swingable movable body 181 between the upper and lower shaft holes 182a and 182b (that is, a position deviated from the first rotary connecting shaft 172). 54 (see FIG. 54), an operating rod 200 (described later) constituting the drive mechanism 194 is rotatably supported by the intermediate shaft hole 182c via the second rotary connecting shaft 202. In other words, when the operating rod 200 is displaced by the drive motor 178, the swing movable body 181 is swung around the first rotation connecting shaft 172. Here, as will be described later, the swing movable body 181 has a first position (see FIG. 49 and the like) extending upward so as to be substantially upright about the first rotation connecting shaft 172, and the first It is supported by the drive mechanism 194 (operating rod 200) so as to be able to swing between a second position (see FIG. 50, etc.) tilted leftward with respect to the position (opening 19a side of the back unit 19). . The intermediate shaft hole 182c is provided so as to be offset from the first rotary connecting shaft 172 with respect to the intermediate position of the swing movable body 181, and the swing movable body 181 is provided via the operating rod 200. The load applied to the drive motor 178 when swinging is reduced.

なお、以下の説明では、前記第1位置から第2位置に向けての前記揺動可動体181の揺動方向(図49、図50等に示す状態で第1の回転連結軸172を中心とした左回転方向)を傾倒方向と指称し、第2位置から第1位置に向けての揺動可動体181の揺動方向(図49、図50等に示す状態で第1の回転連結軸172を中心とした右回転方向)を起立方向と指称するものとする。   In the following description, the swinging direction of the swingable movable body 181 from the first position to the second position (centered on the first rotary connecting shaft 172 in the state shown in FIGS. 49, 50, etc.). The left rotation direction) is referred to as the tilting direction, and the swinging direction of the swinging movable body 181 from the second position toward the first position (in the state shown in FIGS. 49, 50, etc.) The direction of right rotation around the center is called the standing direction.

図55に示すように、前記揺動可動体181が第1位置にある状態では、前記第1の回転連結軸172を通る鉛直線L1に対して左側に僅かに傾倒した姿勢で揺動可動体181が保持されており、前記第1の回転連結軸172を通る鉛直線L1よりも左側(すなわち鉛直線L1よりも揺動可動体181の傾倒方向の前側)に前記装飾可動体185を支持する上側軸孔182bが位置するようになっている。すなわち、前記第1位置に保持した状態では、前記可動部材180の全体の重心が前記第1の回転連結軸172を通る鉛直線L1よりも傾倒方向の前側に位置して、常には可動部材180が自重により傾倒方向に揺動するよう付勢される。   As shown in FIG. 55, in the state where the swing movable body 181 is in the first position, the swing movable body is slightly tilted to the left with respect to the vertical line L1 passing through the first rotation connecting shaft 172. 181 is held, and the decorative movable body 185 is supported on the left side of the vertical line L1 passing through the first rotation connecting shaft 172 (that is, on the front side in the tilting direction of the swing movable body 181 with respect to the vertical line L1). The upper shaft hole 182b is positioned. That is, in the state where the movable member 180 is held at the first position, the entire center of gravity of the movable member 180 is positioned on the front side in the tilt direction with respect to the vertical line L1 passing through the first rotation connecting shaft 172, and is always movable member 180. Is urged to swing in the tilting direction by its own weight.

(装飾可動体について)
前記装飾可動体185は、図53、図54、図56に示すように、前記揺動可動体181に支持される基部186に対して、各種の飾り部材187が取り付けられると共に、複数の小型可動体188が揺動可能に取り付けられている。なお、前記各小型可動体188は鈴を模した形態に形成されて、装飾可動体185の全体が鈴を集合した大型の鈴状装飾部材とされている。前記基部186の上端部には、後方に開口するよう形成された軸孔189に対して支持軸(第2の回転軸)190が取り付けられており、前記揺動可動体181の上側軸孔182bに対して該支持軸190を前側から挿通することで、該揺動可動体181に対して装飾可動体185が揺動可能に支持されている。ここで、前記揺動可動体181が第1位置にある状態では、前記装飾可動体185の略全体が前記設置部材170(可動部材設置部)の前面側に位置し、前記装飾部材28に形成された窓口28aの右側部に露出し、揺動可動体181が第2位置にある状態では、装飾可動体185の全体が裏ユニット19の開口部19aに臨んで前記図柄表示装置13の表示部の前側に位置するようになっている(図52参照)。すなわち、前記右可動演出装置106は、揺動可動体181が第1および第2位置の何れにある状態でも装飾部材28の窓口28aを介して前記装飾可動体185を遊技盤17の前側から視認し得るよう構成されている。
(About decorative movable bodies)
As shown in FIGS. 53, 54, and 56, the decorative movable body 185 has various decorative members 187 attached to a base 186 supported by the swing movable body 181 and a plurality of small movable members. A body 188 is pivotably attached. Each of the small movable bodies 188 is formed in a shape simulating a bell, and the entire decorative movable body 185 is a large bell-shaped decorative member in which the bells are assembled. A support shaft (second rotation shaft) 190 is attached to an upper end portion of the base portion 186 with respect to a shaft hole 189 formed to open rearward, and an upper shaft hole 182b of the swing movable body 181. On the other hand, the decorative movable body 185 is swingably supported with respect to the swing movable body 181 by inserting the support shaft 190 from the front side. Here, in a state where the swingable movable body 181 is in the first position, substantially the entire decorative movable body 185 is located on the front side of the installation member 170 (movable member installation portion) and is formed on the decorative member 28. When the swing movable body 181 is exposed to the right side of the counter 28a and the swing movable body 181 is in the second position, the entire decorative movable body 185 faces the opening 19a of the back unit 19 and the display section of the symbol display device 13 (See FIG. 52). In other words, the right movable effect device 106 can visually recognize the decorative movable body 185 from the front side of the game board 17 through the window 28a of the decorative member 28 even when the swing movable body 181 is in either the first or second position. It is configured to be able to.

また、図54、図56に示すように、前記基部186における前記軸孔189の下方位置には、前記揺動可動体181に形成された前記位置規制突部184と対応する位置に、後方へ開口する位置規制凹部191(凹部)が形成されている。そして、装飾可動体185を揺動可動体181に取り付けた状態で、位置規制突部184が位置規制凹部191に遊嵌されるようになっている。ここで、前記位置規制凹部191は、前記支持軸190を中心とした装飾可動体185の揺動方向に所定長さ延在するよう形成されており、該位置規制凹部191の内部で位置規制突部184が相対的に移動可能に構成される。従って、前記装飾可動体185は、前記位置規制突部184が位置規制凹部191の内部で移動可能な範囲で、前記揺動可動体181の揺動に伴って自重により揺動可動体181に対して揺動し得るよう構成されて、該位置規制凹部191における装飾可動体185の揺動方向の縁部に位置規制突部184が係合(当接)することで、揺動可動体181に対する装飾可動体185の揺動が規制されるようになっている。すなわち前記位置規制突部184および位置規制凹部191の夫々が、相互の係合により揺動可動体181に対する装飾可動体185の揺動範囲を規制する係合手段として機能する。   Further, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 56, the position below the shaft hole 189 in the base 186 is rearward at a position corresponding to the position restricting protrusion 184 formed in the swing movable body 181. An open position restricting recess 191 (recess) is formed. The position restricting protrusion 184 is loosely fitted into the position restricting recess 191 with the decorative movable body 185 attached to the swing movable body 181. Here, the position restricting recess 191 is formed to extend a predetermined length in the swinging direction of the decorative movable body 185 with the support shaft 190 as the center, and the position restricting recess 191 is positioned inside the position restricting recess 191. The part 184 is configured to be relatively movable. Therefore, the decorative movable body 185 is within a range in which the position restricting protrusion 184 can move within the position restricting recess 191 with respect to the swing movable body 181 due to its own weight as the swing movable body 181 swings. The position restricting protrusion 184 engages (contacts) with the edge of the position restricting recess 191 in the swing direction of the decorative movable body 185, so that the position restricting protrusion 184 is engaged with the swing movable body 181. The swing of the decorative movable body 185 is restricted. That is, each of the position restricting protrusion 184 and the position restricting recess 191 functions as an engaging means for restricting the swing range of the decorative movable body 185 relative to the swing movable body 181 by mutual engagement.

ここで、前記揺動可動体181が第1位置にある状態では、前記位置規制突部184が位置規制凹部191における裏ユニット19の開口部19a側の縁部(図58では右側縁部)に係合(当接)するよう構成されて、該揺動可動体181の起立方向(図58では支持軸190を中心とした装飾可動体185の右回転方向)への装飾可動体185の揺動を規制するようになっている。すなわち、前記揺動可動体181を起立方向へ揺動して第1位置で停止した際に、装飾可動体185が慣性により揺動して前記装飾部材28や裏ユニット19の右画壁部56dに接触するのを防止している。同様に、前記揺動可動体181が第2位置にある状態では、前記位置規制突部184が位置規制凹部191における裏ユニット19の右画壁部56d側の縁部(図59では左側縁部)に係合(当接)するよう構成され、該揺動可動体181の傾倒方向(図59では支持軸190を中心とした装飾可動体185の左回転方向)への装飾可動体185の揺動を規制している。これにより、前記揺動可動体181を傾倒方向に揺動して第2位置で停止した際に、装飾可動体185が慣性により揺動して前記左可動演出装置105に接触するのを防止している。このように、実施例に係る装飾可動体185は、前記揺動可動体181に対して自由回転可能に支持したもとで、前記位置規制突部184と位置規制凹部191との係合関係により装飾可動体185が揺動可動体181に対して一定範囲で姿勢変位し得るよう構成されている。   Here, in a state where the swing movable body 181 is in the first position, the position restricting protrusion 184 is located on the edge of the position restricting recess 191 on the opening 19a side of the back unit 19 (the right edge in FIG. 58). The decorative movable body 185 is configured to engage (abut), and the decorative movable body 185 swings in the standing direction (in FIG. 58, the decorative movable body 185 rotates in the right direction around the support shaft 190). Is to regulate. That is, when the swingable movable body 181 swings in the standing direction and stops at the first position, the decorative movable body 185 swings due to inertia and the right wall portion 56d of the decorative member 28 or the back unit 19 is provided. To prevent contact. Similarly, in a state where the swing movable body 181 is in the second position, the position restricting protrusion 184 is an edge of the position restricting recess 191 on the right wall portion 56d side of the rear unit 19 (the left edge in FIG. 59). ), And the movable movable body 185 swings in the tilting direction of the rocking movable body 181 (in FIG. 59, the decorative movable body 185 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 190). Is restricted. This prevents the decorative movable body 185 from swinging due to inertia and contacting the left movable effect device 105 when the swingable movable body 181 is swung in the tilting direction and stopped at the second position. ing. In this way, the decorative movable body 185 according to the embodiment is supported by the swing movable body 181 so as to be freely rotatable, and the engagement relationship between the position restricting protrusion 184 and the position restricting recess 191 is achieved. The decorative movable body 185 can be displaced in a certain range with respect to the swing movable body 181.

(駆動機構について)
次に、前記可動部材180と駆動モータ178とを接続する駆動機構194について説明する。前記駆動機構194は、図53、図54、図57に示すように、前記設置部材170(駆動機構設置部)の裏面側に支軸195aを介して回転可能に配設された円板状のカム板(回転板)195と、該カム板195(具体的には後述の連繋軸197)に対して回転可能に支持されると共に前記可動部材180(揺動可動体181)に対して回転可能に支持された作動杆200とから構成されている。前記カム板195は、外周面にギア部196が形成されると共に、前記軸挿通孔173の下方位置に軸支されており、カム板195のギア部196に前記従動ギア205が噛合するようになっている。すなわち、前記カム板195は、前記従動ギア205を介して駆動モータ178に接続されて、該駆動モータ178の駆動により支軸195aを中心に正逆回転されるようになっている。なお、従動ギア205を介してカム板195を駆動モータ178に接続するようにしたが、カム板195のギア部196に駆動モータ178の駆動ギア179を噛合する構成としてもよい。
(About drive mechanism)
Next, the drive mechanism 194 that connects the movable member 180 and the drive motor 178 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 53, 54, and 57, the drive mechanism 194 is a disc-like member that is rotatably disposed via a support shaft 195a on the back surface side of the installation member 170 (drive mechanism installation portion). A cam plate (rotary plate) 195 and a cam plate 195 (specifically, a connecting shaft 197 described later) are rotatably supported and rotatable relative to the movable member 180 (oscillating movable body 181). It is comprised from the operating rod 200 supported by. The cam plate 195 is formed with a gear portion 196 on the outer peripheral surface and is pivotally supported at a position below the shaft insertion hole 173 so that the driven gear 205 meshes with the gear portion 196 of the cam plate 195. It has become. That is, the cam plate 195 is connected to the drive motor 178 via the driven gear 205, and is rotated forward and backward about the support shaft 195a by the drive of the drive motor 178. Although the cam plate 195 is connected to the drive motor 178 via the driven gear 205, the drive gear 179 of the drive motor 178 may be engaged with the gear portion 196 of the cam plate 195.

また、前記カム板195には、図53、図54、図57に示すように、該カム板195の回転中心点から偏心した位置(具体的にはカム板195の外周縁部)に、前方に突出する連繋軸(第3の回転軸)197が形成されている。前記カム板195の連繋軸197は、前記設置部材170(駆動機構設置部)に形成された前後に貫通する円弧状の案内孔177(以下円弧状案内孔という)に後方から挿通されて、該設置部材170(駆動機構設置部)の前面側に突出するよう構成されており、当該設置部材170(駆動機構設置部)の前面に突出する連繋軸197に対して前記作動杆200が回転可能に枢支されている。   Further, as shown in FIGS. 53, 54, and 57, the cam plate 195 has a position that is eccentric from the rotation center point of the cam plate 195 (specifically, the outer peripheral edge of the cam plate 195), A connecting shaft (third rotating shaft) 197 is formed so as to protrude from the top. The connecting shaft 197 of the cam plate 195 is inserted from behind into an arcuate guide hole 177 (hereinafter referred to as an arcuate guide hole) penetrating in the front-rear direction formed in the installation member 170 (drive mechanism installation portion), The operating rod 200 is configured to protrude to the front side of the installation member 170 (drive mechanism installation portion), and the operating rod 200 is rotatable with respect to the connecting shaft 197 protruding to the front surface of the installation member 170 (drive mechanism installation portion). It is pivotally supported.

図53,図54に示すように、前記作動杆200は、棒形状に形成されると共に、該作動杆200の両端部に前後に貫通する軸孔201a,201bが形成されている。そして、前記カム板195の連繋軸197が前記作動杆200の一方の軸孔201aに挿通されて、該作動杆200がカム板195に対して回転可能に支持されると共に、作動杆200の他方の軸孔201bに挿通された第2の回転連結軸202を前記揺動可動体181の中間軸孔182cに固定することで、該揺動可動体181に対して作動杆200が回転可能に支持されている。   As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the operating rod 200 is formed in a rod shape, and shaft holes 201a and 201b penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at both ends of the operating rod 200. The connecting shaft 197 of the cam plate 195 is inserted into one shaft hole 201a of the operating rod 200, and the operating rod 200 is rotatably supported with respect to the cam plate 195. The second rotary connecting shaft 202 inserted through the shaft hole 201b is fixed to the intermediate shaft hole 182c of the swing movable body 181 so that the operating rod 200 is rotatably supported by the swing movable body 181. Has been.

すなわち、前記カム板195の回転により前記連繋軸197が下方移動して作動杆200が引き下げられることで、揺動可動体181が第1の回転連結軸172を中心に第2位置に向けて揺動し(図58参照)、反対に連繋軸197が上方移動して前記作動杆200が引き上げられることで、前記揺動可動体181が第1の回転連結軸172を中心に第1位置に向けて揺動する(図59参照)。なお、図58中の矢印は、揺動可動体181を第1位置から第2位置に移動する際のカム板195の回転方向を示し、図59中の矢印は、揺動可動体181を第2位置から第1位置に移動する際のカム板195の回転方向を示す。また、前記カム板195には、外周縁部に前方へ突出する原位置検出片198が設けられており(図50、図53、図57参照)、前記揺動可動体181が第1位置にある状態で前記設置部材170に設けられた右可動体用原位置センサ174が位置検出片198を検出するよう構成される。   That is, the connecting shaft 197 is moved downward by the rotation of the cam plate 195 and the operating rod 200 is pulled down, so that the swing movable body 181 swings toward the second position around the first rotation connecting shaft 172. On the contrary, the connecting shaft 197 moves upward and the operating rod 200 is pulled up, so that the swing movable body 181 is directed to the first position around the first rotation connecting shaft 172. (See FIG. 59). 58 indicates the rotation direction of the cam plate 195 when the swing movable body 181 is moved from the first position to the second position, and the arrow in FIG. 59 indicates the swing movable body 181 as the first position. The rotation direction of the cam plate 195 when moving from the second position to the first position is shown. Further, the cam plate 195 is provided with an original position detecting piece 198 projecting forward at the outer peripheral edge (see FIGS. 50, 53, and 57), and the swingable movable body 181 is at the first position. In a state, the right movable body original position sensor 174 provided on the installation member 170 is configured to detect the position detection piece 198.

(揺動可動体と連繋軸との関係について)
前記揺動可動体181の揺動位置と前記カム板195の連繋軸197との関係につき具体的に説明する。前記円弧状案内孔177は、図49〜図53に示すように、前記カム板195の回転中心の上方位置から右側方を通って回転中心の下方位置に至る円弧形状に形成されている。すなわち、前記第1位置にある状態では前記連繋軸197が円弧状案内孔177の上端部側に位置(カム板195の回転中心(支軸195a)よりも第2の回転連結軸202から離間位置)し、揺動可動体181を第2位置へ向けて揺動するに際しては、前記連繋軸197を円弧状案内孔177に沿って移動させるよう前記カム板195が回転(図49では右回転方向。また図58では左回転方向となる)される。同様に、前記第2位置にある状態では前記連繋軸197が円弧状案内孔177の下端部側に位置(カム板195の回転中心(支軸195a)よりも第2の回転連結軸202に近接位置)し、揺動可動体181を第1位置へ向けて揺動するに際しては、前記連繋軸197を円弧状案内孔177に沿って移動させるよう前記カム板195が回転(図50では左回転方向。また図59では右回転方向となる)されるようになっている。
(Relationship between oscillating movable body and connecting shaft)
The relationship between the swing position of the swing movable body 181 and the connecting shaft 197 of the cam plate 195 will be specifically described. As shown in FIGS. 49 to 53, the arcuate guide hole 177 is formed in an arc shape extending from the upper position of the rotation center of the cam plate 195 to the lower position of the rotation center through the right side. In other words, in the state of being in the first position, the connecting shaft 197 is positioned on the upper end side of the arcuate guide hole 177 (a position farther from the second rotation connecting shaft 202 than the rotation center (support shaft 195a) of the cam plate 195). When the swing movable body 181 swings toward the second position, the cam plate 195 rotates so as to move the connecting shaft 197 along the arcuate guide hole 177 (in FIG. 49, in the clockwise direction). In FIG. 58, the rotation direction is counterclockwise. Similarly, in the state where it is in the second position, the connecting shaft 197 is positioned closer to the lower end side of the arcuate guide hole 177 (closer to the second rotary connecting shaft 202 than the rotation center (support shaft 195a) of the cam plate 195). When the swing movable body 181 swings toward the first position, the cam plate 195 rotates (moves counterclockwise in FIG. 50) so as to move the connecting shaft 197 along the arcuate guide hole 177. (In FIG. 59, the direction is the right rotation direction).

ここで、図58に示すように、前記揺動可動体181が第1位置にある(連繋軸197が円弧状案内孔177の上端部側に位置する)状態では、該揺動可動体181に対する作動杆200の枢支点(第2の回転連結軸202)と、前記カム板195の回転中心点(支軸195a)とを通る直線L2に対して、揺動可動体181を第2位置から第1位置(起立方向)へ揺動する際の前記カム板195の回転方向(図58では右回転方向)に前記連繋軸197が偏って位置するよう構成されると共に、この状態で連繋軸197が円弧状案内孔177の端部に当接するようになっている(図49、図58参照)。換言すると、第1位置にある状態での連繋軸197は、第1位置から第2位置に揺動可動体181が揺動する際の回転方向(図58における右回転方向)の後方側の端部が前記設置部材170(機構設置部)に当接している。すなわち、実施例に係る右可動演出装置106では、前記第1位置にある状態において前記駆動モータ178を駆動することなく揺動可動体181を第1位置から第2位置に向けて揺動させる力が作用した場合に、前記作動杆200を介して連繋軸197が円弧状案内孔177の端部に押しつけられる方向に前記カム板195を回転する力が働くよう構成されて、円弧状案内孔177の端部と連繋軸197との当接によりカム板195の回転を規制している。   Here, as shown in FIG. 58, in a state where the swing movable body 181 is in the first position (the connecting shaft 197 is positioned on the upper end side of the arcuate guide hole 177), The swingable movable body 181 is moved from the second position to the straight line L2 passing through the pivot point (second rotation connecting shaft 202) of the operating rod 200 and the rotation center point (support shaft 195a) of the cam plate 195 from the second position. The connecting shaft 197 is configured to be biased in the rotational direction of the cam plate 195 (rightward rotating direction in FIG. 58) when swinging to one position (standing direction), and in this state, the connecting shaft 197 is It contacts the end of the arcuate guide hole 177 (see FIGS. 49 and 58). In other words, the connecting shaft 197 in the state of the first position is the rear end in the rotation direction (right rotation direction in FIG. 58) when the swing movable body 181 swings from the first position to the second position. The portion is in contact with the installation member 170 (mechanism installation portion). That is, in the right movable effect device 106 according to the embodiment, the force for swinging the swing movable body 181 from the first position toward the second position without driving the drive motor 178 in the state at the first position. Is configured so that a force for rotating the cam plate 195 acts in a direction in which the connecting shaft 197 is pressed against the end of the arcuate guide hole 177 via the operating rod 200. The rotation of the cam plate 195 is restricted by contact between the end of the cam plate 195 and the connecting shaft 197.

また、図59に示すように、前記揺動可動体181が第2位置にある(連繋軸197が円弧状案内孔177の下端部側に位置する)状態では、該揺動可動体181に対する作動杆200の枢支点(第2の回転連結軸202)と、前記カム板195の回転中心点(支軸195a)とを通る直線L2に対して、揺動可動体181を第2位置から第1位置(起立方向)へ揺動する際の前記カム板195の回転方向前側(図59では左回転方向)に前記連繋軸197が偏って位置するよう構成されると共に、この状態で連繋軸197が円弧状案内孔177の端部に当接するようになっている(図50、図59参照)。換言すると、第2位置にある状態での連繋軸197は、第1位置から第2位置に揺動可動体181が揺動する際の回転方向(図59では右回転方向)の前方側の端部が前記設置部材170(機構設置部)に当接している。すなわち、実施例に係る右可動演出装置106では、前記第2位置にある状態において前記駆動モータ178を駆動することなく揺動可動体181を第2位置から第1位置に向けて揺動させる力が作用した場合に、前記作動杆200を介して連繋軸197が円弧状案内孔177に沿って移動するよう前記カム板195を回転する力が働くよう構成されて、カム板195の回転を許容している。   As shown in FIG. 59, when the swing movable body 181 is in the second position (the connecting shaft 197 is positioned on the lower end side of the arcuate guide hole 177), the operation with respect to the swing movable body 181 is performed. The swing movable body 181 is moved from the second position to the first position with respect to a straight line L2 passing through the pivot point (second rotary connecting shaft 202) of the rod 200 and the rotation center point (support shaft 195a) of the cam plate 195. The connecting shaft 197 is configured to be biased to the front side in the rotational direction of the cam plate 195 when swinging to the position (standing direction) (left rotational direction in FIG. 59), and the connecting shaft 197 is in this state. It contacts the end of the arcuate guide hole 177 (see FIGS. 50 and 59). In other words, the connecting shaft 197 in the second position is the front end of the rotation direction (right rotation direction in FIG. 59) when the swing movable body 181 swings from the first position to the second position. The portion is in contact with the installation member 170 (mechanism installation portion). That is, in the right movable effect device 106 according to the embodiment, the force for swinging the swing movable body 181 from the second position toward the first position without driving the drive motor 178 in the state at the second position. Is configured such that a force that rotates the cam plate 195 acts so that the connecting shaft 197 moves along the arcuate guide hole 177 via the operating rod 200, and the cam plate 195 is allowed to rotate. doing.

〔実施例の作用〕
次に、前述した実施例に係るパチンコ機の作用につき説明する。
(Effects of Example)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described.

前記遊技領域18aに打ち出されたパチンコ球Wは、前記装飾部材28の遊技領域18aを、複数の遊技釘に当たることによって不規則な流路を流下する。そして、遊技領域18aを流下するパチンコ球Wが装飾部材28の前記球導入口30aから球導入部30に通入すると、該パチンコ球Wは前記ステージ部29に通出され、該ステージ部29の転動面29aを左右に転動した後に遊技領域18aに排出され、このパチンコ球Wは始動入賞装置24の上側の始動入賞口24aや左右の普通入賞口27b,34に入賞可能となる。   The pachinko ball W launched into the game area 18a flows down the irregular flow path by hitting the game area 18a of the decorative member 28 with a plurality of game nails. Then, when the pachinko ball W flowing down the game area 18 a passes through the ball introduction port 30 from the ball introduction port 30 a of the decorative member 28, the pachinko ball W passes through the stage unit 29, and the stage unit 29 After rolling the rolling surface 29a to the left and right, it is discharged to the game area 18a, and this pachinko ball W can be awarded to the start winning port 24a on the upper side of the start winning device 24 and the left and right normal winning ports 27b and 34.

(装飾部材の球通路の作用について)
前記ステージ部29の転動面29aを左右に転動するパチンコ球Wは、転動する勢いによっては、該転動面29aにおける凸形状部分の頂部に対応する上方位置で開口する前記球入口45aを介してステージ部29の裏側の導入路45に通入する場合がある。導入路45に通入したパチンコ球Wは、図15,図16等に示す如く、ステージ部29の下方において前後方向に延在する球通路46に通入し、前記始動入賞装置24の上側で開口する前記球出口46aから遊技領域18aに排出される。球通路46には、図14に示すように、3条のリブ47,48,49が、中央下端に位置するように第1リブ47が設けられると共に、該第1リブ47を挟む左右位置に位置するように第2リブ48,49が設けられ、かつ左右の第2リブ48,49の離間間隔R1がパチンコ球Wの直径Rより大きく設定されている。従って、前記導入路45から球通路46に通入したパチンコ球Wは、図17(a)または(b)に示す如く、第1リブ47と左第2リブ48または第1リブ47と右第2リブ49の2点で支持された状態で球出口46aに向けて案内される。
(About the action of the ball passage of the decorative member)
The pachinko ball W that rolls left and right on the rolling surface 29a of the stage part 29 opens at the upper position corresponding to the top of the convex portion of the rolling surface 29a depending on the rolling momentum. May pass through the introduction path 45 on the back side of the stage unit 29. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the pachinko ball W that has entered the introduction path 45 passes through a ball passage 46 that extends in the front-rear direction below the stage portion 29, and above the start winning device 24. The ball exit 46a that opens is discharged to the game area 18a. As shown in FIG. 14, the ball passage 46 is provided with a first rib 47 so that three ribs 47, 48, 49 are located at the lower end of the center, and at the left and right positions sandwiching the first rib 47. The second ribs 48 and 49 are provided so as to be positioned, and the spacing R1 between the left and right second ribs 48 and 49 is set to be larger than the diameter R of the pachinko ball W. Accordingly, the pachinko ball W that has passed through the introduction passage 45 into the ball passage 46 has the first rib 47 and the left second rib 48 or the first rib 47 and the right second as shown in FIG. 17 (a) or (b). The two ribs 49 are guided toward the ball outlet 46a while being supported at two points.

すなわち、球通路46内を流下するパチンコWは、第1リブ47と左第2リブ48とで支持されて流下する状態、または第1リブ47と右第2リブ49とで支持されて流下する状態がランダムに生ずる。従って、3条のリブ47,48,49に対して球通路46に流入したパチンコ球Wが接触する部位が分散され、各リブ47,48,49の摩耗を軽減することができ、該パチンコ球Wの安定した誘導が長期に亘って達成される。また、図17(a)に示す如く、パチンコ球Wが第1リブ47と左第2リブ48とで支持されて球通路46を左側に偏って流下する状態と、図17(b)に示す如く、パチンコ球Wが第1リブ47と右第2リブ49とで支持されて球通路46を右側に偏って流下する状態とでは、第1リブ47に対するパチンコ球Wの接触部位も変化する。すなわち、球通路46を流下するパチンコ球Wが常に接触する第1リブ47においても、その接触部位は左右に変化して常に同じ位置が接触するものではないから、当該第1リブ47での偏摩耗を抑制でき、パチンコ球Wの安定した誘導を長期に亘って維持し得る。   That is, the pachinko W flowing down in the ball passage 46 is supported by the first rib 47 and the left second rib 48 or flows down while being supported by the first rib 47 and the right second rib 49. A state occurs randomly. Accordingly, the portions where the pachinko balls W that have flowed into the ball passage 46 come into contact with the three ribs 47, 48, 49 are dispersed, and wear of the ribs 47, 48, 49 can be reduced. A stable induction of W is achieved over a long period of time. Further, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), the pachinko ball W is supported by the first rib 47 and the left second rib 48 and flows down the ball passage 46 to the left side, as shown in FIG. 17 (b). As described above, when the pachinko ball W is supported by the first rib 47 and the right second rib 49 and flows down the ball passage 46 to the right side, the contact site of the pachinko ball W with respect to the first rib 47 also changes. That is, even in the first rib 47 where the pachinko ball W flowing down the ball passage 46 is always in contact, the contact portion changes to the left and right and does not always contact the same position. Wear can be suppressed, and stable induction of the pachinko sphere W can be maintained for a long time.

また、下端部が第1リブ47で支持されるパチンコ球Wに対する左右の第2リブ48,49のパチンコ球Wに対する接触部は、図17(a),(b)に示すように、当該パチンコ球Wにおける中心を通る水平線Xと交差する外周近傍になっている。すなわち、第1リブ47と左第2リブ48または第1リブ47と右第2リブ49とでパチンコ球Wを支持する位置は周方向に大きく(パチンコ球Wの円周の略1/4)離間しているから、該パチンコ球Wを安定して誘導することができる。   Further, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b), the contact portions of the left and right second ribs 48 and 49 with respect to the pachinko sphere W supported by the first rib 47 at the lower end portion are the pachinko balls. It is in the vicinity of the outer periphery intersecting the horizontal line X passing through the center of the sphere W. That is, the position where the first rib 47 and the left second rib 48 or the first rib 47 and the right second rib 49 support the pachinko sphere W is large in the circumferential direction (approximately ¼ of the circumference of the pachinko sphere W). Since they are separated from each other, the pachinko sphere W can be stably guided.

ここで、前記球出口46aは、図2に示す如く、前記始動入賞装置24の上側の始動入賞口24aの鉛直上方に位置して、該球出口46aから排出されるパチンコ球Wは上側の始動入賞口24aに入賞し易くなっており、遊技者はステージ部29の転動面29aから球入口45aを介して導入路45に通入したパチンコ球Wは、高確率で始動入賞口24aに入賞するものと期待している。しかるに、球通路を流下するパチンコ球の案内が不安定となる従来のパチンコ機においては、球通路から排出されるパチンコ球が始動入賞口の直上へ誘導されず、始動入賞口へのパチンコ球の入賞確率が低くなるおそれがあり、高確率での入賞を期待する遊技者の遊技に対する興味を低下させてしまう。これに対し、実施例のパチンコ機10では、前記球通路46を流下するパチンコ球Wの安定した案内を長期に亘って維持し得るから、球通路46からはパチンコ球Wを始動入賞口24aの直上に向けて安定して誘導して排出することができ、パチンコ球Wが高確率で入賞することへの遊技者の期待に応えることができるから、遊技者の遊技に対する興味を長期に亘って維持し得る。   Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the ball outlet 46a is positioned vertically above the start winning port 24a on the upper side of the start winning device 24, and the pachinko ball W discharged from the ball outlet 46a is on the upper side. It is easy to win the winning opening 24a, and the pachinko ball W that has passed through the introduction path 45 from the rolling surface 29a of the stage portion 29 through the ball entrance 45a is highly likely to win the starting winning opening 24a. I expect to do. However, in the conventional pachinko machine in which the guidance of the pachinko ball flowing down the ball passage becomes unstable, the pachinko ball discharged from the ball passage is not guided directly above the start winning opening, and the pachinko ball to the starting winning opening is There is a possibility that the winning probability may be lowered, and the player's interest in the game is expected to decrease with a high probability. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment, stable guidance of the pachinko sphere W flowing down the ball passage 46 can be maintained for a long period of time, so that the pachinko sphere W is moved from the ball passage 46 to the start winning opening 24a. Since it can be stably guided and discharged directly above and can meet the player's expectation that the pachinko ball W will win with a high probability, the player's interest in the game over a long period of time Can be maintained.

また、前記球通路46を画成する上壁における前記第1リブ47と対向する位置に規制リブ50を突設しているから、前記導入路45から球通路46に通入するパチンコ球Wが上方に大きく跳ねるのを規制することができる。すなわち、球通路46内でパチンコ球Wが暴れて、前記リブ47,48,49によるパチンコ球Wの案内が不安定となるのを防止しる。しかも、規制リブ50における後端下角部は弧状に形成されているから、導入路45の中間リブ51で該導入路45から球通路46へ案内されるパチンコ球Wの球通路46への通入が阻害されることもなく、リブ47,48,49によるパチンコ球Wの安定した誘導を図り得る。   In addition, since the regulation rib 50 protrudes at a position facing the first rib 47 on the upper wall that defines the ball passage 46, the pachinko sphere W that passes through the ball passage 46 from the introduction passage 45 is provided. It is possible to restrict a large amount of bouncing upward. That is, it is possible to prevent the pachinko sphere W from being violated in the ball passage 46 and unstablely guiding the pachinko sphere W by the ribs 47, 48, 49. Moreover, since the lower corner of the rear end of the regulating rib 50 is formed in an arc shape, the pachinko sphere W guided to the ball passage 46 from the introduction passage 45 by the intermediate rib 51 of the introduction passage 45 enters the ball passage 46. Can be stably induced by the ribs 47, 48, and 49 without being inhibited.

なお、前記ステージ部29の転動面29aを左右に転動するパチンコ球Wは、前記後壁部44によって前記図柄表示装置13の表示部側へ移動するのは規制されているから、該表示部がパチンコ球Wによって傷付くのを防止し得る。また後壁部44は、透明で後方に位置する前記下部発光基板111におけるLED111aの発光により照明される装飾カバー119を透して見ることができるから、パチンコ球Wの移動規制のための後壁部44によって装飾効果が低下することはない。   The pachinko ball W that rolls left and right on the rolling surface 29a of the stage portion 29 is restricted from moving to the display portion side of the symbol display device 13 by the rear wall portion 44. The part can be prevented from being damaged by the pachinko ball W. Further, the rear wall portion 44 can be seen through the decorative cover 119 that is illuminated by the light emission of the LED 111a in the lower light emitting substrate 111 that is transparent and located rearward. The decorative effect is not reduced by the portion 44.

(表示器の作用について)
前記装飾部材28の横部分の遊技領域18aを流下するパチンコ球Wが前記球通過ゲート36を通過すると、前記球検出センサ35によるパチンコ球Wの検出信号が主制御装置に入力され、該主制御装置において実行される普通図柄の抽選結果が、前記表示器90の普通表示部93に表示される。そして、主制御装置における普通図柄の抽選結果が「開閉動作あり」の場合には、前記始動入賞装置24に設けた開閉羽根25,25が所定時間および所定回数だけ開放制御され、前記下側の始動入賞口24bへのパチンコ球Wの入賞確率が高くなる。これに対し、主制御装置における普通図柄の抽選結果が「開閉動作なし」の場合には、該開閉羽根25,25の開放制御は行なわれない。
(About the function of the display)
When the pachinko ball W flowing down the game area 18a on the lateral portion of the decorative member 28 passes through the ball passage gate 36, a detection signal of the pachinko ball W by the ball detection sensor 35 is input to the main controller, and the main control is performed. The normal symbol lottery result executed in the apparatus is displayed on the normal display section 93 of the display 90. When the normal symbol lottery result in the main controller is "open / close operation", the open / close blades 25, 25 provided in the start winning device 24 are controlled to open for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the lower side The winning probability of the pachinko ball W to the start winning opening 24b is increased. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery result in the main controller is “no opening / closing operation”, the opening / closing of the opening / closing blades 25 is not performed.

また、前記始動入賞装置24の上下の始動入賞口24a,24bにパチンコ球Wが入賞したことを図示しない球検出センサが検出すると、その検出信号が主制御装置に入力され、該主制御装置において実行される特別図柄の抽選結果が、前記表示器90の特別表示部91に表示される。そして、主制御装置における特別図柄の抽選結果が「当り」となった場合は、前記特別入賞装置26の開閉扉26bが閉状態から開状態に作動することで特別入賞口26aを開放し、多数の賞球の獲得が可能となる。なお、始動入賞装置24の始動入賞口24a,24bへのパチンコ球Wの入賞を契機とした前記特別表示部91での図柄変動の開始から、該図柄変動の結果としての当りと外れの確定までの間において、前記図柄表示装置13では、特別表示部91で行われる図柄変動ゲームに係わる図柄変動演出が行なわれて、遊技者に期待感や優越感等が与えられる。また、遊技盤17に配設される各種の可動演出装置105,106,138や発光装置39,85,107,108や発光基板109,110,111,154,158の各LED40a,86a,112a,116a,154a,109a,110a,111a,158bが、前記統括制御装置59によって図柄変動ゲームに応じた演出で制御されて、遊技の興趣が高められる。   Further, when a ball detection sensor (not shown) detects that the pachinko ball W has won the upper and lower start winning ports 24a and 24b of the start winning device 24, the detection signal is input to the main control device. The lottery result of the special symbol to be executed is displayed on the special display unit 91 of the display 90. If the lottery result of the special symbol in the main control device is “winning”, the opening / closing door 26b of the special winning device 26 is operated from the closed state to the open state, thereby opening the special winning port 26a. It is possible to acquire a prize ball. From the start of symbol variation on the special display portion 91 triggered by the winning of the pachinko ball W to the starting prize ports 24a and 24b of the startup prize device 24, to the determination of hit and miss as a result of the symbol variation. In the meantime, in the symbol display device 13, the symbol variation effect related to the symbol variation game performed in the special display unit 91 is performed, and the player is given a sense of expectation and superiority. Further, various movable rendering devices 105, 106, 138, light emitting devices 39, 85, 107, 108, and light emitting substrates 109, 110, 111, 154, 158 arranged on the game board 17 are respectively LEDs 40a, 86a, 112a, 116 a, 154 a, 109 a, 110 a, 111 a, 158 b are controlled by the overall control device 59 with an effect corresponding to the symbol variation game, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

前記表示器90は、図29または図30に示す如く、前記裏ユニット19に設けた表示設置部100に配設され、該表示器90の表示基板96から導出する表示器用配線97は、裏ユニット19の収容壁部71aに形成した配線挿通口71cを介してユニット裏側に引き出されている。すなわち、前記板部材18の裏側に裏ユニット19を取り付ける際に、前記表示器90から導出する表示器用配線97が板部材18との間で挟み込まれるのを注意することなく取り付け作業を行なうことができ、作業性を良好とし得る。また、表示基板96から導出する表示器用配線97を裏ユニット19の裏側に引き出す配線挿通口71cは、該表示器90の後方に臨む部位に形成されているから、表示器用配線97を裏ユニット19の裏側に簡単に引き出すことができる。そして、裏ユニット19の裏側に引き出された表示器用配線97は、前記下部構造体53の基板設置部60に取り付けた裏中継基板61に接続される。   As shown in FIG. 29 or FIG. 30, the display 90 is disposed in the display installation unit 100 provided in the back unit 19, and the display wiring 97 led out from the display board 96 of the display 90 is connected to the back unit 19. It is pulled out to the back side of the unit through a wiring insertion hole 71c formed in the 19 accommodation wall portions 71a. That is, when attaching the back unit 19 to the back side of the plate member 18, the attachment work can be performed without paying attention to the fact that the indicator wiring 97 led out from the indicator 90 is sandwiched between the plate member 18. And workability can be improved. Further, since the wiring insertion port 71c for drawing the display wiring 97 led out from the display substrate 96 to the back side of the back unit 19 is formed at a portion facing the back of the display 90, the display wiring 97 is connected to the back unit 19. Can be easily pulled out to the back of the. The indicator wiring 97 drawn out to the back side of the back unit 19 is connected to the back relay board 61 attached to the board setting portion 60 of the lower structure 53.

また前記表示器90には、前述したように特別表示部91、ラウンド回数表示部92、普通表示部93、特別保留表示部94および普通保留表示部95等の複数の表示部が一枚の表示基板96に纏めて設置され、これら各表示部91,92,93,94,95に接続する配線も纏められている。従って、各表示部91,92,93,94,95に接続する配線を纏めた表示器用配線97の取り扱いが容易で、配線処理を簡略化することができる。   In addition, as described above, the display 90 includes a plurality of display units such as the special display unit 91, the round number display unit 92, the normal display unit 93, the special hold display unit 94, and the normal hold display unit 95. Wiring connected to the display units 91, 92, 93, 94, and 95 is also collected. Therefore, it is easy to handle the display-use wiring 97 in which the wirings connected to the display portions 91, 92, 93, 94, and 95 are combined, and the wiring process can be simplified.

実施例では、正面視で右側に位置する表示器90の表示器用配線97は、正面視で左側に設けられた左基板設置部60に取り付けた裏中継基板61に接続される。この場合に、裏ユニット19の裏側を右側から左側に引き回される表示器用配線97は、図21に示す如く、前記図柄表示装置13の下側を支持する位置決め突部57、下対向面部55bおよび突部66で画成される空間67に収容された状態で引き回され、該表示器用配線97が上方や後方へ変位するのは位置決め突部57や突部66で規制される。従って、裏ユニット19の裏側に図柄表示装置13を取り付ける際に、表示器用配線97を図柄表示装置13との間で挟み込むのを防止することができる。   In the embodiment, the display wiring 97 of the display 90 located on the right side when viewed from the front is connected to the back relay board 61 attached to the left board installation portion 60 provided on the left side when viewed from the front. In this case, the indicator wiring 97 routed from the right side to the left side of the back side of the back unit 19 includes a positioning protrusion 57 that supports the lower side of the symbol display device 13, and a lower facing surface portion 55b as shown in FIG. Further, the positioning projection 57 and the projection 66 restrict the displacement of the indicator wiring 97 upward and rearward while being accommodated in the space 67 defined by the projection 66. Therefore, when the symbol display device 13 is attached to the back side of the back unit 19, it is possible to prevent the indicator wiring 97 from being sandwiched between the symbol display device 13.

前記表示設置部100は、図28または図30に示す如く、裏ユニット19の前面から突出した状態で該ユニット19に配設される。また、該表示設置部100に取り付けられた表示器90において、遊技者が最も注目する特別遊技の抽選結果を表示する前記特別表示部91は、表示設置部100に形成した第1の孔部102に裏側から収容されて、該特別表示部91は、その前面が表示設置部100の最前面に臨むよう構成されている。そして、前記板部材18の裏側に裏ユニット19を取り付けた際には、図28に示す如く、板部材18に配設した前記装飾部材28の右下隅部に設けた隅部光透過部33の裏側に表示設置部100の前面が近接して臨む。また表示設置部100の第1の孔部102は、隅部光透過部33の対応する透明部33aの裏側に位置しており、遊技盤17の前側から透明部33aを介して前記表示器90の特別表示部91を明確に視認することができる。   As shown in FIG. 28 or FIG. 30, the display installation unit 100 is disposed in the unit 19 in a state of protruding from the front surface of the back unit 19. Further, in the display device 90 attached to the display installation unit 100, the special display unit 91 for displaying the lottery result of the special game that the player pays most attention is the first hole 102 formed in the display installation unit 100. The special display unit 91 is configured so that the front surface thereof faces the forefront surface of the display installation unit 100. When the back unit 19 is attached to the back side of the plate member 18, as shown in FIG. 28, the corner light transmitting portion 33 provided at the lower right corner of the decorative member 28 disposed on the plate member 18 is used. The front surface of the display installation unit 100 faces close to the back side. The first hole portion 102 of the display installation unit 100 is located on the back side of the corresponding transparent portion 33a of the corner light transmitting portion 33, and the display device 90 from the front side of the game board 17 through the transparent portion 33a. The special display portion 91 can be clearly seen.

また、前記表示器90の特別表示部91以外の各表示部92,93,94,95が後側に臨む表示設置部100の各第2の孔部103は、隅部光透過部33の対応する透明部33bの裏側に夫々臨んでおり、各表示部92,93,94,95を遊技盤17の前側から視認することができる。なお、各第2の孔部103の後端部に、対応する各表示部92,93,94,95のLED92a,92b,92c,93a,93b,95a,95b,98a,98b,99a,99bを個々に収容しているから(図28参照)、各LED92a,92b,92c,93a,93b,95a,95b,98a,98b,99a,99bの点灯時には他のLEDの光と明確に区別することができる。更に、前記板部材18の裏側に裏ユニット19を取り付けた状態で、隅部光透過部33における第1透明部33aの周囲裏面に表示設置部100の前面が当接すると共に、隅部光透過部33における第2透明部33bの周囲裏面に表示設置部100の各第2の孔部103が形成される突出部104の前面が当接するようになっているから、該隅部光透過部33によっても裏側に臨む各表示部91,92,93,94,95からの光を明確に区分することができ、何れの遊技状態であるのかを遊技者が誤認するのを防止し得る。   In addition, each second hole 103 of the display installation unit 100 facing the rear side of each display unit 92, 93, 94, 95 other than the special display unit 91 of the display device 90 corresponds to the corner light transmission unit 33. The display portions 92, 93, 94, and 95 can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 17. In addition, LED92a, 92b, 92c, 93a, 93b, 95a, 95b, 98a, 98b, 99a, 99b of each display part 92,93,94,95 corresponding to the rear-end part of each 2nd hole 103 is provided. Since they are housed individually (see FIG. 28), when the LEDs 92a, 92b, 92c, 93a, 93b, 95a, 95b, 98a, 98b, 99a, 99b are turned on, they can be clearly distinguished from the lights of other LEDs. it can. Further, with the back unit 19 attached to the back side of the plate member 18, the front surface of the display installation unit 100 abuts on the peripheral back surface of the first transparent portion 33 a in the corner light transmitting portion 33 and the corner light transmitting portion. 33, the front surface of the protruding portion 104 in which each second hole portion 103 of the display installation portion 100 is in contact with the back surface around the second transparent portion 33b of the second transparent portion 33b. In addition, the light from each of the display portions 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 facing the back side can be clearly distinguished, and the player can be prevented from misidentifying which gaming state it is.

(窓側部用発光装置の作用について)
前記装飾部材28の左側部光透過部32に配設された窓側部用発光装置39のLED40aを発光することで、該左側部光透過部32の内側壁部32bに向けて光が照射され、装飾部材28の窓口28aの左側部が照明される。窓側部用発光装置39の配配位置は、前記始動入賞装置24の羽根部材25,25を開放させるための普通図柄の抽選を行なう契機となる前記球通過ゲート36の配設位置、および始動入賞装置24の始動入賞口24a,24bへの入賞確率が高くなる球通路46への通入の可能性のあるステージ部29へパチンコ球Wを通入する球導入口30aの形成位置に近接している。すなわち、遊技者が注目する球通過ゲート36や球導入口30aの近傍を窓側部用発光装置39で発光演出することができ、遊技の興趣を高めることができる。
(Operation of light emitting device for window side)
By emitting light from the LED 40a of the window side light emitting device 39 disposed in the left side light transmitting part 32 of the decorative member 28, light is irradiated toward the inner wall part 32b of the left side light transmitting part 32, The left side of the window 28a of the decorative member 28 is illuminated. The distribution position of the window side light emitting device 39 is the arrangement position of the ball passage gate 36 that triggers the lottery of the normal symbol for opening the blade members 25, 25 of the start winning device 24, and the start winning prize. Proximity to the formation position of the ball introduction port 30a through which the pachinko ball W is inserted into the stage portion 29 where there is a possibility of entering the ball passage 46 where the winning probability to the start winning ports 24a and 24b of the device 24 is high. Yes. That is, the vicinity of the ball passing gate 36 and the ball inlet 30a that the player pays attention to can be light-emitted by the window side light-emitting device 39, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

前記球通過ゲート36が設けられる装飾部材28のゲート飾り部材37におけるセンサ保持部37aは、前記板部材18における第1の貫通口21aに連通する貫通孔22に収容されている。そして、球通過ゲート36に配設した前記球検出センサ35の後端に一端が接続するセンサ用配線38は、図9または図10に示す如く、前記板部材18の裏面に形成されて貫通孔22と連通する前記溝部23に収容された状態で、前記裏ユニット19の左画壁部56cを挟んで内側から外側に引き回されることで裏ユニット19の外側に引き出され、前記裏中継基板61に接続される。   A sensor holding portion 37 a in the gate decoration member 37 of the decoration member 28 provided with the ball passage gate 36 is accommodated in the through hole 22 communicating with the first through hole 21 a in the plate member 18. A sensor wire 38 having one end connected to the rear end of the sphere detection sensor 35 disposed on the sphere passage gate 36 is formed on the back surface of the plate member 18 as shown in FIG. 9 or FIG. 22 is drawn out to the outside of the back unit 19 by being routed from the inside to the outside across the left wall portion 56c of the back unit 19 in a state of being accommodated in the groove portion 23 communicating with the 22 61 is connected.

前記貫通孔22は、板部材18に形成されて前記装飾部材28の本体部分が嵌め込まれる前記第1の貫通口21aに連通しており、該貫通孔22の内側方に臨む前記左側部光透過部32に配設されている窓側部用発光装置39の窓用発光基板40から導出する部品用配線43は、図9または図10に示す如く、前記貫通孔22および溝部23を介して裏ユニット19の左画壁部56cを挟んで内側から外側に引き回されることで裏ユニット19の外側に引き出され、前記裏中継基板61に接続される。すなわち、前記球通過ゲート36に設けた球検出センサ35のセンサ用配線38を裏ユニット19の裏側に引き出すための溝部23を利用して、窓口28aの内側部を照明する窓側部用発光装置39の部品用配線43を裏ユニット19の裏側に引き出すよう構成したから、板部材18や裏ユニット19に部品用配線43のための専用の挿通口等を形成する必要はなく、板部材18や裏ユニット19の構成を簡略化し得ると共に製造コストを低廉に抑えることができる。   The through-hole 22 is formed in the plate member 18 and communicates with the first through-hole 21 a into which the main body portion of the decorative member 28 is fitted, and the left side light transmission facing the inner side of the through-hole 22. The component wiring 43 led out from the window light emitting substrate 40 of the window side light emitting device 39 disposed in the section 32 is connected to the back unit via the through hole 22 and the groove 23 as shown in FIG. 9 or FIG. By being drawn from the inner side to the outer side with the left image wall portion 56 c of 19 being sandwiched, it is drawn to the outer side of the back unit 19 and connected to the back relay board 61. That is, the window side light emitting device 39 that illuminates the inner side of the window 28a by using the groove 23 for pulling out the sensor wiring 38 of the ball detection sensor 35 provided in the ball passing gate 36 to the back side of the back unit 19. Since the component wiring 43 is drawn out to the back side of the back unit 19, it is not necessary to form a dedicated insertion port for the component wiring 43 in the plate member 18 or the back unit 19. The configuration of the unit 19 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be kept low.

前記左側部光透過部32における窓側部用発光装置39を収容する収容部32dを画成する外側壁部32aには、前記第1の貫通口21aと貫通孔22との連通部に臨んで前記部品用配線43を挿通する側開口42が設けられているから、該側開口42に挿通した部品用配線43を板部材18の裏面より後方に突出させることなく前記溝部23まで引き回すことができる。すなわち、板部材18の第1の貫通口21aより内側に位置する窓側部用発光装置39に接続する部品用配線43を、裏ユニット19の内側において板部材18の裏側に突出させることなく引き回すことができ、該部品用配線43が裏ユニット19の内側に配設される各種部品と干渉するのを防止し得る。また、部品用配線43が挿通された側開口42の後部開口側は、窓側部用発光装置39における窓用発光基板40を保持する取付部材41に設けた閉塞片41dにより閉塞されているから、部品用配線43が側開口42から後方に抜けて板部材18の後方に突出するのを確実に防ぐことができる。   The outer wall portion 32a defining the housing portion 32d for housing the window side light emitting device 39 in the left side light transmitting portion 32 faces the communicating portion between the first through hole 21a and the through hole 22 and Since the side opening 42 through which the component wiring 43 is inserted is provided, the component wiring 43 inserted through the side opening 42 can be routed to the groove 23 without protruding backward from the back surface of the plate member 18. That is, the component wiring 43 connected to the window side light emitting device 39 located on the inner side of the first through hole 21 a of the plate member 18 is routed without projecting to the back side of the plate member 18 inside the back unit 19. It is possible to prevent the component wiring 43 from interfering with various components arranged inside the back unit 19. Further, the rear opening side of the side opening 42 through which the component wiring 43 is inserted is closed by a closing piece 41d provided on the mounting member 41 that holds the window light emitting substrate 40 in the window side light emitting device 39. It is possible to reliably prevent the component wiring 43 from protruding backward from the side opening 42 and projecting rearward of the plate member 18.

前記窓側部用発光装置39の窓用発光基板40に対して部品用配線43の一端を接続するコネクタ受部40cは、図9に示す如く、前記第1の貫通口21aと貫通孔22との連通部の側方に臨んでいるから、該コネクタ受部40cに一端を接続した部品用配線43を貫通孔22および溝部23に向けて引き回し易く、かつ引き回し距離を短かくすることができる。また、前記裏ユニット19における前記溝部23と交差して位置する左画壁部56cには、図4または図10に示す如く、板部材18の溝部23と対応する位置に前記切欠部19bが上下方向に所定長さで形成されているから、溝部23から裏ユニット19の外側に引き出されるセンサ用配線38や部品用配線43が左画壁部56cの前端縁に接触するのを抑えて、該配線38,43が傷付くのを抑制し得る。   A connector receiving portion 40c for connecting one end of the component wiring 43 to the window light emitting substrate 40 of the window side light emitting device 39 is formed between the first through hole 21a and the through hole 22 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the side of the communication portion, the component wiring 43 having one end connected to the connector receiving portion 40c can be easily routed toward the through hole 22 and the groove portion 23, and the routing distance can be shortened. Further, in the left image wall portion 56c that intersects with the groove portion 23 in the back unit 19, the cutout portion 19b is vertically arranged at a position corresponding to the groove portion 23 of the plate member 18, as shown in FIG. Since the sensor wiring 38 and the component wiring 43 drawn out from the groove 23 to the outside of the back unit 19 are prevented from coming into contact with the front edge of the left wall portion 56c, It is possible to suppress the wirings 38 and 43 from being damaged.

(カバー体の作用について)
前記遊技領域18aに打ち出され、前記ステージ部29に通入することなく該遊技領域18aを流下するパチンコ球Wまたはステージ部29の転動面29aあるいは球通路46の球出口46aから遊技領域18aに排出されたパチンコ球Wは、複数の遊技釘に当たることによって不規則な流路を流下し、前記入賞口用飾り部材27に設けた左普通入賞口27bに入賞することがある。最上部に位置する左普通入賞口27bに入賞したパチンコ球Wは、前記樋部27dを介して左排出用球通路76における第1縦通路78に通入し、傾斜通路81を介して第3縦通路80に案内されて、該第3縦通路80の下流端に形成した球排出口80aを介して機外(球回収部)に排出される。また、中間に位置する左普通入賞口27bに入賞したパチンコ球Wは、前記樋部27dを介して左排出用球通路76における第2縦通路79に通入し、傾斜通路81を介して第3縦通路80に案内されて、前記球排出口80aを介して機外(球回収部)に排出される。更に、最下部に位置する左普通入賞口27bに入賞したパチンコ球Wは、前記樋部27dを介して左排出用球通路76における第3縦通路80に通入し、前記球排出口80aを介して機外(球回収部)に排出される。
(About the action of the cover body)
From the pachinko ball W which is launched into the game area 18a and flows down the game area 18a without entering the stage section 29, the rolling surface 29a of the stage section 29 or the ball outlet 46a of the ball passage 46, the game area 18a is entered. The discharged pachinko balls W may flow down an irregular flow path by hitting a plurality of game nails, and may be awarded to the left ordinary winning opening 27b provided in the winning opening decorative member 27. The pachinko ball W that has won the left ordinary winning opening 27b positioned at the top enters the first vertical passage 78 in the left discharge ball passage 76 through the flange portion 27d, and enters the third vertical passage 78 through the inclined passage 81. It is guided to the vertical passage 80 and discharged to the outside of the machine (ball collection section) through a ball discharge port 80a formed at the downstream end of the third vertical passage 80. Further, the pachinko ball W that has won the left normal winning opening 27b located in the middle passes through the second vertical passage 79 in the left discharge ball passage 76 through the flange portion 27d, and passes through the inclined passage 81 to the second. 3 Guided by the vertical passage 80 and discharged to the outside of the machine (ball recovery section) through the ball discharge port 80a. Further, the pachinko ball W that has won the left normal winning port 27b located at the lowermost part passes through the collar portion 27d into the third vertical passage 80 in the left discharge ball passage 76, and passes through the ball outlet 80a. It is discharged out of the machine (ball collecting part).

前述したように入賞口用飾り部材27に設けた3つの左普通入賞口27bに入賞したパチンコ球Wは、裏ユニット19に設けた左排出用球通路76の第3縦通路80に集合され、該第3縦通路80の下流端部に配設した左普通入賞センサ83で該パチンコ球Wが検出されることで、所定数の賞球が払い出される。また、入賞口用飾り部材27に設けられた光透過部材27cは、裏ユニット19に配設された前記入賞口用発光装置85のLED86aを発光することで裏側から照明され、遊技者が注目する左普通入賞口27bの周囲で発光演出することで遊技の興趣を高めることができる。   As described above, the pachinko balls W won in the three left ordinary winning holes 27b provided in the prize opening decoration member 27 are gathered in the third vertical passage 80 of the left discharge ball passage 76 provided in the back unit 19, When the pachinko ball W is detected by the left normal winning sensor 83 disposed at the downstream end of the third vertical passage 80, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Further, the light transmitting member 27c provided in the prize opening decoration member 27 is illuminated from the back side by emitting light from the LED 86a of the prize opening light emitting device 85 disposed in the back unit 19, and the player pays attention. Amusement of the game can be enhanced by performing a light emission effect around the left ordinary winning opening 27b.

ここで、前記入賞口用飾り部材27の光透過部材27cを裏側から照明する入賞口用発光装置85は、図26に示す如く、入賞口用飾り部材27の樋部27dが収容されるように前記板部材18に形成した第3の貫通口21cに収容された状態で、前記左排出用球通路76の前側に位置している。この場合において、板部材18にルーター加工により形成された前記第3の貫通口21cの内周縁と、該第3の貫通口21cに収容される入賞口用発光装置85の外周縁との間には隙間を生じ、該隙間の部分において左排出用球通路76が第3の貫通口21c側に開口していると、該左排出用球通路76を流下するパチンコ球Wの流れが隙間によって乱れるおそれがある。   Here, as shown in FIG. 26, the prize opening light emitting device 85 that illuminates the light transmitting member 27c of the prize opening decoration member 27 from the back side accommodates the collar portion 27d of the prize opening decoration member 27. In a state of being accommodated in the third through-hole 21 c formed in the plate member 18, it is located on the front side of the left discharge ball passage 76. In this case, between the inner peripheral edge of the third through hole 21c formed in the plate member 18 by router processing and the outer peripheral edge of the winning hole light emitting device 85 accommodated in the third through hole 21c. Creates a gap, and if the left discharge ball passage 76 opens toward the third through hole 21c in the gap portion, the flow of the pachinko sphere W flowing down the left discharge ball passage 76 is disturbed by the gap. There is a fear.

しかしながら、実施例のパチンコ機10では、前記左排出用球通路76において、前記各縦通路78,79,80と樋部27d,27d,27dとの連通部を除く部位の前面開口をカバー部材89で覆っているから、第3の貫通口21cの内周縁と入賞口用発光装置85の外周縁との間に生ずる隙間において左排出用球通路76の前面開口は開口していない。すなわち、左排出用球通路76に通入したパチンコ球Wの前側は、カバー部材89で案内されるから、隙間に起因して左排出用球通路76内をパチンコ球Wがスムーズに流れなくなるのを防止でき、球詰まりの発生を抑制し得る。また、隙間を極力小さくするために第3の貫通口21cや入賞口用発光装置85におけるケース体87の加工精度を上げる必要はなく、製造コストが上昇するのを抑制し得る。   However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment, in the left discharge ball passage 76, the front opening of the portion excluding the communication portion between each of the vertical passages 78, 79, 80 and the flange portions 27d, 27d, 27d is covered by the cover member 89. Therefore, the front opening of the left discharge ball passage 76 is not opened in the gap formed between the inner periphery of the third through hole 21c and the outer periphery of the winning hole light emitting device 85. That is, since the front side of the pachinko ball W that has entered the left discharge ball passage 76 is guided by the cover member 89, the pachinko ball W does not flow smoothly in the left discharge ball passage 76 due to the gap. Can be prevented, and the occurrence of clogging can be suppressed. Further, in order to make the gap as small as possible, it is not necessary to increase the processing accuracy of the case body 87 in the third through hole 21c or the winning hole light emitting device 85, and it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

前記カバー部材89は、本体板89aの外周縁部に形成した複数の係合部89bの夫々を、左排出用球通路76を画成する通路用壁部82に形成した対応する被係合部82aに係合することで、該本体板89aが左排出用球通路76の前面開口を覆う位置にずれなく確実に位置決めされ、該カバー部材89の位置ずれにより前記隙間部分で前面開口が開口してしまうのを確実に防ぐことができる。また、左排出用球通路76に対して位置決めされたカバー部材89は、前記裏ユニット19に取り付けられる入賞口用発光装置85と通路用壁部82とで挟持されて左排出用球通路76から脱落しないよう構成してあるから、カバー部材89を固定するための専用の部材を必要とせず、構成が簡単になる。   The cover member 89 has a plurality of engaging portions 89b formed on the outer peripheral edge portion of the main body plate 89a, and a corresponding engaged portion formed on the passage wall portion 82 that defines the left discharge ball passage 76. By engaging with 82a, the main body plate 89a is reliably positioned so as not to be displaced so as to cover the front opening of the left discharge ball passage 76, and the front opening is opened at the gap portion due to the displacement of the cover member 89. Can be surely prevented. Further, the cover member 89 positioned with respect to the left discharge ball passage 76 is sandwiched between the winning opening light emitting device 85 attached to the back unit 19 and the passage wall portion 82, and from the left discharge ball passage 76. Since it is configured not to drop off, a dedicated member for fixing the cover member 89 is not required, and the configuration is simplified.

なお、前記入賞口用発光装置85における左排出用球通路76の前面開口に重なる部分の裏側は、前記カバー部材89が存在しているから、左排出用球通路76を流下するパチンコ球Wが前記入賞用発光基板86に接触するのは防止される。すなわち、入賞口用発光装置85においては、入賞用発光基板86を配設するケース体87として後方に開放する構成のものを用いることができ、該入賞用発光基板86の裏面を保護するためのカバー等を必要とせず、入賞口用発光装置85を構成する部品点数を低減し得ると共に構成を簡略化し得る。   In addition, since the cover member 89 exists on the back side of the portion overlapping the front opening of the left discharge ball passage 76 in the winning opening light emitting device 85, the pachinko balls W flowing down the left discharge ball passage 76 are formed. Contact with the winning light emitting substrate 86 is prevented. That is, in the prize opening light-emitting device 85, a case body 87 having a structure that opens rearward can be used as the case body 87 on which the prize-winning light-emitting board 86 is disposed, and the back surface of the prize-winning light-emitting board 86 is protected. A cover or the like is not required, and the number of parts constituting the winning opening light emitting device 85 can be reduced and the configuration can be simplified.

(磁気センサの作用について)
ここで、前記表示器90による図柄変動ゲームを開始させる契機となる始動入賞装置24の始動入賞口24a,24bは、不正行為を意図している不正遊技者が磁石を用いた不正行為で狙われ易い部位である。この不正行為としては、前記前枠14のガラス板に近づけた磁石でパチンコ球Wを吸着して、上側の始動入賞口24aや開放状態となった下側の始動入賞口24bに直にパチンコ球Wを入賞させる行為や、遊技領域18aに植設されている遊技釘により形成される所定の通路に磁石でパチンコ球Wを集めてわざと詰まらせることで、前記始動入賞口24a,24bへ向けてパチンコ球Wを高確率で流下させるようにする行為が挙げられる。しかるに、前記始動入賞口24a,24bに直にパチンコ球Wを入賞させる不正行為や、前記パチンコ球Wをわざと詰まらせる不正行為がなされた場合は、始動入賞口24a,24bへの入賞確率が異常に上昇するため、遊技店では不正行為を容易に知ることができる。このため、不正遊技者は、始動入賞口24a,24bを直接狙うことなく、前記羽根部材25,25を開放させる契機となる球通過ゲート36へのパチンコ球Wの通過確率を高めたり、ステージ部29にパチンコ球Wがより多く取り込まれるように、球通過ゲート36や球導入口30aに対して前述した不正行為を行なう場合がある。
(Operation of magnetic sensor)
Here, the start winning ports 24a and 24b of the start winning device 24 that triggers the start of the symbol variation game by the display device 90 are targeted by an unauthorized player who intends to perform an illegal act using a magnet. Easy part. As this fraudulent act, a pachinko ball W is adsorbed by a magnet close to the glass plate of the front frame 14 and directly into the upper start winning port 24a or the opened lower start winning port 24b. Actions for winning W, or gathering pachinko balls W with magnets in a predetermined passage formed by game nails planted in the game area 18a and clogging them intentionally, toward the start winning ports 24a, 24b There is an act of causing the pachinko ball W to flow down with a high probability. However, if an illegal act that directly wins the pachinko ball W in the starting winning holes 24a and 24b or an illegal act that intentionally blocks the pachinko ball W is made, the winning probability to the starting winning holes 24a and 24b is abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to easily know fraudulent behavior at the amusement store. For this reason, the unauthorized player can increase the probability of passing the pachinko ball W to the ball passage gate 36 that triggers the opening of the blade members 25, 25 without directly aiming at the start winning holes 24a, 24b, In some cases, the above-described fraud is performed on the ball passage gate 36 and the ball introduction port 30a so that more pachinko balls W are taken into the ball 29.

この場合に、前記板部材18の裏側における前記遊技領域18aの横部分の後方に、図37に示す如く、前記左側部磁気センサ167が配設され、しかも該磁気センサ167は、磁気検出可能範囲が、球通過ゲート36および球導入口30aに及ぶ位置に臨むように配置されている。従って、球通過ゲート36や球導入口30aの前側に臨むガラス板に磁石が近づけられたときには、該磁石の磁力を左側部磁気センサ167で検出して不正行為が行なわれていることを発見することができる。そして、左側部磁気センサ167が磁気を検出した場合は、前記統括制御装置59の制御下に異常報知が行なわれ、不正行為を防ぐことができる。   In this case, as shown in FIG. 37, the left side magnetic sensor 167 is disposed behind the lateral portion of the game area 18a on the back side of the plate member 18, and the magnetic sensor 167 has a magnetic detection range. Are arranged so as to face the position extending to the ball passage gate 36 and the ball introduction port 30a. Therefore, when the magnet is brought close to the glass plate facing the front side of the ball passage gate 36 or the ball introduction port 30a, the magnetic force of the magnet is detected by the left side magnetic sensor 167 to discover that an illegal act is being performed. be able to. When the left side magnetic sensor 167 detects magnetism, an abnormality notification is performed under the control of the overall control device 59, and an illegal act can be prevented.

前記球通過ゲート36および球導入口30aが臨む遊技領域18aの横部分は上下方向に長い部分であり、前記左側部磁気センサ167を、前述したようにリード片の延在方向が前記板部材18の裏面と平行で、かつリード片の延在方向が上下方向に沿う縦向き姿勢で配置することで(図37参照)、1つの左側部磁気センサ167による磁気を検出し得る範囲は上下方向に長い横部分に対応し、複数の磁気センサを用いることなく球通過ゲート36および球導入口30aに及ぶ広範囲での磁石による不正行為を検出することが可能となり、コストを低廉に抑えることができる。また、図38に示す如く、前記板部材18の裏面に対向して左側部磁気センサ167を裏ユニット19に配設することで、左側部磁気センサ167と板部材18の前面との離間距離は短かくなるから、検出感度の低い磁気センサを使用することが可能となり、コストを低減することができる。しかも、左側部磁気センサ167のセンサ設置部168を裏ユニット19に設け、かつ左側部磁気センサ167の姿勢を長手方向(リード片の延在方向)が上下方向に沿うようにしているから、板部材18の後方に左側部磁気センサ167が大きく突出することはなく、左側部磁気センサ167が他の部材の取り付けの障害となることはない。   A lateral portion of the game area 18a facing the ball passage gate 36 and the ball introduction port 30a is a portion that is long in the vertical direction, and the extension direction of the lead piece is the plate member 18 in the left-side magnetic sensor 167 as described above. By arranging the lead piece in a vertical orientation along the vertical direction (see FIG. 37), the range in which magnetism can be detected by one left side magnetic sensor 167 is vertical. Corresponding to a long horizontal portion, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts by magnets in a wide range extending to the ball passage gate 36 and the ball introduction port 30a without using a plurality of magnetic sensors, and the cost can be reduced. Further, as shown in FIG. 38, the left side magnetic sensor 167 and the front surface of the plate member 18 are separated by disposing the left side magnetic sensor 167 on the back unit 19 so as to face the back surface of the plate member 18. Since it becomes short, it becomes possible to use a magnetic sensor with low detection sensitivity, and it can reduce cost. Moreover, the sensor installation portion 168 of the left side magnetic sensor 167 is provided in the back unit 19, and the posture of the left side magnetic sensor 167 is set so that the longitudinal direction (extending direction of the lead piece) is along the vertical direction. The left side magnetic sensor 167 does not protrude greatly behind the member 18, and the left side magnetic sensor 167 does not obstruct the attachment of other members.

前記板部材18の裏側における前記始動入賞装置24の左右両側に、図18に示す如く、前記下磁気センサ73,75が配設され、しかも該磁気センサ73,75は、磁気検出可能範囲が、始動入賞装置24の上下の始動入賞口24a,24bおよび該始動入賞口24a,24bの左右側方の遊技領域18aにおけるパチンコ球Wをわざと詰まらせる対象となる領域に及ぶ位置に臨むように配置されている。従って、上下の始動入賞口24a,24bの前側に臨むガラス板および前記領域に臨むガラス板に磁石が近づけられたときには、該磁石の磁力を下磁気センサ73,75で検出して不正行為が行なわれていることを発見することができる。そして、下磁気センサ73,75が磁気を検出した場合は、前記統括制御装置59の制御下に異常報知が行なわれ、不正行為を防ぐことができる。すなわち、実施例のパチンコ機10は、前記球通過ゲート36や球導入口30aを介して始動入賞口24a,24bを関接的に狙う不正行為のみならず、該始動入賞口24a,24bを直接的に狙う不正行為をも検出することができる。   As shown in FIG. 18, the lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75 are disposed on the left and right sides of the starting prize-winning device 24 on the back side of the plate member 18, and the magnetic sensors 73 and 75 have a magnetic detection range. The upper and lower start winning ports 24a and 24b of the start winning device 24 and the left and right side game areas 18a of the start winning ports 24a and 24b are arranged so as to face positions that are intended to be intentionally clogged with pachinko balls W. ing. Therefore, when a magnet is brought close to the glass plate facing the front side of the upper and lower start winning openings 24a and 24b and the glass plate facing the region, the magnetic force of the magnet is detected by the lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75, and an illegal act is performed. Can be found. When the lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75 detect magnetism, an abnormality notification is performed under the control of the overall control device 59, and an illegal act can be prevented. That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the embodiment not only performs the illegal act of aiming at the starting winning ports 24a and 24b through the ball passing gate 36 and the ball introducing port 30a, but directly the starting winning ports 24a and 24b. It is also possible to detect fraudulent acts that are targeted.

ここで、不正遊技者は、磁石を用いて前記左右の普通入賞口27b,34に直にパチンコ球Wを入賞させることで、賞球を不正に稼ぐ行為を行なう場合がある。しかしながら、前記左右の下磁気センサ73,75の磁気検出可能範囲は、左右の普通入賞口27b,34にも及ぶように設定されているから、該普通入賞口27b,34に直にパチンコ球Wを不正入賞させるためにガラス板に近づけた磁石の磁気も、該下磁気センサ73,75で検出することができる。すなわち、下磁気センサ73,75では、始動入賞装置24へのパチンコ球Wの誘導確率を不正に上げるための行為および普通入賞口27b,34へ直にパチンコ球Wを不正入賞させる行為の何れをも検出することができる。また、下磁気センサ73,75の磁気検出可能範囲は、特別入賞装置26の特別入賞口26aにも及ぶように設定されているから、「大当り」の発生時において特別入賞口26aが開放された際に、パチンコ球Wを磁石を用いて不正入賞させる行為も検出することができる。   Here, there is a case where the illegal player performs an act of illegally earning a winning ball by directly winning the pachinko ball W in the left and right normal winning holes 27b and 34 using a magnet. However, since the magnetic detection range of the left and right lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75 is set so as to extend to the left and right ordinary winning holes 27b and 34, the pachinko ball W is directly applied to the normal winning holes 27b and 34. The lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75 can also detect the magnetism of the magnet brought close to the glass plate in order to make an illegal prize. That is, in the lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75, either an action for illegally increasing the induction probability of the pachinko ball W to the start winning device 24 or an action for illegally winning the pachinko ball W directly to the normal winning holes 27b and 34 is performed. Can also be detected. Further, since the magnetic detection range of the lower magnetic sensors 73 and 75 is set to extend to the special winning opening 26a of the special winning device 26, the special winning opening 26a is opened when the "big hit" occurs. At this time, an act of illegally winning the pachinko ball W using a magnet can also be detected.

(左可動演出装置の作用について)
前記遊技盤17に配設される前記左可動演出装置105では、前記第1の駆動モータ134を正逆駆動することで、前記作動ギヤ137が正逆回転し、該作動ギヤ137に噛合するラック128との噛合作用下に、左可動演出装置105の左可動体120は、裏ユニット19の左対向面部55cに配設したレール部材130に転がり軸受129で支持された状態で、図2や図18に示す待機位置と図33に示す作動位置との間をレール部材130に沿って上下動する。左可動体120は、レール部材130に転がり軸受129を介して支持される可動基部122に対して横方向に腕部123が延出する上下反転したL字形状に形成されており、該腕部123の荷重が可動基部122のみで支持される片持ち支持形態となっているが、該左可動体120の移動支持構造として可動基部122の長手方向(往復移動方向)に所定長さを有する転がり軸受129を用いることで、左可動体120を、前記レール部材130に沿って上下方向に直線的にスムーズかつ安定して往復移動することができる。
(About the action of the left movable effect device)
In the left movable effect device 105 arranged on the game board 17, the first gear motor 134 is driven forward and reverse so that the operating gear 137 rotates forward and backward and meshes with the operating gear 137. The left movable body 120 of the left movable effect device 105 is supported by the rolling bearing 129 on the rail member 130 disposed on the left facing surface portion 55c of the rear unit 19 under the meshing action with 128. It moves up and down along the rail member 130 between the standby position shown in FIG. 18 and the operating position shown in FIG. The left movable body 120 is formed in an L-shape that is vertically inverted with an arm portion 123 extending laterally with respect to a movable base portion 122 supported by a rail member 130 via a rolling bearing 129. The load of 123 is supported by the movable base 122 only, but the left movable body 120 has a predetermined length in the longitudinal direction (reciprocating direction) of the movable base 122 as a movable support structure of the left movable body 120. By using the bearing 129, the left movable body 120 can be reciprocated smoothly and stably linearly in the vertical direction along the rail member 130.

また、前記左可動体120に配設された前記副可動演出装置138においては、前記第2の駆動モータ143を正逆駆動することで、前記連繋機構141を介して腕部123に配設された左右一対の副可動体139a,139bが、図18に示す相互に近接した待機位置と、図33に示す相互に離間した作動位置との間を左右に往復移動する。実施例のパチンコ機10では、前記装飾部材28の窓口28aに臨む左可動体120の腕部123を上下動させる動作と、該腕部123において一対の副可動体139a,139bを左右に移動させる動作とを遊技者に視認させることができ、複数の動作を組合わせることによる演出効果を向上し得る。   Further, in the auxiliary movable effect device 138 disposed in the left movable body 120, the second drive motor 143 is driven forward and reverse to be disposed in the arm portion 123 via the linkage mechanism 141. Further, the pair of left and right sub movable bodies 139a and 139b reciprocate left and right between a standby position close to each other shown in FIG. 18 and an operation position separated from each other shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment, the arm portion 123 of the left movable body 120 facing the window 28a of the decorative member 28 is moved up and down, and the pair of sub movable bodies 139a and 139b are moved left and right in the arm portion 123. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the action, and to improve the presentation effect by combining a plurality of actions.

前記副可動体139a,139bを動作させる第2の駆動モータ143を含む第2の駆動部140は、図46に示す如く、左可動体120におけるレール部材130に直に支持される可動基部122に配置されており、該第2の駆動部140の荷重をレール部材130で直に支持することができる。すなわち、前記レール部材130に対して片持ち支持されている左可動体120において、可動基部122に第2の駆動部140を設けることで、可動基部122と腕部123との連結部に加わる負荷を小さくすることができ、左可動体120の円滑な動作を確保し得る。   As shown in FIG. 46, the second drive unit 140 including the second drive motor 143 that operates the sub movable bodies 139a and 139b is provided on the movable base 122 that is directly supported by the rail member 130 in the left movable body 120. The load of the second drive unit 140 can be directly supported by the rail member 130. That is, in the left movable body 120 that is cantilevered with respect to the rail member 130, the load applied to the connecting portion between the movable base 122 and the arm 123 is provided by providing the movable base 122 with the second drive unit 140. And the smooth operation of the left movable body 120 can be ensured.

(副可動演出装置の作用について)
前記副可動演出装置138では、第2の駆動モータ143の正逆駆動によって第2駆動ギヤ144が正逆回転し、該ギヤ144に歯部145aを介して噛合する前記第1連杆145が、長孔145b,145bに挿通された案内ピン142b,142bに案内されて左右方向に往復移動する。そして、第1連杆145に右連結ピン145cと左連結孔146aとの係合によって連結される第2連杆146および該第2連杆146に右連結孔146bと左連結ピン147aとの係合によって連結される第3連杆147が、第1連杆145の左右方向の往復移動に伴って左右方向に往復移動する。第3連杆147には、前記左副可動体139aが連結されているから、該左副可動体139aも第1連杆145の移動に伴って左右方向に往復移動する。また、第3連杆147の歯部147cが上側で噛合する前記ピニオン150に対し、前記右副可動体139bに連結した前記ラック部材151の歯部151aが下側で噛合している(図48参照)。従って、第3連杆147の移動方向とは逆方向に右副可動体139bが移動することになり、よって左右の副可動体139a,139bは相互に近接移動したり離間移動する。
(About the operation of the sub-movable effect device)
In the secondary movable effect device 138, the second drive gear 144 rotates forward and backward by forward and reverse drive of the second drive motor 143, and the first linkage 145 meshed with the gear 144 via the tooth portion 145a is provided. Guided by the guide pins 142b and 142b inserted through the long holes 145b and 145b, it reciprocates in the left-right direction. The second connecting rod 146 is connected to the first connecting rod 145 by the engagement of the right connecting pin 145c and the left connecting hole 146a, and the right connecting hole 146b and the left connecting pin 147a are connected to the second connecting rod 146. The third linkage 147 connected by the reciprocation moves back and forth in the left-right direction as the first linkage 145 reciprocates in the left-right direction. Since the left secondary movable body 139a is connected to the third linkage 147, the left secondary movable body 139a also reciprocates in the left-right direction as the first linkage 145 moves. Further, the tooth portion 151a of the rack member 151 connected to the right auxiliary movable body 139b meshes with the pinion 150 with which the tooth portion 147c of the third linkage 147 meshes with the upper side (FIG. 48). reference). Accordingly, the right sub movable body 139b moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the third linkage 147, and thus the left and right sub movable bodies 139a, 139b move close to each other or move away from each other.

前記第2の駆動部140の動力を副可動体139a,139bに伝達するための連繋機構141を、3本の連杆145,146,147で構成したから、該連繋機構141の構成は簡単でかつ小さなスペースに配設することができる。すなわち、左可動体120において連繋機構141が配設される前記腕部123をコンパクト化して軽量化を図ることができ、連繋機構141に起因する可動基部122と腕部123との連結部に加わる負荷を低減し得る。また、腕部123に複数の副可動体139a,139bを配設することで演出効果を向上し得るもとで、1つの連繋機構141によって一対の副可動体139a,139bを動作するよう構成したから、1つの駆動モータの動力を別々の連繋機構によって各副可動体に伝達する場合に比べ、構成を簡略化して軽量化を図ることができ、連繋機構141に起因する可動基部122と腕部123との連結部に加わる負荷をより低減することが可能となる。   Since the linkage mechanism 141 for transmitting the power of the second drive unit 140 to the sub movable bodies 139a and 139b is composed of three linkages 145, 146 and 147, the linkage mechanism 141 has a simple configuration. And it can arrange | position in a small space. That is, the arm part 123 in which the connecting mechanism 141 is disposed in the left movable body 120 can be made compact and light in weight, and added to the connecting part between the movable base 122 and the arm part 123 caused by the connecting mechanism 141. The load can be reduced. In addition, a plurality of sub movable bodies 139a and 139b are arranged on the arm portion 123, and a pair of sub movable bodies 139a and 139b can be operated by a single connecting mechanism 141 while the effect of the presentation can be improved. Therefore, compared with the case where the power of one drive motor is transmitted to each sub movable body by a separate linkage mechanism, the configuration can be simplified and the weight can be reduced, and the movable base portion 122 and the arm portion caused by the linkage mechanism 141 can be achieved. It is possible to further reduce the load applied to the connecting portion with 123.

前記第1連杆145に第2連杆146を介して連結される第3連杆147に設けられた検出片147dは、前記可動体発光基板154に設けられた副可動体用原位置センサ155で検出するよう構成されている。すなわち、副可動演出装置138においては、連繋機構141にピニオン150およびラック部材151を介して連繋されて作動される右副可動体139bではなく、連繋機構141により直接作動される左副可動体139aの位置を検出するよう構成したので、該両副可動体139a,139bの位置を精度よく検出し得る。   The detection piece 147d provided on the third linkage 147 connected to the first linkage 145 via the second linkage 146 is a sub movable body original position sensor 155 provided on the movable body light emitting substrate 154. Is configured to detect. That is, in the sub movable effect device 138, the left sub movable body 139a that is directly operated by the linkage mechanism 141, not the right sub movable body 139b that is linked to the linkage mechanism 141 via the pinion 150 and the rack member 151. Therefore, the positions of the sub movable bodies 139a and 139b can be detected with high accuracy.

なお、前記左可動体120は、前記待機位置において腕部123に設けた金属片152が、前記第2の上部発光装置108に設けた磁石153で磁力吸着されることで、該左可動体120は待機位置に保持されるので、副可動体139a,139bが動作した際にも左可動体120が移動するのは防止され、意図しない動作が行なわれるのを防ぐことができる。また、左可動体120を常に待機位置に保持するように前記第1の駆動モータ134を駆動制御する必要はなく、該駆動モータ134の負担が増えたり制御系が複雑となるのを防止し得る。   Note that the left movable body 120 is configured such that the metal piece 152 provided on the arm portion 123 at the standby position is magnetically attracted by the magnet 153 provided on the second upper light emitting device 108, so that the left movable body 120. Is held at the standby position, the left movable body 120 is prevented from moving even when the sub movable bodies 139a and 139b are operated, and an unintended operation can be prevented. Further, it is not necessary to drive and control the first drive motor 134 so that the left movable body 120 is always held at the standby position, and it is possible to prevent the load on the drive motor 134 from increasing and the control system from becoming complicated. .

(センサ設置部の作用について)
前記駆動ユニット132の駆動用カバー部材133および外部中継基板161の前側に配設される前記センサ設置部168は、図38,図39または図44に示す如く、裏ユニット19の左対向面部55cおよび駆動用カバー部材133に突設した複数の取付けボス169を介して、センサ設置部168の裏面と駆動用カバー部材133および外部中継基板161の前面との間に所要の空間を存して配設されている。またセンサ設置部168の右端部は、図44または図45に示す如く、前記左可動体120における可動基部122の左端部の前側を覆うように位置しており、該可動基部122が前方に大きく変位するのをセンサ設置部168で規制し得る。すなわち、裏ユニット19に左側部磁気センサ167を配設するためのセンサ設置部168を、可動基部122が前方に変位するのを規制する手段として兼用することで、可動基部122の前方変位を規制する手段を別途設ける必要はなく、左側部磁気センサ167および可動基部122の設置部位に設ける部品点数を低減して構成を簡略化することができ、コストを低減し得る。
(About the operation of the sensor installation part)
As shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 39, or FIG. 44, the sensor installation portion 168 disposed on the front side of the drive cover member 133 and the external relay substrate 161 of the drive unit 132 includes the left facing surface portion 55c of the back unit 19 and A plurality of mounting bosses 169 projecting from the driving cover member 133 are disposed with a required space between the back surface of the sensor installation portion 168 and the front surfaces of the driving cover member 133 and the external relay substrate 161. Has been. 44 or 45, the right end portion of the sensor installation portion 168 is positioned so as to cover the front side of the left end portion of the movable base portion 122 in the left movable body 120, and the movable base portion 122 is greatly increased forward. The displacement can be restricted by the sensor installation unit 168. That is, the sensor installation portion 168 for arranging the left side magnetic sensor 167 in the back unit 19 is also used as a means for restricting the displacement of the movable base 122 forward, thereby restricting the forward displacement of the movable base 122. There is no need to provide a separate means, and the number of components provided at the installation site of the left magnetic sensor 167 and the movable base 122 can be reduced to simplify the configuration, and the cost can be reduced.

また、前述したように左側部磁気センサ167は、その長手方向が上下方向に沿う姿勢で配設され、該左側部磁気センサ167を保持するセンサ設置部168も長手方向が上下方向に沿って延在している。すなわち、センサ設置部168における可動基部122との重なり部168bは、長手方向が可動基部122の往復移動方向に沿って延在しているから、当該重なり部168bによって可動基部122の前方への変位を長い領域に亘って規制することができる。   Further, as described above, the left side magnetic sensor 167 is disposed in such a manner that the longitudinal direction thereof is along the vertical direction, and the sensor installation portion 168 that holds the left side magnetic sensor 167 also extends in the longitudinal direction along the vertical direction. Exist. That is, the overlapping portion 168b of the sensor installation portion 168 with the movable base portion 122 extends in the longitudinal direction along the reciprocating direction of the movable base portion 122, so that the movable base portion 122 is displaced forward by the overlapping portion 168b. Can be regulated over a long region.

前記センサ設置部168における可動基部122との重なり部168bの裏面は、その長手方向の全長に亘って左側から右側に向かうにつれて可動基部122から前側に退避するように傾斜しているから、重なり部168bの裏面が可動基部122の前面と平行な場合に比して、該可動基部122を遊技盤17(板部材18)の前面に近づけて配置することができる。すなわち、動作により演出を行なう左可動体120を可能な限り前側に配置することができ、左可動体120の動作による迫力のある演出効果が期待できる。また実施例では、センサ設置部168の重なり部168bと重なる可動基部122の左端前部に、後方に凹む凹部122bを長手方向に沿って形成しているから、可動基部122をセンサ設置部168に接触することなく更に前側に配置することができ、左可動体120のより迫力のある演出効果が期待できる。   Since the back surface of the overlapping portion 168b with the movable base 122 in the sensor installation portion 168 is inclined so as to retract from the movable base 122 to the front side from the left to the right over the entire length in the longitudinal direction, Compared to the case where the back surface of 168b is parallel to the front surface of the movable base portion 122, the movable base portion 122 can be disposed closer to the front surface of the game board 17 (plate member 18). That is, the left movable body 120 that produces an effect by the operation can be arranged as far as possible, and a powerful effect by the operation of the left movable body 120 can be expected. Further, in the embodiment, since the concave portion 122b recessed backward is formed along the longitudinal direction at the left end front portion of the movable base portion 122 that overlaps the overlapping portion 168b of the sensor placement portion 168, the movable base portion 122 is formed in the sensor placement portion 168. It can arrange | position further to the front side, without contacting, and can expect the more powerful production effect of the left movable body 120. FIG.

前記センサ設置部168は、複数の取付けボス169の前端に取り付けることで、前記左対向面部55cとの間に前記可動基部122の移動空間を確保したもとで、該センサ設置部168に配設される左側部磁気センサ167を前記板部材18の裏面に近接することができる。すなわち、左側部磁気センサ167の検出感度を低くしても、その磁気検出可能範囲として、検出対象となる前記球通過ゲート36や球導入口30aに対する磁石による不正を十分に検出可能な範囲を確保することができ、コストを低減し得る。   The sensor installation portion 168 is disposed on the sensor installation portion 168 with the movement space of the movable base 122 secured between the left opposed surface portion 55c by being attached to the front ends of the plurality of attachment bosses 169. The left side magnetic sensor 167 can be brought close to the back surface of the plate member 18. That is, even if the detection sensitivity of the left side magnetic sensor 167 is lowered, a range in which fraud due to magnets with respect to the sphere passage gate 36 and the sphere inlet 30a to be detected can be sufficiently detected is secured as the magnetic detection range. Can reduce costs.

(左可動演出装置の配線処理の作用について)
前記左可動体120における腕部123の右端部の意匠部123aに配設される可動体発光基板154から導出する発光用配線156は、図46に示す如く、前記ベース腕部124bに設けた第1区画壁126および第2の駆動部140を左可動体120に配設するための前記仕切部材142に設けた第2区画壁142aにより前記連繋機構141が配設される空間とは仕切られた空間を可動基部122側に引き回された後、該可動基部122に配設された前記内部中継基板158に接続される。また、前記副可動演出装置138の第2の駆動部140を構成する第2の駆動モータ143からは、前記仕切部材142の後側から第2駆動用配線157が導出し、該配線157は、仕切部材142における第2区画壁142aで連繋機構141が配設される空間とは仕切られた下側から前記内部中継基板158の前側に引き出されて該基板158に接続される。すなわち、左可動体120に配設された電気部品としての可動体発光基板154および第2の駆動モータ143から導出する発光用配線156および第2駆動用配線157は、何れも区画壁126,142aで連繋機構141が配設される空間とは仕切られた空間を引き回されるから、該配線156,157が連繋機構141に引掛かったり干渉するのを防止し得る。これにより、配線156,157が損傷したり、連繋機構141の動作が阻害されるのを防ぐことができ、前記副可動体139a,139bのを円滑な動作を確保し得る。
(About the effect of wiring processing of the left movable effect device)
As shown in FIG. 46, the light emitting wiring 156 led out from the movable body light emitting substrate 154 disposed in the design portion 123a at the right end of the arm portion 123 in the left movable body 120 is provided in the base arm portion 124b. The first partition wall 126 and the second driving unit 140 are partitioned from the space in which the connection mechanism 141 is disposed by the second partition wall 142a provided in the partition member 142 for disposing the left movable body 120. After the space is routed to the movable base 122 side, the space is connected to the internal relay board 158 disposed on the movable base 122. Further, a second drive wiring 157 is led out from the rear side of the partition member 142 from the second drive motor 143 constituting the second drive unit 140 of the auxiliary movable effect device 138, and the wiring 157 is The space in which the connecting mechanism 141 is disposed by the second partition wall 142a in the partition member 142 is drawn from the lower side partitioned to the front side of the internal relay substrate 158 and connected to the substrate 158. That is, the light emitting wiring 156 and the second driving wiring 157 derived from the movable body light emitting substrate 154 and the second drive motor 143 as electrical components disposed on the left movable body 120 are both partition walls 126 and 142a. Thus, since the space partitioned from the space in which the linkage mechanism 141 is disposed is routed, the wires 156 and 157 can be prevented from being caught or interfered with the linkage mechanism 141. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the wirings 156 and 157 from being damaged and the operation of the linkage mechanism 141 from being hindered, and the secondary movable bodies 139a and 139b can be smoothly operated.

前記内部中継基板158の裏面に設けられた前記内部中継用コネクタ受部159に差込み接続されて前記配線156,157に電気的に接続する中継用配線160は、前記可動基部122に設けられた挿通口122aを介して外部に引き出された後、前記裏ユニット19の左対向面部55cに配設した前記外部中継基板161に接続される。実施例では、左可動体120に配設した可動体発光基板154および第2の駆動モータ143から導出して内部を引き回される配線156,157を、該左可動体120の内部に配設した内部中継基板158に一旦接続し、これら全ての配線156,157に電気的に接続する中継用配線160のみを左可動体120から外部に引き出している。すなわち、個々の配線156,157を左可動体120から外部に引き出して処理する必要はないから、往復移動する左可動体120から引き出されている配線の処理は簡単になる。また、左可動体120から引き出されている配線が、左可動体120やラック128等に接触するのを保護するための構成について、中継用配線160のみを対象として設ければよく、複数の配線を保護するための構成を個々に設ける必要はなく、構成を簡略化してコストを低廉に抑えることができる。   The relay wiring 160 that is plugged into the internal relay connector receiving portion 159 provided on the back surface of the internal relay board 158 and electrically connected to the wirings 156 and 157 is inserted into the movable base 122. After being pulled out through the opening 122a, it is connected to the external relay substrate 161 disposed on the left facing surface portion 55c of the back unit 19. In the embodiment, the movable body light emitting substrate 154 disposed on the left movable body 120 and the wirings 156 and 157 led out from the second drive motor 143 and routed inside are disposed inside the left movable body 120. Once connected to the internal relay board 158, only the relay wiring 160 that is electrically connected to all the wirings 156 and 157 is drawn out from the left movable body 120 to the outside. That is, since it is not necessary to process the individual wirings 156 and 157 from the left movable body 120 to the outside, the processing of the wiring drawn from the left movable body 120 that reciprocates is simplified. In addition, a configuration for protecting the wiring drawn from the left movable body 120 from contacting the left movable body 120, the rack 128, and the like may be provided only for the relay wiring 160, and a plurality of wirings may be provided. It is not necessary to provide a configuration for protecting each of them, and the configuration can be simplified to reduce the cost.

ここで、実施例の左可動体120は、ラック128を用いて上下方向に往復移動する構成であり、該左可動体120の移動範囲を大きくして動作による演出効果を向上する場合は、前記ラック128の寸法を長くする必要がある。そして、ラック128を長くした場合は、該ラック128を安定して配設するために前記可動基部122の寸法も長くすることで(実施例ではラック128と可動基部122とは略同一長さに設定されている)、前記内部中継基板158を配設するスペースを確保することができる。すなわち、左可動体120の動作を大きくするために生じた可動基部122のスペースを利用して内部中継基板158を配設することができ、スペースの有効利用が図られる。また実施例では、内部中継基板158にLED158bを実装して発光基板としても利用しており、可動基部122の内部空間をより有効に利用しているといえる。   Here, the left movable body 120 of the embodiment is configured to reciprocate in the vertical direction using the rack 128, and when the moving range of the left movable body 120 is increased to improve the effect of the operation, It is necessary to increase the size of the rack 128. When the rack 128 is lengthened, the size of the movable base 122 is also increased in order to stably arrange the rack 128 (in the embodiment, the rack 128 and the movable base 122 have substantially the same length). A space for disposing the internal relay board 158 can be secured. That is, the internal relay board 158 can be disposed using the space of the movable base 122 generated to increase the operation of the left movable body 120, and the space can be effectively used. In the embodiment, the LED 158b is mounted on the internal relay board 158 and used as a light emitting board, and it can be said that the internal space of the movable base 122 is used more effectively.

前記内部中継基板158に配設されて前記中継用配線160が接続される内部中継用コネクタ受部159の接続口159aは、可動基部122の挿通口122aに向いて開口しているから(図46参照)、該中継用配線160を挿通口122aまで引き回す際に該配線160を屈曲させる必要はなく、中継用配線160に負荷が加わるのを防止し得る。また挿通口122aは、可動基部122の往復移動方向に沿う方向に開口し、かつ引き出された中継用配線160は前記空間部131内を往復移動方向に沿って引き回されているので(図40参照)、左可動体120の移動時に中継用配線160も空間部131内を往復移動方向に沿って移動することで移動時に加わる負荷を軽減し得る。更に、可動基部122から引き出された中継用配線160が引き出される空間部131は、該可動基部122の往復移動を許容するために設けられたものであるから、中継用配線160を引き回すための専用の空間を確保する必要はなく、構成を簡略化し得る。   The connection port 159a of the internal relay connector receiving portion 159 disposed on the internal relay board 158 and connected to the relay wiring 160 is open toward the insertion port 122a of the movable base 122 (FIG. 46). It is not necessary to bend the wiring 160 when the relay wiring 160 is routed to the insertion port 122a, and a load can be prevented from being applied to the relay wiring 160. The insertion opening 122a opens in a direction along the reciprocating direction of the movable base 122, and the relay wiring 160 drawn out is routed in the space 131 along the reciprocating direction (FIG. 40). (Refer to)) When the left movable body 120 is moved, the relay wiring 160 is also moved in the space 131 along the reciprocating direction so that the load applied during the movement can be reduced. Furthermore, the space 131 from which the relay wiring 160 drawn out from the movable base 122 is drawn is provided to allow the movable base 122 to reciprocate, so that it is dedicated for routing the relay wiring 160. It is not necessary to secure the space, and the configuration can be simplified.

前記可動基部122から前記中継用配線160が外部に引き出される側は、図40に示す如く、左可動体120の待機位置において、作動位置に向く下側であるのに対し、当該左可動体120を動作させる前記第1の駆動部121が配設される駆動ユニット132は可動基部122の下端とは反対の上端側に偏倚して配設されている。すなわち、中継用配線160が左可動体120から外部に引き出される側は第1の駆動部121の配設位置に対して左可動体120の往復移動方向の反対側であり、第1の駆動部121の作動ギヤ137と前記ラック128との噛合部に中継用配線160が臨むことがなく、該配線160が作動ギヤ137とラック128との噛合部に接触したり噛み込まれることはなく、左可動体120の円滑な動作を確保し得ると共に中継用配線160が損傷するのを防ぐことができる。また、前記第1の駆動部121において第1の駆動モータ134で回転駆動される第1駆動ギヤ135および中間ギヤ136は駆動用カバー部材133に収容され、前記ラック128と噛合する作動ギヤ137は、一部のみが駆動用カバー部材133から突出しているのみであるから、これらギヤ群に前記中継用配線160が接触するのも防止される。   As shown in FIG. 40, the side from which the relay wiring 160 is drawn out from the movable base 122 is the lower side facing the operating position in the standby position of the left movable body 120, whereas the left movable body 120. The driving unit 132 in which the first driving unit 121 for operating the first driving unit 121 is disposed is biased toward the upper end side opposite to the lower end of the movable base 122. That is, the side where the relay wiring 160 is drawn out from the left movable body 120 is the opposite side of the left movable body 120 in the reciprocating direction with respect to the arrangement position of the first drive section 121, and the first drive section The relay wiring 160 does not face the meshing portion between the actuating gear 137 of the 121 and the rack 128, and the wiring 160 does not contact or mesh with the meshing portion of the actuating gear 137 and the rack 128. The smooth operation of the movable body 120 can be ensured and the relay wiring 160 can be prevented from being damaged. The first drive gear 135 and the intermediate gear 136 that are rotationally driven by the first drive motor 134 in the first drive unit 121 are accommodated in the drive cover member 133, and the operation gear 137 that meshes with the rack 128 is Since only a part protrudes from the drive cover member 133, the relay wiring 160 is also prevented from contacting these gear groups.

前記外部中継基板161は、図39に示す如く、前面が前記ラック128より前側に位置するよう設けられている。また、前記可動基部122における該外部中継基板161より前側に位置する前記挿通口122aから引き出された前記中継用配線160は、外部中継基板161の前面に配設した外部中継用コネクタ受部162に接続されている。すなわち、外部中継基板161を利用して中継用配線160の引き回し空間とラック128とを仕切ることができるので、中継用配線160がラック128と接触したり引っ掛かるのを防止することができ、左可動体120の円滑な動作を確保し得ると共に中継用配線160が損傷するのを防ぐことができる。また、中継用配線160の引き回し空間とラック128とを仕切る部材として外部中継基板161を用いることで、専用の仕切り部材等を必要とせず、構成を簡略化してコストの低減を図り得る。   As shown in FIG. 39, the external relay substrate 161 is provided so that the front surface is located in front of the rack 128. In addition, the relay wiring 160 drawn out from the insertion opening 122a located on the front side of the external relay board 161 in the movable base 122 is connected to the external relay connector receiving part 162 disposed on the front surface of the external relay board 161. It is connected. That is, since the routing space of the relay wiring 160 and the rack 128 can be partitioned using the external relay board 161, the relay wiring 160 can be prevented from coming into contact with or hooked to the rack 128 and can be moved to the left. The smooth operation of the body 120 can be ensured and the relay wiring 160 can be prevented from being damaged. Further, by using the external relay substrate 161 as a member that partitions the routing space of the relay wiring 160 and the rack 128, a dedicated partition member or the like is not required, and the configuration can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

前記外部中継基板161の前側を引き回されている前記中継用配線160は、図38または図40に示す如く、前記配線ガイド166と外部中継基板161との間に収容されて、左可動体120が往復移動する際に該中継用配線160が前側および左側方に変位するのは規制される。すなわち、中継用配線160が前側へ変位して板部材18や該板部材18に配設される各種部品等に接触することで、左可動体120の円滑な移動を阻害するのを防止し得る。また、外部中継基板161に接続される前記集約中継用配線164の引き回し空間と中継用配線160の引き回し空間が配線ガイド166により仕切られているから、中継用配線160が集約中継用配線164と干渉して左可動体120の円滑な移動を阻害するのは防止される。   The relay wiring 160 routed in front of the external relay board 161 is accommodated between the wiring guide 166 and the external relay board 161 as shown in FIG. 38 or FIG. The reciprocating movement of the relay wiring 160 is restricted from being displaced forward and leftward. That is, the relay wiring 160 can be prevented from obstructing the smooth movement of the left movable body 120 by being displaced forward and contacting the plate member 18 and various components disposed on the plate member 18. . Further, since the routing space of the aggregation relay wiring 164 connected to the external relay substrate 161 and the routing space of the relay wiring 160 are partitioned by the wiring guide 166, the relay wiring 160 interferes with the aggregation relay wiring 164. Thus, hindering the smooth movement of the left movable body 120 is prevented.

前記第1の駆動部121を構成する前記第1の駆動モータ134に一端が接続する第1駆動用配線163は、図38に示す如く、駆動用カバー部材133の前側から外部中継基板161の前側に引き回されて、該外部中継基板161の前面に設けられる駆動用コネクタ受部161aに接続されている。駆動用カバー部材133の前面および外部中継基板161の前面は、何れも前記ラック128より前側に位置しているから、引き回し途中の第1駆動用配線163がラック128側に変位することはなく、第1駆動用配線163が作動ギヤ137とラック128との噛合部またはラック128と接触したり引っ掛かるのを防止することができ、左可動体120の円滑な動作を確保すると共に第1駆動用配線163が損傷するのを防ぐことができる。   As shown in FIG. 38, the first drive wiring 163 having one end connected to the first drive motor 134 constituting the first drive unit 121 is connected to the front side of the external relay substrate 161 from the front side of the drive cover member 133. Is connected to a driving connector receiving portion 161 a provided on the front surface of the external relay substrate 161. Since the front surface of the drive cover member 133 and the front surface of the external relay substrate 161 are both located on the front side of the rack 128, the first drive wiring 163 being routed is not displaced toward the rack 128 side. It is possible to prevent the first drive wiring 163 from coming into contact with or engaging with the meshing portion of the operating gear 137 and the rack 128 or the rack 128, ensuring smooth operation of the left movable body 120 and the first drive wiring. 163 can be prevented from being damaged.

なお、前記第1駆動用配線163と第1の駆動モータ134との接続位置は、図40に示すように、該第1の駆動モータ134を挟んでラック128の配設側とは反対側になっているから、第1駆動用配線163の第1の駆動モータ134からの引き回し初期において該第1駆動用配線163がラック128の配設側(可動基部122の移動領域側)に変位するのは抑制される。また、第1駆動用配線163は、引き回し途中において前記駆動用カバー部材133に配設した前記配線フック133dに係止されており、該配線フック133dによっても第1駆動用配線163がラック128の配設側(可動基部122の移動領域側)に変位するのは抑制される。すなわち、第1の駆動モータ134と外部中継基板161との間を引き回される第1駆動用配線163は、ラック128の配設側であって可動基部122の移動領域側へ変位するのは抑制されているから、該第1駆動用配線163がラック128や左可動体120に接触したり引っ掛かるのを防止して、左可動体120の円滑な動作を確保すると共に第1駆動用配線163が損傷するのをより確実に防ぐことができる。   As shown in FIG. 40, the connection position between the first drive wiring 163 and the first drive motor 134 is on the opposite side of the rack 128 with the first drive motor 134 interposed therebetween. Therefore, at the initial stage of routing of the first drive wiring 163 from the first drive motor 134, the first drive wiring 163 is displaced to the arrangement side of the rack 128 (the moving region side of the movable base 122). Is suppressed. The first drive wiring 163 is locked to the wiring hook 133d disposed on the drive cover member 133 in the course of routing, and the first drive wiring 163 is also connected to the rack 128 by the wiring hook 133d. Displacement to the arrangement side (the moving region side of the movable base 122) is suppressed. That is, the first drive wiring 163 routed between the first drive motor 134 and the external relay board 161 is displaced to the moving region side of the movable base 122 on the side where the rack 128 is disposed. Therefore, the first drive wiring 163 is prevented from coming into contact with or caught on the rack 128 or the left movable body 120 to ensure smooth operation of the left movable body 120 and the first drive wiring 163. Can be more reliably prevented from being damaged.

前記外部中継基板161の前側に離間して、前記左側部磁気センサ167を裏ユニット19に配設するためのセンサ設置部168が配設されており、前記第1駆動用配線163は、図38に示す如く、該センサ設置部168と外部中継基板161との間の空間を引き回されている。従って、第1駆動用配線163が前方に大きく変位するのをセンサ設置部168で規制することができ、前記板部材18の裏側に裏ユニット19を取り付けるに際し、裏ユニット19に配設される他の部材と板部材18との間に第1駆動用配線163が挟み込まれるのを防止し得る。   A sensor installation portion 168 for disposing the left magnetic sensor 167 on the back unit 19 is disposed apart from the front side of the external relay substrate 161, and the first drive wiring 163 is configured as shown in FIG. As shown, the space between the sensor installation portion 168 and the external relay substrate 161 is routed. Accordingly, the first drive wiring 163 can be largely displaced forward by the sensor installation portion 168, and when the back unit 19 is attached to the back side of the plate member 18, It is possible to prevent the first drive wiring 163 from being sandwiched between this member and the plate member 18.

前記外部中継基板161における外部中継用コネクタ受部162の配設位置より左側に設けた集約コネクタ受部161bに接続する集約中継用配線164は、図40に示す如く、前記配線ガイド166を挟んで前記可動基部122の移動領域とは反対側を引き回された後に、前記裏ユニット19の裏側に引き出されて前記裏中継基板61に接続される。すなわち、集約中継用配線164は、左可動体120の移動領域から離間する位置を引き回すようにしているから、該配線164が左可動体120に接触したり引っ掛かるのを防止することができ、左可動体120の円滑な動作が阻害されたり集約中継用配線164が損傷するのを防ぐことができる。また集約中継用配線164は、前記入賞口用発光装置85の裏側を引き回された後に裏ユニット19の裏側に引き出されるよう構成してあるから、該集約中継用配線164が入賞口用発光装置85より前側に臨むことはなく、前記板部材18の裏側に裏ユニット19を取り付けるに際し、入賞口用発光装置85と板部材18との間に集約中継用配線164が挟み込まれるのを防止し得る。   As shown in FIG. 40, the aggregation relay wiring 164 connected to the aggregation connector receiving portion 161b provided on the left side of the position where the external relay connector receiving portion 162 is disposed on the external relay board 161, with the wiring guide 166 interposed therebetween. After the side opposite to the moving region of the movable base portion 122 is drawn, it is pulled out to the back side of the back unit 19 and connected to the back relay substrate 61. That is, since the aggregation relay wiring 164 is routed around a position away from the moving region of the left movable body 120, the wiring 164 can be prevented from coming into contact with or caught on the left movable body 120. It is possible to prevent the smooth operation of the movable body 120 from being hindered or the aggregation relay wiring 164 from being damaged. Further, since the aggregation relay wiring 164 is configured to be drawn out to the back side of the back unit 19 after being routed on the back side of the winning opening light emitting device 85, the aggregation relay wiring 164 is configured to be drawn out to the winning opening light emitting device. 85, and when the back unit 19 is attached to the back side of the plate member 18, it is possible to prevent the collective relay wiring 164 from being sandwiched between the winning hole light emitting device 85 and the plate member 18. .

(上部発光装置の作用について)
前記装飾部材28の上部光透過部31に対応して裏ユニット19に配設される前記第1の上部発光装置107は、図32に示す如く、前記待機位置に臨む左可動体120における腕部123および意匠部123aより前方に位置して、該左可動体120が作動位置に向けて移動しても腕部123および意匠部123aと干渉しない関係になっている。すなわち、左可動体120が待機位置と作動位置との間を往復移動する範囲において、該左可動体120と第1の上部発光装置107とは干渉することはなく、該左可動体120の配設位置に左右されることなく装飾部材28の上部位置を第1の上部発光装置107で照明することができる。言い替えれば、発光装置107を左可動体120の移動領域より前側に位置させることで、装飾部材28を照明する発光装置の配設位置の自由度が高くなり、装飾部材28の必要箇所を効果的に照明して遊技の興趣を向上し得る。また実施例では、装飾部材28を照明する発光装置107および動作により演出を行なう左可動体120を、何れも裏ユニット19に配設するものであるから、前記図柄表示装置13の大型化(装飾部材28の窓口28aの大型化)にも対応し得るものである。更に、左可動体120が待機位置に臨む状態で、腕部123および意匠部123aの一部が第1の上部発光装置107と前後の関係で重なることで、該左可動体120の移動範囲を広くすることができる。
(About the action of the upper light-emitting device)
The first upper light emitting device 107 disposed in the back unit 19 corresponding to the upper light transmitting portion 31 of the decorative member 28 includes an arm portion in the left movable body 120 facing the standby position as shown in FIG. 123 and the design portion 123a are positioned in front of the arm portion 123 and the design portion 123a even when the left movable body 120 moves toward the operating position. That is, the left movable body 120 and the first upper light emitting device 107 do not interfere with each other in the range in which the left movable body 120 reciprocates between the standby position and the operating position. The upper position of the decorative member 28 can be illuminated by the first upper light emitting device 107 without depending on the installation position. In other words, by positioning the light emitting device 107 in front of the moving region of the left movable body 120, the degree of freedom of the arrangement position of the light emitting device that illuminates the decorative member 28 is increased, and the necessary portions of the decorative member 28 are effectively disposed. Illuminated to improve the fun of gaming. In the embodiment, since the light emitting device 107 that illuminates the decorative member 28 and the left movable body 120 that produces an effect by the operation are all disposed in the back unit 19, the design of the symbol display device 13 is increased (decoration). The size of the window 28a of the member 28 can be increased. Furthermore, with the left movable body 120 facing the standby position, the arm portion 123 and a part of the design portion 123a overlap with the first upper light emitting device 107 in the front-rear relationship, so that the movement range of the left movable body 120 is increased. Can be wide.

前記第1の上部発光装置107は、裏ユニット19の前端より前方に位置し、該裏ユニット19を前記板部材18の裏側に取り付けた際には、図34に示す如く、前記装飾部材28に設けた上部光透過部31の収容部114,115に後側から収容される。そして、第1の上部発光装置107のLED112aを発光することで、第1の収容部114の前部に設けたレンズ体114a、および第2の収容部115の前部に設けたスリット115aを介して装飾部材28の前方が照明される。このように、第1の上部発光装置107を上部光透過部31の収容部114,115に収容することで、当該上部光透過部31を、装飾部材28の他の部位と区分して照明することができ、上部光透過部31での発光を際だたせて演出効果を向上し得る。また、第1の上部発光装置107が裏ユニット19の前端より前方に位置しているから、該上部発光装置107はレンズ体114aやスリット115aに近接し、該レンズ体114aを介して前方に照射される光や、スリット115aを介して前方に照射される光の度合を強くすることができ、上部光透過部31での発光をより際だたせ得る。   The first upper light emitting device 107 is located in front of the front end of the back unit 19, and when the back unit 19 is attached to the back side of the plate member 18, as shown in FIG. It is accommodated in the accommodating portions 114 and 115 of the provided upper light transmitting portion 31 from the rear side. Then, by emitting the LED 112a of the first upper light emitting device 107, the lens body 114a provided in the front part of the first housing part 114 and the slit 115a provided in the front part of the second housing part 115 are used. Thus, the front of the decorative member 28 is illuminated. Thus, by accommodating the first upper light emitting device 107 in the accommodating portions 114 and 115 of the upper light transmitting portion 31, the upper light transmitting portion 31 is illuminated separately from other portions of the decorative member 28. It is possible to enhance the production effect by making the light emitted from the upper light transmission part 31 stand out. Further, since the first upper light emitting device 107 is located in front of the front end of the back unit 19, the upper light emitting device 107 is close to the lens body 114a and the slit 115a and irradiates forward through the lens body 114a. The intensity of the light emitted and the light irradiated forward through the slit 115a can be increased, and the light emitted from the upper light transmission part 31 can be more pronounced.

前記待機位置において左可動体120の腕部123および意匠部123aの後方には、図32に示す如く、前記第2の上部発光装置108が位置しており、該第2の上部発光装置108は、待機位置の左可動体120によって略隠れた状態となっている。そして、左可動体120が図33に示すように作動位置に移動すると、第2の上部発光装置108は前側に露出し、左可動体120の存在しなくなった前方を、該上部発光装置108によって照明することができる。   As shown in FIG. 32, the second upper light emitting device 108 is positioned behind the arm portion 123 and the design portion 123a of the left movable body 120 at the standby position, as shown in FIG. The left movable body 120 at the standby position is substantially hidden. When the left movable body 120 moves to the operating position as shown in FIG. 33, the second upper light emitting device 108 is exposed to the front side, and the front side where the left movable body 120 does not exist is moved by the upper light emitting device 108. Can be illuminated.

ここで、待機位置の左可動体120の後方に隠れている第2の上部発光装置108を発光した際には、その光が全て左可動体120で遮られるものではなく、該左可動体120(腕部123および意匠部123a)の周囲から前方に漏れる。すなわち、待機位置の左可動体120を挟んで前後に位置する両上部発光装置107,108を発光させた際には、左可動体120の前方に位置する第1の上部発光装置107からの強い光と、左可動体120の後方に隠れている第2の上部発光装置108の左可動体120の周方から漏れる弱い光とでのコントラストによって、光による演出効果の向上を期待し得る。   Here, when light is emitted from the second upper light emitting device 108 hidden behind the left movable body 120 at the standby position, the left movable body 120 does not completely block the light. Leak forward from the periphery of the arm portion 123 and the design portion 123a. In other words, when the upper light emitting devices 107 and 108 positioned forward and backward with the left movable body 120 in the standby position sandwiched, the strong light from the first upper light emitting device 107 positioned in front of the left movable body 120 is strong. The effect of light can be expected to be improved by the contrast between the light and the weak light leaking from the periphery of the left movable body 120 of the second upper light emitting device 108 hidden behind the left movable body 120.

前述したように第1の上部発光装置107の第1発光基板112は、前記第2の上部発光装置108の第2発光基板116に接続され、更に前記側部発光基板109、隅部発光基板110および裏中継基板61に中継されて前記統括制御装置59に接続されている。すなわち、第1の上部発光装置107と統括制御装置59との間を複数の基板で中継することで、配線の長さを短かくでき、配線処理に係る構成の簡略化を図り得る。また、第1発光基板112と第2発光基板116とを接続する配線は、前記第1の上部発光装置107と第2の上部発光装置108との間に画成される可動体用空間118の上側を画成する突出面部117bの上側を引き回されるようになっているから、該配線が左可動体120に干渉することはなく、該左可動体120の動作を阻害することはない。   As described above, the first light emitting substrate 112 of the first upper light emitting device 107 is connected to the second light emitting substrate 116 of the second upper light emitting device 108, and the side light emitting substrate 109 and the corner light emitting substrate 110 are further connected. The relay relay board 61 is connected to the overall control device 59. That is, by relaying between the first upper light emitting device 107 and the overall control device 59 with a plurality of substrates, the length of the wiring can be shortened, and the configuration related to the wiring processing can be simplified. In addition, the wiring connecting the first light emitting substrate 112 and the second light emitting substrate 116 is a movable body space 118 defined between the first upper light emitting device 107 and the second upper light emitting device 108. Since the upper side of the protruding surface portion 117b that defines the upper side is routed, the wiring does not interfere with the left movable body 120, and the operation of the left movable body 120 is not hindered.

前記左可動体120の意匠部123aには、前方に位置する装飾覆い体127を照明可能な可動体発光基板154が配設されている。装飾覆い体127は、相互に近接した待機位置に臨む前記副可動体139a,139bで前方が覆われており、該副可動体139a,139bが相互に離間した作動位置に移動した際に、該装飾覆い体127の一部が前側に露出する。従って、副可動体139a,139bが作動位置に移動した際に、前記可動体発光基板154のLED154aを発光することで、両副可動体139a,139bの間に露出する装飾覆い体127が照明され、発光による演出効果の向上が期待し得る。   In the design portion 123 a of the left movable body 120, a movable body light emitting substrate 154 that can illuminate the decorative cover body 127 positioned in the front is disposed. The front of the decorative cover 127 is covered with the auxiliary movable bodies 139a and 139b facing the standby positions close to each other, and when the auxiliary movable bodies 139a and 139b move to the operation positions separated from each other, A part of the decorative cover 127 is exposed to the front side. Accordingly, when the sub movable bodies 139a and 139b move to the operating position, the decorative cover 127 exposed between the sub movable bodies 139a and 139b is illuminated by emitting the LED 154a of the movable body light-emitting substrate 154. It can be expected that the production effect by light emission is improved.

なお、前記第1の上部発光装置107の取付け部となる前記延出部117cは、第2の上部発光装置108を構成するカバー体117に設けられているから、第1の上部発光装置107を取り付けるための部分を前記裏ユニット19に別途設ける必要はない。すなわち、大型の裏ユニット19の構造が複雑になって製造コストが嵩むのを抑制し得ると共に、設計変更にも容易に対応し得る。   The extending portion 117c, which is a mounting portion for the first upper light emitting device 107, is provided on the cover body 117 that constitutes the second upper light emitting device 108. It is not necessary to separately provide a portion for attachment to the back unit 19. That is, it is possible to suppress the increase in manufacturing cost due to the complicated structure of the large back unit 19, and it is possible to easily cope with a design change.

(裏ユニットの基板設置部の作用について)
前記裏ユニット19の下部構造体53に設けた中基板設置部60に対し、裏中継基板61を取り付けるには、裏中継基板61の回路面を中基板設置部60の当接支持部62に向けた姿勢で、該当接支持部62の下端縁に設けた複数の前記係合部63に裏中継基板61の下端縁を係合する。そして、該裏中継基板61の上端側を当接支持部62に向けて近接することで、該当接支持部62の上端縁に設けた前記弾性フック64に裏中継基板61が当接する。該裏中継基板61を更に移動することで、弾性フック64が弾性変形しつつ裏中継基板61の移動を許容し、該裏中継基板61の回路面が当接支持部62の端部に当接した状態で、弾性フック64が弾性復帰して該弾性フック64の爪部64aが裏中継基板61の上端縁側の実装面に当接することで、図22に示すように当該裏中継基板61は中基板設置部60に取り付けられる。
(About the operation of the board installation part of the back unit)
In order to attach the back relay board 61 to the middle board installation part 60 provided in the lower structure 53 of the back unit 19, the circuit surface of the back relay board 61 faces the contact support part 62 of the middle board installation part 60. In this posture, the lower end edge of the back relay substrate 61 is engaged with the plurality of engaging portions 63 provided on the lower end edge of the corresponding support portion 62. Then, the back relay substrate 61 comes into contact with the elastic hook 64 provided at the upper edge of the contact support portion 62 by bringing the upper end side of the back relay substrate 61 close to the contact support portion 62. By further moving the back relay substrate 61, the elastic hook 64 is allowed to move while the elastic hook 64 is elastically deformed, and the circuit surface of the back relay substrate 61 contacts the end of the contact support portion 62. In this state, the elastic hook 64 is elastically restored, and the claw portion 64a of the elastic hook 64 comes into contact with the mounting surface on the upper edge side of the back relay board 61, so that the back relay board 61 is in the middle as shown in FIG. It is attached to the substrate installation part 60.

前記中基板設置部60に取り付けられた裏中継基板61に設けたコネクタ受部61aに一端が接続するケーブルYの他端を、中基板設置部60より上方に配設されている前記統括制御装置59に接続することで、当該中基板設置部60に接続された前記可動演出装置105,106,138や発光装置39,85,107,108や発光基板109,110,111,154,158等の各種電気部品と統括制御装置59とが電気的に接続される。前記ケーブルYを統括制御装置59に接続するに際し、該ケーブルYを上側に向けて引っ張ると、裏中継基板61も上側に引っ張られ、前記弾性フック64が弾性変形して爪部64aが裏中継基板61から外れるおそれがある。   The overall control device in which the other end of the cable Y, one end of which is connected to the connector receiving portion 61a provided on the back relay board 61 attached to the middle board installation section 60, is arranged above the middle board installation section 60. 59, the movable effect devices 105, 106, 138, the light emitting devices 39, 85, 107, 108, the light emitting substrates 109, 110, 111, 154, 158, etc. connected to the middle substrate installation unit 60 are connected. Various electrical components and the overall control device 59 are electrically connected. When the cable Y is connected to the overall control device 59, if the cable Y is pulled upward, the back relay board 61 is also pulled upward, the elastic hook 64 is elastically deformed, and the claw portion 64a becomes the back relay board. There is a risk that it will deviate from 61.

しかしながら、実施例のパチンコ機10では、図21または図26に示すように、前記中基板設置部60の当接支持部62における上側の支持壁62aに、裏中継基板61の上端縁側の周端に当接可能な突部66を設けているから、前述したようにケーブルYによって裏中継基板61が上側に引っ張られた際には、該裏中継基板61の上端周縁が突部66に当接して移動が規制される。すなわち、弾性フック64の係合状態を解除する方向へ該弾性フック64を弾性変形する裏中継基板61の動きは突部66で規制され、中基板設置部60から裏中継基板61が脱落するのを防止し得る。また突部66は、弾性フック64を挟む左右両側に夫々設けられているから、前記ケーブルYを左右方向の斜め上側に向けて引っ張った際にも、裏中継基板61の移動を確実に規制して、中基板設置部60から裏中継基板61が脱落するのを確実に防ぐことができる。   However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21 or FIG. 26, the peripheral edge on the upper edge side of the back relay board 61 is placed on the upper support wall 62 a in the contact support part 62 of the middle board installation part 60. Therefore, when the back relay board 61 is pulled upward by the cable Y as described above, the upper edge of the back relay board 61 comes into contact with the protrusion 66. Movement is restricted. That is, the movement of the back relay board 61 that elastically deforms the elastic hook 64 in the direction to release the engagement state of the elastic hook 64 is restricted by the protrusion 66, and the back relay board 61 falls off from the middle board installation part 60. Can prevent. Further, since the protrusions 66 are provided on both the left and right sides of the elastic hook 64, the movement of the back relay board 61 is surely restricted even when the cable Y is pulled obliquely upward in the left-right direction. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the back relay board 61 from dropping from the middle board installation part 60.

ここで、基板設置部に対して複数の弾性フックを左右に離間して設けることで、ケーブルが引っ張られた際に中継基板を介して弾性フックに加わる力が分散して各弾性フックの変形量が小さくなり、基板設置部から中継基板が脱落し難くなるものの、この場合は中継基板を着脱する際に複数の弾性フックを弾性変形させる等の操作が必要となって作業性が低下する。これに対して実施例では、突部66によって裏中継基板61の移動を規制して確実に裏中継基板61の中基板設置部60からの脱落を防止し得るから、複数の弾性フック64を設ける必要はなく、弾性フック64の増加による着脱時の作業性の低下は発生しない。   Here, by providing a plurality of elastic hooks apart from the left and right with respect to the board installation portion, the force applied to the elastic hooks via the relay board when the cable is pulled is dispersed, and the deformation amount of each elastic hook However, in this case, an operation such as elastically deforming a plurality of elastic hooks is required when the relay board is attached or detached, thereby reducing workability. On the other hand, in the embodiment, the movement of the back relay board 61 can be regulated by the protrusions 66 to reliably prevent the back relay board 61 from falling out of the middle board setting portion 60. Therefore, a plurality of elastic hooks 64 are provided. There is no need, and workability at the time of attachment / detachment due to an increase in the elastic hook 64 does not occur.

前記突部66における当接支持部62の端部からの突出寸法は、図22に示す如く、当接支持部62に回路面が当接した裏中継基板61の実装面より後方に突出する高さに設定されているから、前記ケーブルYを後方斜め上側に向けて引っ張ることで、裏中継基板61の上端部側の回路面が当接支持部62から浮き上がったとしても、突部66によって裏中継基板61の移動を確実に規制して、中基板設置部60から裏中継基板61が脱落するのを確実に防止し得る。なお、中基板設置部60から裏中継基板61を取り外す際において、前記弾性フック64を裏中継基板61の上端縁から離間するよう上側に向けて弾性変形した状態で、当該裏中継基板61の中基板設置部60から離間する後方への移動は突部66によって規制されず、該裏中継基板61の取り外しに支障を来たすことはない。   As shown in FIG. 22, the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 66 from the end of the contact support portion 62 is a height that protrudes rearward from the mounting surface of the back relay substrate 61 in which the circuit surface contacts the contact support portion 62. Therefore, even if the circuit surface on the upper end portion side of the back relay board 61 is lifted from the contact support portion 62 by pulling the cable Y rearward and obliquely upward, the back side is projected by the protrusion 66. The movement of the relay substrate 61 is surely restricted, and the back relay substrate 61 can be reliably prevented from falling off from the middle substrate installation portion 60. When removing the back relay board 61 from the middle board installation part 60, the elastic hook 64 is elastically deformed upward so as to be separated from the upper edge of the back relay board 61, and the inside of the back relay board 61 is The rearward movement away from the board installation part 60 is not restricted by the protrusion 66, and the removal of the back relay board 61 is not hindered.

前記突部66は、図21に示す如く、前記図柄表示装置13の下端縁を位置決めする下側の位置決め突部57と当接支持部62および下対向面部55bとの間に画成された空間67を引き回される表示器用配線97が後方に移動するのを規制する規制手段としても機能している。すなわち、裏ユニット19の裏側において、中基板設置部60から裏中継基板61が脱落するのを防止する手段と、裏ユニット19の裏側を引き回される表示器用配線97を移動規制する手段とを別々に設ける必要はなく、裏ユニット19の構成を簡略化してコストの低減に寄与し得る。   As shown in FIG. 21, the protrusion 66 is a space defined between a lower positioning protrusion 57 for positioning the lower end edge of the symbol display device 13, the contact support portion 62, and the lower facing surface portion 55b. It also functions as a restricting means for restricting the indicator wiring 97 routed around 67 from moving backward. That is, on the back side of the back unit 19, there are means for preventing the back relay board 61 from dropping from the middle board setting part 60 and means for restricting movement of the display wiring 97 routed around the back side of the back unit 19. There is no need to provide them separately, and the configuration of the back unit 19 can be simplified to contribute to cost reduction.

(右可動演出装置の作用について)
次に、前記裏ユニット19に配設された前記右可動演出装置106に関する作用に関して説明する。前記統括制御装置59からの制御信号に基づいて前記右可動演出装置106の駆動モータ178が駆動されると、前記従動ギア205を介して前記カム板195が支軸195aを中心に回転される。前記可動部材180(揺動可動体181)が第1位置にある状態では、前記カム板195の回転に伴って該カム板195に設けた連繋軸197に枢支された作動杆200が下方に引き下げられて、前記揺動可動体181が前記第1の回転連結軸172を中心に第1位置から第2位置に向けて揺動される。また、前記揺動可動体181が第2位置にある状態では、前記カム板195の回転に伴って該カム板195に設けた連繋軸197に枢支された作動杆200が上方に引き上げられて、前記揺動可動体181が前記第1の回転連結軸172を中心に第1位置から第2位置に向けて揺動される。このように、前記図柄表示装置13や発光装置39,85,107,108および発光基板109,110,111,154,158の各LED等を制御する統括制御装置59の制御信号に基づいて前記右可動演出装置106の駆動モータ178を駆動するようにしたことで、図柄表示装置13で行なわれる図柄表示演出や各LEDの発光による発光演出に関連付けた演出を右可動演出装置106の可動部材180で行なうことができ、相乗的な演出効果を実現し得る。また実施例では、棒形状に形成された揺動可動体181の一方端部が設置部材170に枢支され、該揺動可動体181の他方端部に装飾可動体185が枢支されているから、当該揺動可動体181の揺動時における装飾可動体185の移動範囲も大きくでき、可動部材180の動作によるインパクトが高められて、遊技に対する興趣の向上を図っている。
(About the action of the right movable effect device)
Next, the operation relating to the right movable effect device 106 disposed in the back unit 19 will be described. When the drive motor 178 of the right movable effect device 106 is driven based on a control signal from the overall control device 59, the cam plate 195 is rotated around the support shaft 195a via the driven gear 205. When the movable member 180 (swinging movable body 181) is in the first position, the operating rod 200 pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 197 provided on the cam plate 195 as the cam plate 195 rotates is moved downward. By being pulled down, the swing movable body 181 swings from the first position toward the second position around the first rotation connecting shaft 172. When the swing movable body 181 is in the second position, the operating rod 200 pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 197 provided on the cam plate 195 is pulled upward as the cam plate 195 rotates. The swingable movable body 181 is swung from the first position toward the second position about the first rotation connecting shaft 172. As described above, the right display is performed based on the control signal of the overall control device 59 that controls the LEDs of the symbol display device 13, the light emitting devices 39, 85, 107, and 108 and the light emitting substrates 109, 110, 111, 154, and 158. By driving the drive motor 178 of the movable effect device 106, the movable member 180 of the right movable effect device 106 provides effects associated with the symbol display effect performed by the symbol display device 13 and the light emission effect by the light emission of each LED. It can be performed and a synergistic production effect can be realized. In the embodiment, one end of the swing movable body 181 formed in a bar shape is pivotally supported by the installation member 170, and the decorative movable body 185 is pivotally supported by the other end of the swing movable body 181. Therefore, the movement range of the decorative movable body 185 when the rocking movable body 181 is swung can be increased, and the impact of the operation of the movable member 180 is increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

ここで、前記揺動可動体181は、前記第1の回転連結軸172から偏倚した位置に前記作動杆200を連結して揺動可動体181を吊り下げるよう構成したから、可動部材180の全体に掛かる荷重の一部が作動杆200で支持される。すなわち、前記可動部材180(揺動可動体181および装飾可動体185)の荷重は、前記第1の回転連結軸172と作動杆200とに分散して受け止められる。従って、前記可動部材180を揺動可能に支持する第1の回転連結軸172に掛かる負荷が軽減されるから、該第1の回転連結軸172の構成を簡略にして装置の大型化やコストの増大を防止できる。特に、前記揺動可動体181が左方向(裏ユニット19の開口部19a側)に傾倒した第2位置に揺動可動体181が揺動される場合のように、該揺動可動体181の傾斜角度が大きくなっても、作動杆200が揺動可動体181を吊り下げるよう支持しているから、第1の回転連結軸172に掛かる負荷を効果的に軽減し得る。   Here, since the swingable movable body 181 is configured to connect the operating rod 200 to a position deviated from the first rotary connecting shaft 172 and suspend the swingable movable body 181, the entire movable member 180. A part of the load applied to is supported by the operating rod 200. That is, the load of the movable member 180 (the swing movable body 181 and the decorative movable body 185) is received by being distributed to the first rotary connecting shaft 172 and the operating rod 200. Accordingly, since the load applied to the first rotary connecting shaft 172 that supports the movable member 180 so as to be swingable is reduced, the configuration of the first rotary connecting shaft 172 can be simplified to increase the size and cost of the apparatus. Increase can be prevented. In particular, as in the case where the swing movable body 181 swings to the second position where the swing movable body 181 tilts leftward (on the opening 19a side of the back unit 19), Even when the inclination angle increases, the operating rod 200 supports the swingable movable body 181 so that the load applied to the first rotary connecting shaft 172 can be effectively reduced.

実施例の右可動演出装置106は、第1位置に揺動可動体181を保持した状態で、該揺動可動体181および装飾可動体185を含めた可動部材180の全体の重心が第1の回転連結軸172を通る鉛直線L1よりも、当該揺動可動体181の第1位置から第2位置への傾倒方向の前側に位置するよう構成してある。このため、第1位置に揺動可動体181を保持した状態では、可動部材180(揺動可動体181および装飾可動体185)の自重により第1位置から第2位置に向けて揺動する力が作用し、第1位置から第2位置に揺動する際に要する駆動モータ178の駆動力を軽減でき、右可動演出装置106の駆動モータ178としてより小型のものを採用可能となる。また、前記揺動可動体181は、長手方向の中間位置よりも先端側(装飾可動体185を支持する端部側)に第2の回転連結軸202を介して前記作動杆200が連結されている。このように、前記作動杆200を、前記揺動可動体181を設置部材170に枢支する第1の回転連結軸172から離間した先端側に偏倚して連結し、駆動モータ178の駆動時に作動杆200を引き上げて揺動可動体181を揺動することで、揺動可動体181における第1の回転連結軸172を駆動モータで直接駆動する構成に較べて、駆動モータ178に掛かる負荷を大幅に軽減できる。従って、第2位置に傾倒した揺動可動体181を第1位置に引き上げる際に要する駆動モータ178の駆動力を軽減でき、駆動モータ178の小型化を図り得る。   The right movable effect device 106 of the embodiment has the first center of gravity of the movable member 180 including the swing movable body 181 and the decorative movable body 185 in a state where the swing movable body 181 is held at the first position. The swing movable body 181 is configured to be positioned on the front side in the tilting direction from the first position to the second position with respect to the vertical line L1 passing through the rotation connecting shaft 172. Therefore, in the state where the swing movable body 181 is held at the first position, the force swinging from the first position toward the second position due to the weight of the movable member 180 (the swing movable body 181 and the decorative movable body 185). As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 178 required to swing from the first position to the second position can be reduced, and a smaller driving motor 178 for the right movable effect device 106 can be employed. The swing movable body 181 is connected to the operating rod 200 via a second rotary connecting shaft 202 on the tip side (the end side supporting the decorative movable body 185) from the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. Yes. In this way, the operating rod 200 is biased and connected to the distal end side separated from the first rotary connecting shaft 172 that pivotally supports the swing movable body 181 on the installation member 170, and operates when the drive motor 178 is driven. The load applied to the drive motor 178 is greatly increased by pulling up the rod 200 and swinging the swing movable body 181 as compared with the configuration in which the first rotary connecting shaft 172 of the swing movable body 181 is directly driven by the drive motor. Can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force of the drive motor 178 required when the swingable movable body 181 tilted to the second position is pulled up to the first position, and the drive motor 178 can be downsized.

また、実施例に係る右可動演出装置106は、第1位置に揺動可動体181を保持した状態において、第1位置から第2位置に揺動可動体181が揺動する際の連繋軸197の回転方向(図58では右方向)の後方側の端部が前記設置部材170(円弧状案内孔177の端部)に当接している。しかも、この当接状態では、揺動可動体181に対する作動杆200の枢支点(第2の回転連結軸202)と、カム板195の回転中心点(支軸195a)とを通る直線L2に対して、揺動可動体181を起立方向へ揺動する際のカム板195の回転方向(図58では右回転方向)に連繋軸197が偏って位置しているから、該揺動可動体181を直接操作して揺動する力が作用したとしても、連繋軸197が設置部材170(円弧状案内孔177の端部)に押しつけられる方向にカム板195が回転され、当該揺動可動体181が第2位置へ向けて揺動することはない。従って、前述のように第1位置に揺動可動体181がある状態で、可動部材180の自重により第2位置に向けて揺動する力が作用するよう構成しても、該可動体を確実に第1位置に保持することができる。しかも、揺動可動体181を第1位置に保持するために駆動モータ178を駆動する必要がないから、該駆動モータ178に掛かる負荷や制御負荷の軽減に繋がる。また、パチンコ機10の搬送時等に揺動可動体181が第2位置に移動することも確実に防止できる。   Further, the right movable effect device 106 according to the embodiment includes the connecting shaft 197 when the swing movable body 181 swings from the first position to the second position in a state where the swing movable body 181 is held at the first position. The rear end in the rotational direction (rightward in FIG. 58) is in contact with the installation member 170 (the end of the arcuate guide hole 177). Moreover, in this contact state, with respect to a straight line L2 passing through the pivot point (second rotary connecting shaft 202) of the operating rod 200 with respect to the swingable movable body 181 and the rotation center point (support shaft 195a) of the cam plate 195. Since the connecting shaft 197 is offset in the rotation direction of the cam plate 195 when swinging the swinging movable body 181 in the standing direction (right rotation direction in FIG. 58), the swinging movable body 181 is Even if a swinging force is applied by direct operation, the cam plate 195 is rotated in a direction in which the connecting shaft 197 is pressed against the installation member 170 (the end of the arcuate guide hole 177), and the swing movable body 181 is moved. There is no swing toward the second position. Therefore, even when the swinging movable body 181 is in the first position as described above and the swinging force is applied to the second position due to the weight of the movable member 180, the movable body can be reliably secured. Can be held in the first position. In addition, since it is not necessary to drive the drive motor 178 in order to hold the swing movable body 181 in the first position, this leads to a reduction in the load applied to the drive motor 178 and the control load. Further, it is possible to reliably prevent the swingable movable body 181 from moving to the second position when the pachinko machine 10 is transported.

一方で、第2位置に揺動可動体181を保持した状態では、第1位置から第2位置に揺動可動体181が揺動する際の連繋軸197の回転方向(図58における右回転方向)の後方側の端部が前記設置部材170(円弧状案内孔177の端部)に当接している。しかも、この当接状態において、揺動可動体181に対する作動杆200の枢支点(第2の回転連結軸202)と、カム板195の回転中心点(支軸195a)とを通る直線L2に対して、揺動可動体181を起立方向へ揺動する際のカム板195の回転方向(図59では左回転方向)に連繋軸197が偏って位置しているから、揺動可動体181を第2位置に保持した状態では、該揺動可動体181を直接操作して揺動する力が作用した場合には、連繋軸197が円弧状案内孔177に沿って移動するようカム板195が回転されるから、当該揺動可動体181を揺動することができる。すなわち、何らかの不具合により駆動モータ178によって揺動可動体181を第2位置から揺動不能な状態となったとしても、手動で揺動可動体181を第1位置に戻すことができる。   On the other hand, in a state where the swing movable body 181 is held at the second position, the rotation direction of the connecting shaft 197 when the swing movable body 181 swings from the first position to the second position (the right rotation direction in FIG. 58). ) Is in contact with the installation member 170 (the end of the arcuate guide hole 177). Moreover, in this abutting state, with respect to a straight line L2 passing through the pivot point (second rotation connecting shaft 202) of the operating rod 200 with respect to the swing movable body 181 and the rotation center point (support shaft 195a) of the cam plate 195. Since the connecting shaft 197 is offset in the rotation direction of the cam plate 195 when swinging the swinging movable body 181 in the upright direction (the left-turning direction in FIG. 59), the swinging movable body 181 is moved to the first position. In the state of being held at the two positions, when a swinging force is applied by directly operating the swing movable body 181, the cam plate 195 rotates so that the connecting shaft 197 moves along the arcuate guide hole 177. Therefore, the swing movable body 181 can be swung. That is, even if the drive motor 178 makes the swing movable body 181 unable to swing from the second position due to some trouble, the swing movable body 181 can be manually returned to the first position.

また、前記右可動演出装置106の可動部材180は、前記揺動可動体181に形成した位置規制突部184が前記装飾可動体185に形成された位置規制凹部191に遊嵌されている。そして、前記揺動可動体181が第1位置にある状態では、当該揺動可動体181の起立方向への装飾可動体185の回転、すなわち装飾可動体185が裏ユニット19の右画壁部56d側に揺動するのを規制するよう前記位置規制突部184が位置規制凹部191の縁部に当接し、反対に揺動可動体181が第2位置にある状態では、当該揺動可動体181の起立方向への装飾可動体185の回転、すなわち装飾可動体185が裏ユニット19の右画壁部56d側に揺動するのを規制するよう位置規制突部184が位置規制凹部191の縁部に当接するから、揺動可動体181の揺動時に、装飾可動体185が周辺の他部材(装飾部材28、裏ユニット19の右画壁部56dや左可動演出装置105等)に接触することはなく、該装飾可動体185や周辺の他部材の損傷等を効果的に防止できる。   Further, the movable member 180 of the right movable effect device 106 has a position restricting projection 184 formed on the swing movable member 181 loosely fitted in a position restricting recess 191 formed on the decorative movable member 185. When the swing movable body 181 is in the first position, the decoration movable body 185 is rotated in the upright direction of the swing movable body 181, that is, the decoration movable body 185 is the right image wall portion 56 d of the back unit 19. In the state where the position restricting protrusion 184 contacts the edge of the position restricting recess 191 so as to restrict the swing to the side, and the swing movable body 181 is in the second position, the swing movable body 181 The position restricting projection 184 is an edge of the position restricting recess 191 so as to restrict the rotation of the decor movable body 185 in the standing direction, that is, the swing of the decor movable body 185 toward the right image wall 56 d side of the back unit 19. Since the movable movable body 181 swings, the decorative movable body 185 comes into contact with other peripheral members (the decorative member 28, the right wall portion 56d of the rear unit 19, the left movable effect device 105, etc.). The decorative movable body Damage 85 and surrounding other members such as can be effectively prevented.

しかも、揺動可動体181が第1位置および第2位置にある状態では、該揺動可動体181が移動可能な方向、すなわち揺動可動体181の動作が予定されている方向にのみ装飾可動体185が揺動可能とされる。従って、揺動可動体181が第1位置または第2位置にある状態で搬送等されて装飾可動体185が揺動しても、揺動可動体181の動作に伴って移動する範囲で装飾可動体185が動作するだけで、装飾可動体185が周辺の他部材に接触等することはない。   In addition, in a state where the swing movable body 181 is in the first position and the second position, the decorative movable body 181 is movable only in the direction in which the swing movable body 181 can move, that is, the direction in which the swing movable body 181 is scheduled to operate. The body 185 can swing. Accordingly, even if the swing movable body 181 is transported in the state where the swing movable body 181 is at the first position or the second position and the decorative movable body 185 swings, the decorative movable body 181 can move within the range that moves with the operation of the swing movable body 181. Only the body 185 operates, and the decorative movable body 185 does not come into contact with other peripheral members.

特に、棒形状に形成した揺動可動体181の一方端部(下端部)を設置部材170に枢支すると共に、該揺動可動体181の他方端部(上端部)に装飾可動体185を枢支することで、揺動可動体181の揺動時に装飾可動体185を大きく移動させ動作による演出効果の向上を図り得る一方、装飾可動体185に作用する慣性力が増して、装飾可動体185が大きく揺動されることに繋がる。このような場合であっても、前述のように位置規制突部184と位置規制凹部191との係合により装飾可動体185の揺動範囲を確実に規制し得るから、装飾可動体185が周辺の他部材に接触することはなく、装飾可動体185や周辺部材の損傷等を効果的に防止できる。   In particular, one end (lower end) of the swing movable body 181 formed in a rod shape is pivotally supported by the installation member 170, and a decorative movable body 185 is provided at the other end (upper end) of the swing movable body 181. By pivotally supporting the movable movable body 181, the decorative movable body 185 can be largely moved to improve the performance effect by the operation, while the inertial force acting on the decorative movable body 185 is increased and the decorative movable body is increased. 185 is greatly swung. Even in such a case, the swinging range of the decorative movable body 185 can be reliably restricted by the engagement of the position restricting protrusion 184 and the position restricting recess 191 as described above. The other members are not contacted, and the decorative movable body 185 and peripheral members can be effectively prevented from being damaged.

(変更例)
本願は前述した実施例の構成に限定されるものではなく、その他の構成を適宜に採用することができる。
(1) 遊技盤を構成する板部材は、木製に限らず、アクリルやポリカーボネート等の光透過性の合成樹脂材からなる透明板であってもよい。なお、透明板を用いる場合は、裏側に配設される各種部品(例えば左可動体における可動基部)が前側から視認されないように、必要に応じて隠したい部品の前側に不透明な装飾部品等を配設すればよい。
(2) 窓側部用発光装置の窓用発光基板に設けられるコネクタ受部に関しては、部品用配線が差込み接続される接続口を、貫通孔および溝部を向く方向に開口するよう設定する構成を採用し得る。この構成によれば、コネクタ受部に一端を接続した部品用配線を貫通孔および溝部に向けてより引き回し易く、かつ部品用配線を無理に屈曲する必要もなく、配線への負担を軽減し得る。
(3) 実施例では、球検出センサが配設されるゲート用飾り部材を装飾部材に一体形成した場合で説明したが、ゲート用飾り部材を別体として板部材に配設するようにしてもよい。
(4) 実施例では、ゲート用飾り部材の近傍に配設する電気部品として発光装置の発光基板を挙げたが、該電気部品としては可動体を動作することで演出を行なう可動演出装置のモータやソレノイド等の駆動手段であってもよく、該駆動手段から導出する部品用配線を、球検出センサから導出するセンサ用配線を引き回すための溝部を利用して引き回す構成であればよい。
(5) 実施例では、板部材の裏側に裏ユニットを取り付けた際に、表示器の表示部(特別表示部)が板部材の前面と略同一レベルに臨む場合で説明したが、該表示部が板部材の前面より前側に臨む構成を採用することができる。すなわち、表示器の表示部を、板部材の前面より前側に臨ませることで、遊技盤の前側からの該表示部の視認性がより向上する。
(6) 実施例では、表示器を構成する1枚の表示基板に複数の表示部を設けた場合で説明したが、該表示器は、少なくとも始動入賞口へのパチンコ球の入賞を契機とした図柄変動の結果を表示する表示部(特別表示部)を備えるものであればよい。
(7) 実施例では、表示器を裏ユニットに取り付けるための表示器設置部を、該裏ユニットとは別体で形成してネジ止め固定する構成で説明したが、表示器設置部は裏ユニットに一体形成されたものであってもよい。
(8) 実施例では、板部材の第1の貫通口に配設される装飾部材の一部に設けた隅部光透過部の裏側に臨むよう、表示器を第1の貫通口に臨ませた場合で説明したが、装飾部材が配設される貫通口とは別に設けた貫通口(開口部)を介して表示器の表示部が前側から視認し得るよう構成してもよい。
(9) 実施例では、正面右側に位置する表示器から裏ユニットの裏側に引き出した表示器用配線を、該裏ユニットにおける左側の基板設置部に取り付けた裏中継基板に接続するよう構成したが、右側の基板設置部、すなわち表示器の略真後に位置する基板設置部に取り付けた裏中継基板に接続するようにしてもよい。この場合は、裏ユニットの裏側において表示器用配線を引き回す長さを短かくすることができ、該配線を係止するためのフック等を省略することができ、裏ユニットの構成を簡略化し得る。
(10) 実施例では、左排出用球通路における入賞口用発光装置が前側に重なる部位の前面開口もカバー部材で覆うよう構成したが、該入賞口用発光装置が前側に重ならない部位の前面開口のみを覆い得るよう形成したカバー部材を採用し得る。なお、この構成では、入賞口用発光装置として、入賞用発光基板の裏面を保護するカバーでケース体の裏面開口を塞ぐ構成が推奨される。
(11) 実施例では、入賞口用飾り部材の後方に配設される演出装置として、LEDにより発光演出する発光装置(入賞口用発光装置)の場合で説明したが、遊技状態を表示部で表示する表示器や、可動体を動作することで演出を行なう可動演出装置を採用することができる。但し、可動演出装置の場合は、左排出用球通路を流れるパチンコ球と可動体とが接触しないように、該可動体の後方をカバーで覆ったり、またはカバー部材で可動演出装置と左排出用球通路との重なる部位の全体を覆う構成を採用する必要がある。
(12) 実施例では、カバー部材を通路用壁部と入賞口用発光装置とで挟持するよう構成したが、通路用壁部に対してフックやネジ等の固定手段を介して着脱自在に固定する構成を採用し得る。
(13) 実施例では、ステージ部から始動入賞装置の上側にパチンコ球を排出する球通路に3条のリブを設ける場合で説明したが、3条のリブを設ける球通路としてはこれに限定されるものではなく、遊技に供されているパチンコ球を所定箇所に誘導する球通路として採用することができる。
(14) 実施例では、統括制御装置にケーブルを介して接続する裏中継基板を取り付ける基板設置部に、該中継基板の移動を規制する突部を設けた場合で説明したが、該ケーブルが接続する対象となる電気部品は統括制御装置に限定されるものでなく、その他の制御装置、あるいは遊技盤に配設される各種の演出装置等であってもよい。
(15) 実施例では、裏ユニットの下側に設けた基板設置部に突部を設けたが、基板設置部が設けられる位置は上側、左側または右側等であってもよく、当該基板設置部において、該基板設置部に取り付けられる中継基板に一端が接続されるケーブルの他端を接続する電気部品に近接する端部側に突部が設けられるものであればよい。また、基板設置部において、電気部品に近接する端部側と交差する端部(実施例では左右の端部)の何れか一方または両方にも中継基板の移動を規制する突部を設ける構成を採用し得る。
(16) 実施例では、装飾部材の上部を照明するように、可動体の前方に位置する発光装置を裏ユニットに配設した場合で説明したが、該発光装置の配設位置はこれに限定されるものではなく、装飾部材の下部、左右の側部等、任意の位置を照明する位置に発光装置を配設することができる。すなわち、待機位置と作動位置との間を往復移動する可動体が待機位置に臨む状態において、該可動体の作動位置への移動側とは反対側に臨む延出部に発光装置が配設されて可動体の前方に臨む構成であればよい。
(17) 実施例では、第1の上部発光装置(可動体の前方に位置する発光装置)を裏ユニットに取り付けるための延出部を、該裏ユニットに取り付けられる第2の上部発光装置を構成するカバー体に設けた場合で説明したが、該延出部を裏ユニットの設置部に一体成形する構成を採用し得る。
(18) 実施例では、左可動体に一対の副可動体(第2の可動体)を配設したが、副可動体の配設数は1つ、あるいは3つ以上であってもよい。そして、3つ以上の副可動体を配設する場合においても、1つの第2の駆動部に接続する連繋機構に各副可動体を夫々連繋して、各副可動体を相互に同期して動作するよう構成すれば、複数の駆動部を用いることなく複数の副可動体を動作させることができる。
(19) 実施例では、上下方向に往復移動する左可動体に対し、副可動体を左右方向に往復移動するよう構成したが、該副可動体を左可動体の往復移動方向と同じ方向あるいは斜めに交差する方向に往復移動させたり、軸を支点として揺動する構成等、各種の構成を採用し得る。
(20) 実施例では、連繋機構を複数の連杆を相互に接続して構成したが、1本の連杆を用いて副可動体を動作させる構成を採用でき、これにより構成がより簡単になって軽量化に寄与し得る。
(21) 実施例では、上下反転したL字状の左可動体において、可動基部から横方向に延びる腕部に副可動体を配設した場合で説明したが、第2の可動体が配設される第1の可動体の形状はこれに限定されるものでなく、直線または曲線形状で一方向に長手が延在する形状の第1の可動体における延在方向の一端部を、遊技盤に対して移動自在に配設された支持部に取り付けるよう構成したものであってもよい。すなわち、第1の可動体が片持ち支持されて、該支持部側とは反対の自由端部側に第2の可動体が配設されるのに対し、支持部側に第2の駆動部が配設される構成のものであればよく、第1の可動体の形状は限定されない。
(22) 実施例では、左側部磁気センサのセンサ設置部に関し、該設置部における左可動体の可動基部との重なり部を傾斜させたが、該可動基部から退避するよう切欠いた形状であってもよい。
(23) 実施例では、球通過ゲートや球導入口に対する磁石による不正を検出する磁気センサのセンサ設置部で、左可動体における可動基部の前方への変位を規制するよう構成したが、始動入賞装置や特別入賞装置に対する磁石による不正を検出する下磁気センサを裏ユニットに取り付けるためのセンサ設置部を利用して可動体の前方への変位を規制するようにしてもよい。すなわち、可動体の配設位置に応じて、対応する位置に取り付けられる磁気センサのセンサ設置部を用いればよい。
(24) 実施例では、複数の電気部品を備えた可動体として、遊技盤の左側部に配設した左可動体を挙げたが、可動体の配設位置はこれに限られるものではなく、上部や下部あるい右側部等、任意の位置であってもよい。また当該可動体の移動方向に関しても、上下方向に限らず左右方向あるいは斜め方向であってもよい。
(25) 実施例では、可動体に配設される複数の電気部品として、発光基板と駆動モータを挙げたが、複数の発光基板、あるいは複数の駆動モータ等の駆動源であってもよく、また実施例のように電気部品の数は2つに限定されず、3つ以上であってもよい。
(26) 実施例では、可動体(左可動体)に変位可能に配設される可動部材(副可動体)を動作させる駆動源としてモータを用いたが、ソレノイドやその他の駆動手段を用いることができる。
(27) 実施例では、複数の電気部品を備える可動体を動作させる機構としてラックとギヤとを用いたが、当該機構としてはベルトとプーリとを組合わせた機構等、その他公知の機構を採用し得る。
(28) 実施例では、可動体(左可動体)から導出する配線および該可動体を動作させる駆動モータ(第1の駆動モータ)から導出する配線とを、裏ユニットの前側に配設される中継基板(外部中継基板)に配設した後に、別の配線(中継用の配線)を介して裏ユニットの裏側に配設される基板(裏中継基板)に接続するよう構成したが、可動体および駆動モータから導出する配線を裏ユニットの裏側の基板に直接接続する構成を採用し得る。
(29) 実施例の外部中継基板(中継基板)に関し、ラックの前方で、該ラックの移動領域と重なるように配置する構成を採用することができ、これにより外部中継基板の前側を引き回される各種配線がラックの配設側に変位するのを確実に防止して配線の保護および可動体の円滑な移動の確保を図ることができる。また、外部中継基板の長手方向をラックの延在方向(可動体の往復移動方向)に沿わせて配設することで、ラックの移動領域を広い範囲で覆うことができる。
(30) 実施例では、揺動可動体に対する装飾可動体の回転範囲を規制する係合手段として、揺動可動体に突部(位置規制突部を形成すると共に、装飾可動体に凹部(位置規制凹部)を形成するようにしたが、揺動可動体に凹部(位置規制凹部)を形成し、装飾可動体に突部(位置規制突部)を形成してもよい。また、係合手段としては、実施例に示す突部(位置規制突部)および凹部(位置規制凹部)に限られるものではなく、揺動可動体が第1位置にある状態で相互に係合する第1の係合部を揺動可動体および装飾可動体の夫々に形成して、当該揺動可動体の第2位置から第1位置への移動方向への装飾可動体の回転を規制すると共に、当該揺動可動体が第2位置にある状態で相互に係合する第2の係合部を揺動可動体および装飾可動体の夫々に形成して、当該揺動可動体の第1位置から第2位置への移動方向への装飾可動体の回転を規制する構成を採用し得る。
(31) 揺動可動体および装飾可動体の形状は、実施例のものに限られるものではなく、遊技機の装飾や演出等に合わせて適宜に変更することが可能な事項である。また、実施例では、揺動可動体の一方端部を本体としての設置部材に枢支し、他方端部に装飾可動体を枢支するようにしたが、設置部材に対する枢支位置および装飾可動体の枢支位置を異ならせれば、揺動可動体の任意位置に設置部材および装飾可動体を枢支することができる。
(32) 実施例では、本体に対する揺動可動体の回転軸(第1の回転連結軸)と、当該揺動可動体に対する装飾可動体の回転軸(支持軸)との間に、作動部材(作動杆)を枢支するよう構成したが、これに限られるものではなく、本体に対する回転軸(第1の回転連結軸)から偏倚した位置に作動部材を枢支するよう構成すれば、該回転軸(第1の回転連結軸)に掛かる荷重の一部を作動部材で支持して負荷を分散することができる。従って、前記本体に対する回転軸(第1の回転連結軸)に対して、装飾可動体の回転軸(支持軸)とは反対側に位置するよう作動部材を枢支してもよく、また装飾可動体の回転軸(支持軸)よりも本体に対する回転軸(第1の回転連結軸)から離間するよう作動部材を枢支してもよい。
(33) 実施例では、前記第1位置に揺動可動体が保持された状態において、可動部材全体の重心が前記本体に対する揺動可動体の回転軸(第1の回転連結軸)を通る鉛直線よりも、当該揺動可動体の傾倒方向前側に位置するよう構成したが、これに限られるものではない。例えば、鉛直線上に重心位置があるようにすれば、第1位置での可動部材の安定性が一層向上し、また該鉛直線よりも揺動可動体の傾倒方向後側に位置するようにすれば、不用意に揺動可動体が第2位置へ向けて揺動するのを確実に防止できる。
(34) 実施例では、可動部材(揺動可動体および装飾可動体)用の駆動手段や駆動機構を、前記本体に対する揺動可動体の回転軸(第1の回転連結軸)の上方に位置させて、該揺動可動体を作動部材により吊り上げるよう構成したが、これに限られるものでなく、駆動手段や駆動機構を本体に対する揺動可動体の回転軸(第1の回転連結軸)の側方や下方に位置するよう構成しても、該回転軸(第1の回転連結軸)に掛かる負荷を効果的に分散して、実施例と同様の作用効果を得ることができる。
(35) 実施例では、第1位置にある揺動可動体に対して直接揺動する力が作用した場合に、連繋軸が設置部材の端部に当接して回転を規制することで、揺動可動体を第1位置に確実に保持し得るようにしたが、このような機械的構成によらず駆動手段を駆動制御により揺動可動体を第1位置で保持することもできる。
(36) 実施例では、第2位置にある状態で揺動可動体に対して直接揺動する力を加えることで、当該揺動可動体を第1位置に移動させ得るようにしたが、第1位置に揺動可動体がある場合と同様に、該第2位置に揺動可動体がある状態で直接揺動する力が作用した際に、揺動可動体の移動を規制するよう構成してもよい。具体的には、実施例の構成において、前記揺動可動体が第2位置にある状態で、該揺動可動体181に対する作動杆200の枢支点(第2の回転連結軸202)と、前記カム板195の回転中心点(支軸195a)とを通る直線L2に対して、揺動可動体181を第2位置から第1位置へ揺動する際の前記カム板195の回転方向後側(すなわち第1位置から第2位置に揺動する際の回転方向前側)に前記連繋軸197を偏って位置させればよい。
(37) 遊技機としては、パチンコ機に限られるものではなく、アレンジボール機やパチンコ球を用いたスロットマシン等、その他各種の遊技機であってもよい。
(Example of change)
The present application is not limited to the configuration of the above-described embodiment, and other configurations can be appropriately employed.
(1) The board member constituting the game board is not limited to wood, but may be a transparent board made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material such as acrylic or polycarbonate. In the case of using a transparent plate, an opaque decorative part or the like is provided on the front side of the part to be hidden as necessary so that various parts arranged on the back side (for example, the movable base in the left movable body) are not visually recognized from the front side. What is necessary is just to arrange | position.
(2) For the connector receiving part provided on the window light-emitting board of the window side light-emitting device, a configuration is adopted in which the connection port into which the component wiring is inserted and connected is set to open in the direction facing the through-hole and the groove. Can do. According to this configuration, the component wiring having one end connected to the connector receiving portion can be more easily routed toward the through hole and the groove portion, and it is not necessary to forcibly bend the component wiring, thereby reducing the burden on the wiring. .
(3) In the embodiment, the case has been described in which the gate decoration member on which the ball detection sensor is disposed is formed integrally with the decoration member. However, the gate decoration member may be separately disposed on the plate member. Good.
(4) In the embodiment, the light emitting substrate of the light emitting device is cited as the electric component disposed in the vicinity of the gate decoration member. As the electric component, a motor of a movable effect device that produces an effect by operating a movable body. It may be a driving means such as a solenoid, and any configuration may be used as long as the component wiring derived from the driving means is routed using a groove for routing the sensor wiring derived from the ball detection sensor.
(5) In the embodiment, when the back unit is attached to the back side of the plate member, the display unit (special display unit) of the display device has been described as facing substantially the same level as the front surface of the plate member. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the front faces the front side of the plate member. That is, by making the display unit of the display face the front side of the front surface of the plate member, the visibility of the display unit from the front side of the game board is further improved.
(6) In the embodiment, the case where a plurality of display units are provided on one display board constituting the display device has been described. However, the display device is triggered by at least a pachinko ball winning in a start winning opening. What is necessary is just to provide the display part (special display part) which displays the result of a symbol fluctuation.
(7) In the embodiment, the display installation portion for attaching the display device to the back unit has been described as being configured separately from the back unit and fixed with screws, but the display installation portion is the back unit. It may be integrally formed with.
(8) In the embodiment, the display device is made to face the first through-hole so as to face the back side of the corner light transmitting portion provided in a part of the decorative member arranged in the first through-hole of the plate member. As described above, the display unit of the display may be configured to be visible from the front side through a through hole (opening) provided separately from the through hole in which the decorative member is disposed.
(9) In the embodiment, the display wiring drawn from the display located on the right side of the front side to the back side of the back unit is configured to be connected to the back relay board attached to the left side of the back unit. You may make it connect with the back relay board attached to the board | substrate installation part on the right side, ie, the board | substrate installation part located just behind a display. In this case, it is possible to shorten the length of the wiring for the display on the back side of the back unit, to omit the hook for locking the wiring, and to simplify the configuration of the back unit.
(10) In the embodiment, the front opening of the part where the winning opening light emitting device overlaps the front side in the left discharge ball passage is also covered with the cover member, but the front side of the part where the winning opening light emitting device does not overlap the front side A cover member formed so as to cover only the opening may be employed. In this configuration, a configuration in which the back surface opening of the case body is closed with a cover that protects the back surface of the light emitting substrate for winning is recommended as the light emitting device for the prize opening.
(11) In the embodiment, the description has been given of the case of the light emitting device (light emitting device for the prize opening) that emits light by the LED as the effect device arranged behind the decorative member for the prize opening, but the gaming state is displayed on the display unit. It is possible to employ a display device for display or a movable effect device that produces an effect by operating a movable body. However, in the case of a movable effect device, the pachinko ball flowing in the left discharge ball passage and the movable member are covered with a cover, or the cover member is used to cover the movable effect device and the left discharge member so that the movable member is not in contact with the pachinko ball. It is necessary to employ a configuration that covers the entire portion overlapping with the ball passage.
(12) In the embodiment, the cover member is configured to be sandwiched between the passage wall portion and the light-emitting device for the prize opening. However, the cover member is detachably fixed to the passage wall portion through fixing means such as a hook or a screw. It is possible to adopt a configuration to
(13) In the embodiment, the case where three ribs are provided in the ball passage for discharging the pachinko balls from the stage portion to the upper side of the start winning device has been described. However, the ball passage provided with the three ribs is not limited thereto. Instead, it can be used as a ball path for guiding a pachinko ball used in a game to a predetermined location.
(14) In the embodiment, the case where a protrusion for restricting the movement of the relay board is provided in the board installation part for attaching the back relay board to be connected to the overall control device via the cable has been described. The electrical component to be processed is not limited to the overall control device, but may be other control devices or various effect devices arranged on the game board.
(15) In the embodiment, the protrusion is provided on the board installation part provided on the lower side of the back unit. However, the board installation part may be provided on the upper side, the left side, or the right side. In this case, any protrusion may be provided on the end side close to the electrical component that connects the other end of the cable whose one end is connected to the relay board attached to the board installation portion. Further, in the board installation part, a configuration is provided in which protrusions for restricting the movement of the relay board are provided at either or both of the end parts (left and right end parts in the embodiment) intersecting with the end side close to the electrical component. Can be adopted.
(16) In the embodiment, the case where the light emitting device located in front of the movable body is arranged in the back unit so as to illuminate the upper part of the decorative member has been described, but the arrangement position of the light emitting device is limited to this. However, the light emitting device can be disposed at a position that illuminates an arbitrary position, such as a lower portion of the decorative member and left and right side portions. That is, in a state where the movable body that reciprocates between the standby position and the operating position faces the standby position, the light emitting device is disposed in the extending portion that faces the side opposite to the moving side of the movable body to the operating position. Any structure that faces the front of the movable body may be used.
(17) In the embodiment, the extending portion for attaching the first upper light emitting device (the light emitting device located in front of the movable body) to the back unit constitutes the second upper light emitting device attached to the back unit. As described in the case where the cover body is provided, a configuration in which the extension portion is integrally formed with the installation portion of the back unit may be employed.
(18) In the embodiment, a pair of sub movable bodies (second movable bodies) are disposed on the left movable body, but the number of sub movable bodies may be one, or three or more. Even when three or more sub-movable bodies are provided, each sub-movable body is linked to a linkage mechanism connected to one second drive unit, and the sub-movable bodies are synchronized with each other. If configured to operate, a plurality of sub movable bodies can be operated without using a plurality of driving units.
(19) In the embodiment, the sub movable body is configured to reciprocate in the left-right direction with respect to the left movable body that reciprocates in the vertical direction, but the sub movable body is moved in the same direction as the reciprocating direction of the left movable body or Various configurations such as a configuration in which reciprocation is performed in an obliquely intersecting direction, and a configuration in which the shaft swings around a fulcrum can be employed.
(20) In the embodiment, the linkage mechanism is configured by connecting a plurality of linkages to each other. However, a configuration in which the sub movable body is operated using a single linkage can be adopted, thereby simplifying the configuration. Can contribute to weight reduction.
(21) In the embodiment, in the L-shaped left movable body inverted upside down, the sub movable body is disposed on the arm portion extending in the lateral direction from the movable base, but the second movable body is disposed. The shape of the first movable body is not limited to this, and one end portion in the extending direction of the first movable body having a straight or curved shape and extending in one direction is provided on the game board. It may be configured to be attached to a support portion that is movably disposed with respect to. That is, the first movable body is cantilevered and the second movable body is disposed on the free end side opposite to the support section side, whereas the second drive section is disposed on the support section side. The shape of the first movable body is not limited as long as the structure is arranged.
(22) In the embodiment, regarding the sensor installation part of the left side magnetic sensor, the overlapping part of the installation part with the movable base part of the left movable body is inclined, but the shape is notched so as to retract from the movable base part. Also good.
(23) In the embodiment, the sensor installation portion of the magnetic sensor for detecting fraud by the magnet with respect to the ball passage gate and the ball inlet is configured to regulate the forward displacement of the movable base in the left movable body. You may make it regulate the displacement of a movable body ahead using the sensor installation part for attaching the lower magnetic sensor which detects the fraud by the magnet with respect to an apparatus or a special prize-winning apparatus to a back unit. That is, a sensor installation part of a magnetic sensor attached to a corresponding position may be used according to the arrangement position of the movable body.
(24) In the example, the left movable body disposed on the left side of the game board is cited as the movable body including a plurality of electrical components, but the position of the movable body is not limited to this, An arbitrary position such as an upper part, a lower part, or a right side part may be used. Further, the moving direction of the movable body is not limited to the vertical direction, and may be the horizontal direction or the oblique direction.
(25) In the embodiment, the light emitting substrate and the drive motor are exemplified as the plurality of electric components disposed on the movable body. However, the light source may be a plurality of light emitting substrates, or a drive source such as a plurality of drive motors. Further, the number of electrical components is not limited to two as in the embodiment, and may be three or more.
(26) In the embodiment, the motor is used as a driving source for operating the movable member (sub movable body) disposed to be displaceable on the movable body (left movable body). However, a solenoid or other driving means is used. Can do.
(27) In the embodiment, a rack and a gear are used as a mechanism for operating a movable body including a plurality of electric components, but other known mechanisms such as a combination of a belt and a pulley are used as the mechanism. Can do.
(28) In the embodiment, the wiring derived from the movable body (left movable body) and the wiring derived from the drive motor (first drive motor) for operating the movable body are arranged on the front side of the back unit. After being arranged on the relay board (external relay board), it was configured to connect to the board (back relay board) arranged on the back side of the back unit via another wiring (relay wiring), but the movable body In addition, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the wiring derived from the drive motor is directly connected to the substrate on the back side of the back unit.
(29) With regard to the external relay board (relay board) of the embodiment, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which it is arranged in front of the rack so as to overlap the moving area of the rack, whereby the front side of the external relay board is routed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the various wirings from being displaced to the side where the rack is provided, thereby protecting the wiring and ensuring the smooth movement of the movable body. Further, by arranging the longitudinal direction of the external relay board along the extending direction of the rack (the reciprocating direction of the movable body), the moving area of the rack can be covered in a wide range.
(30) In the embodiment, as the engaging means for restricting the rotation range of the decorative movable body with respect to the swing movable body, the swing movable body is formed with a protrusion (position restricting protrusion and the decorative movable body is provided with a recess (position However, it is also possible to form a recess (position regulation recess) in the swing movable body and form a projection (position regulation projection) in the decorative movable body. Are not limited to the protrusions (position restricting protrusions) and the recesses (position restricting recessed portions) shown in the embodiment, but the first engagement that engages with each other while the swingable movable body is in the first position. A joint portion is formed on each of the swing movable body and the decorative movable body to restrict the rotation of the decorative movable body in the moving direction from the second position to the first position of the swing movable body, and A second engaging portion that engages with each other while the movable body is in the second position is formed on each of the swing movable body and the decorative movable body. A configuration that restricts the rotation of the decorative movable body in the moving direction from the first position to the second position of the swing movable body may be employed.
(31) The shapes of the oscillating movable body and the decorative movable body are not limited to those of the embodiment, and are matters that can be appropriately changed in accordance with the decoration or performance of the gaming machine. In the embodiment, one end portion of the swing movable body is pivotally supported by the installation member as the main body, and the decorative movable body is pivotally supported by the other end portion. If the pivoting position of the body is changed, the installation member and the decorative movable body can be pivotally supported at an arbitrary position of the swing movable body.
(32) In the embodiment, an operating member (a first rotation connecting shaft) of the swing movable body with respect to the main body and a rotation shaft (support shaft) of the decorative movable body with respect to the swing movable body are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the actuating member is pivotally supported at a position deviated from the rotation shaft (first rotation connecting shaft) with respect to the main body, the rotation A part of the load applied to the shaft (first rotary connecting shaft) can be supported by the operating member to distribute the load. Therefore, the operating member may be pivotally supported so as to be located on the opposite side of the rotating shaft (support shaft) of the decorative movable body with respect to the rotating shaft (first rotating connecting shaft) with respect to the main body. The operating member may be pivotally supported so as to be separated from the rotation axis (first rotation connecting shaft) with respect to the main body rather than the rotation axis (support shaft) of the body.
(33) In an embodiment, in a state where the swing movable body is held at the first position, the center of gravity of the entire movable member passes vertically through the rotation axis (first rotation connecting shaft) of the swing movable body with respect to the main body. Although it is configured to be positioned on the front side in the tilt direction of the swing movable body with respect to the line, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the center of gravity is located on the vertical line, the stability of the movable member at the first position is further improved, and the movable member is positioned behind the vertical line in the tilt direction. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably prevent the swinging movable body from swinging toward the second position carelessly.
(34) In the embodiment, the drive means and drive mechanism for the movable member (the swing movable body and the decorative movable body) are positioned above the rotation shaft (first rotation connecting shaft) of the swing movable body with respect to the main body. Thus, the swing movable body is configured to be lifted by the actuating member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drive means and the drive mechanism are connected to the rotation shaft (first rotation connecting shaft) of the swing movable body relative to the main body. Even if it is configured to be located on the side or below, it is possible to effectively disperse the load applied to the rotating shaft (first rotating connecting shaft) and obtain the same operational effects as in the embodiment.
(35) In the embodiment, when a direct swinging force is applied to the swinging movable body at the first position, the connecting shaft abuts against the end of the installation member to restrict the rotation, thereby Although the movable movable body can be reliably held at the first position, the swinging movable body can be held at the first position by driving control of the driving means regardless of such a mechanical configuration.
(36) In the embodiment, the swing movable body can be moved to the first position by applying a swinging force directly to the swing movable body in the second position. As in the case where there is a swing movable body at one position, the movement of the swing movable body is restricted when a direct swinging force is applied with the swing movable body at the second position. May be. Specifically, in the configuration of the embodiment, in a state where the swing movable body is in the second position, the pivot point (second rotation connecting shaft 202) of the operating rod 200 with respect to the swing movable body 181; The rear side of the cam plate 195 in the rotation direction when the swing movable body 181 swings from the second position to the first position with respect to a straight line L2 passing through the rotation center point (support shaft 195a) of the cam plate 195 ( In other words, the connecting shaft 197 may be biased and positioned on the front side in the rotation direction when swinging from the first position to the second position.
(37) The gaming machine is not limited to a pachinko machine and may be other various gaming machines such as an arrangement ball machine or a slot machine using a pachinko ball.

(付記)
遊技機に関しては、以下のように限定することができる。
前記遊技盤(17)は、前側に遊技球(W)が流下可能な遊技領域(18a)が設けられる不透明な板部材(18)と、該板部材(18)の裏側に取り付けられ、可動体(120)が移動自在に配設される裏ユニット(19)とから構成され、
前記板部材(18)には、前記裏ユニット(19)に配設した図柄表示装置(13)の表示部を前側から視認可能とする開口部(21a)が設けられ、
前記可動体(120)は、前記板部材(18)における開口部(21a)の側方裏側に臨む基部(122)と、該基部(122)から延出して開口部(21a)に臨む露出部(123)とを備える。
(Appendix)
Regarding the gaming machine, it can be limited as follows.
The game board (17) is attached to an opaque plate member (18) provided with a game area (18a) through which a game ball (W) can flow down on the front side and a back side of the plate member (18), and is movable. (120) is composed of a rear unit (19) arranged movably,
The plate member (18) is provided with an opening (21a) that allows the display unit of the symbol display device (13) disposed in the back unit (19) to be visually recognized from the front side,
The movable body (120) includes a base portion (122) facing the back side of the opening (21a) in the plate member (18), and an exposed portion extending from the base portion (122) and facing the opening (21a). (123).

17 遊技盤
105 左可動演出装置(可動演出装置)
121 第1の駆動部
122 可動基部(支持部)
123 腕部(第1の可動体)
131 空間部
139a 左副可動体(第2の可動体)
139b 右副可動体(第2の可動体)
140 第2の駆動部
141 連繋機構
143 第2の駆動モータ(電気部品)
145 第1連杆(連繋部材)
146 第2連杆(連繋部材)
147 第3連杆(連繋部材)
150 ピニオン(第2の連繋機構)
151 ラック部材(第2の連繋機構)
154 可動体発光基板(電気部品)
155 副可動体用原位置センサ(原位置センサ)
156 発光用配線(配線)
157 第2駆動用配線(配線)
158 内部中継基板(中継基板)
159 内部中継用コネクタ受部(中継用コネクタ受部)
160 中継用配線
161 外部中継基板(基板)
17 Game board 105 Left movable production device (movable production device)
121 1st drive part 122 movable base part (support part)
123 Arm (first movable body)
131 Space part 139a Left sub movable body (second movable body)
139b Right sub movable body (second movable body)
140 Second Drive Unit 141 Linking Mechanism
143 Second drive motor (electrical part)
145 First connection (connection member)
146 Second ream (connected member)
147 Third ream (connected member)
150 pinion (second linkage mechanism)
151 Rack member (second linkage mechanism)
154 Movable light-emitting substrate (electric parts)
155 Sub-movable original position sensor (original position sensor)
156 Light emission wiring (wiring)
157 Second drive wiring (wiring)
158 Internal relay board (relay board)
159 Internal relay connector receiving part (relay connector receiving part)
160 Wiring for relay
161 External relay board (board)

Claims (4)

可動体の動作により演出を行なう可動演出装置を遊技盤に備えた遊技機において、
前記可動演出装置は、
前記遊技盤の盤面に沿って直線的に移動自在で遊技盤の前側から視認不能な支持部と、
前記支持部に片持ち支持された第1の可動体と、
前記支持部を移動させる第1の駆動部と、
前記第1の可動体に変位可能に配設された第2の可動体と、
前記支持部に配設された第2の駆動部と、
前記第2の可動体と第2の駆動部とを連繋し、第2の駆動部の駆動によって第2の可動体を動作させる連繋機構とから構成され、
前記遊技盤の前側から視認不能な支持部に、可動演出装置に配設された複数の電気部品の夫々に一端が接続される複数の配線の他端が接続される中継基板が配設されると共に、該中継基板に、前記複数の配線が集約して電気的に接続する中継用コネクタ受部が設けられ、
前記中継用コネクタ受部に一端が接続する中継用配線の他端が、遊技盤に配設された基板に接続され、
前記可動演出装置が配設される遊技盤の設置部には、第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する前記支持部の移動を許容する空間部が移動方向に沿って設けられ、
前記中継用コネクタ受部に一端が接続する前記中継用配線は、前記支持部から前記空間部内に引き出されて収容された後に、他端が空間部の側方に配設した前記基板に接続され、
前記支持部の移動に伴い中継用配線が空間部内で移動するよう構成された
ことを特徴とする遊技機。
In a gaming machine equipped with a movable effect device that produces an effect by the action of a movable body,
The movable effect device is:
A support portion that is linearly movable along the surface of the game board and is not visible from the front side of the game board ;
A first movable body cantilevered by the support part;
A first drive unit for moving the support unit;
A second movable body displaceably arranged on the first movable body;
A second drive unit disposed on the support unit;
The second movable body and the second drive unit are linked to each other, and a linkage mechanism that operates the second movable body by driving the second drive unit,
A relay board to which the other end of a plurality of wirings connected to one end of each of a plurality of electrical components arranged in the movable effect device is connected to a support portion that is invisible from the front side of the game board. In addition, the relay board is provided with a relay connector receiving portion that aggregates and electrically connects the plurality of wirings,
The other end of the relay wiring connected at one end to the relay connector receiving portion is connected to a board disposed on the game board,
A space part allowing movement of the support part that moves between the first position and the second position is provided along the movement direction in the setting part of the game board in which the movable effect device is disposed,
The relay wiring having one end connected to the relay connector receiving portion is drawn out from the support portion into the space portion and accommodated, and the other end is connected to the substrate disposed on the side of the space portion. ,
A gaming machine, wherein the relay wiring is configured to move in the space as the support portion moves .
前記連繋機構は、第1の可動体に沿って延在するよう配設され、一端部が第2の可動体に連繋されると共に他端部が第2の駆動部に連繋される連繋部材を備え、第2の駆動部の駆動によって連繋部材を第1の可動体に沿って直線的に移動することで第2の可動体を動作させるよう構成した請求項1記載の遊技機。   The linkage mechanism is disposed so as to extend along the first movable body, and includes a linkage member having one end portion linked to the second movable body and the other end portion linked to the second drive portion. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a second movable body that is operated by linearly moving the connecting member along the first movable body by driving the second drive section. 前記第1の可動体に前記第2の可動体が2つ配設されると共に、前記連繋部材は2つの第2の可動体に夫々連繋されて、該連繋部材の移動によって2つの第2の可動体が同期して動作するよう構成した請求項2記載の遊技機。   Two second movable bodies are arranged on the first movable body, and the linking member is linked to two second movable bodies, and two second movable bodies are moved by the movement of the linking member. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the movable body is configured to operate in synchronization. 一方の第2の可動体は、前記連繋機構に直接連繋されると共に、他方の第2の可動体は、連繋機構に連繋する第2の連繋機構に連繋されて一方の第2の可動体と同期して動作するよう構成され、前記第1の可動体には、前記連繋機構に直接連繋される一方の第2の可動体の位置を検出可能な原位置センサが配設される請求項3記載の遊技機。   One second movable body is directly linked to the linkage mechanism, and the other second movable body is linked to the second linkage mechanism linked to the linkage mechanism, 4. An in-situ sensor that is configured to operate in synchronization and capable of detecting the position of one second movable body that is directly linked to the linkage mechanism is disposed in the first movable body. The gaming machine described.
JP2010041102A 2010-02-25 2010-02-25 Game machine Active JP5427064B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2010041102A JP5427064B2 (en) 2010-02-25 2010-02-25 Game machine

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2010041102A JP5427064B2 (en) 2010-02-25 2010-02-25 Game machine

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2011172869A JP2011172869A (en) 2011-09-08
JP5427064B2 true JP5427064B2 (en) 2014-02-26

Family

ID=44686313

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2010041102A Active JP5427064B2 (en) 2010-02-25 2010-02-25 Game machine

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (1) JP5427064B2 (en)

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6057553B2 (en) * 2012-06-12 2017-01-11 株式会社平和 Game machine
JP2016123622A (en) * 2014-12-26 2016-07-11 京楽産業.株式会社 Game machine
JP6298875B2 (en) * 2016-12-06 2018-03-20 株式会社平和 Game machine
JP6346681B2 (en) * 2017-02-07 2018-06-20 株式会社三共 Game machine
JP6346682B2 (en) * 2017-02-07 2018-06-20 株式会社三共 Game machine
JP6346683B2 (en) * 2017-02-07 2018-06-20 株式会社三共 Game machine
JP6346680B2 (en) * 2017-02-07 2018-06-20 株式会社三共 Game machine

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001137441A (en) * 1999-11-16 2001-05-22 Sophia Co Ltd Game machine
JP2003135691A (en) * 2001-11-06 2003-05-13 Heiwa Corp Pachinko machine
JP4858905B2 (en) * 2005-10-31 2012-01-18 株式会社大一商会 Game machine
JP4739053B2 (en) * 2006-02-17 2011-08-03 株式会社ニューギン Movable production device for gaming machines
JP5102995B2 (en) * 2006-10-13 2012-12-19 京楽産業.株式会社 Game machine
JP2008113757A (en) * 2006-11-01 2008-05-22 Olympia:Kk Performance device for game machine
JP5271623B2 (en) * 2008-07-15 2013-08-21 京楽産業.株式会社 Decorative body unit
JP5116600B2 (en) * 2008-08-01 2013-01-09 日本ぱちんこ部品株式会社 Rendering device for gaming machine and gaming machine equipped with the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2011172869A (en) 2011-09-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5427064B2 (en) Game machine
JP5824238B2 (en) Pachinko machine
JP5441089B2 (en) Winning units and gaming machines
JP5388813B2 (en) Game machine
JP5427063B2 (en) Game machine
JP5467847B2 (en) Game machine
JP5604084B2 (en) Game machine
JP5445851B2 (en) Game machine
JP5427065B2 (en) Game machine
JP5650415B2 (en) Game machine
JP5498816B2 (en) Game machine
JP5368342B2 (en) Game machine
JP5427066B2 (en) Game machine
JP5508058B2 (en) Game machine
JP5329458B2 (en) Game machine
JP5439142B2 (en) Game machine
JP5559569B2 (en) Game machine
JP5406075B2 (en) Game machine
JP2014028174A (en) Game machine
JP4344711B2 (en) Game machine
JP5290851B2 (en) Game machine
JP5410823B2 (en) Game machine
JP5581637B2 (en) Game machine
JP4344710B2 (en) Game machine
JP2014223457A (en) Game machine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
A621 Written request for application examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A621

Effective date: 20120530

A977 Report on retrieval

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A971007

Effective date: 20130809

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20130820

A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20131011

TRDD Decision of grant or rejection written
A01 Written decision to grant a patent or to grant a registration (utility model)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A01

Effective date: 20131112

A61 First payment of annual fees (during grant procedure)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A61

Effective date: 20131129

R150 Certificate of patent or registration of utility model

Ref document number: 5427064

Country of ref document: JP

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R150

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R150

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250